SM PDF

Order Number: MGCS031201C0
H21
Digital Imaging Systems

DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
[ Version 1.0 ]
WARNING
This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public.
It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.
Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service
or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.
© 2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is
a violation of law.
This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit
Boards (PCBs).
Information regarding Lead-Free (PbF) solder:
Distinction of PbF PCB:

PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a mark following
the PCB part numbers in a label on the PCB.
Caution:
Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder; typically
the melting point is 50 - 70 F (30 - 40 C) higher. Please use a soldering iron
with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F (370 10 C). Exercise care
while using higher temperature soldering irons, do not heat the PCB for too long
to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB.
Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100 F/600 C).
ECO SOLDER M705 (available from Senju Metal Industry Co., Ltd.:
URL: http://www.senju-m.co.jp) is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs.
The contents of this Service Manual and the Specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in
the product design without reservation and without notice.
Published in Japan.
2
Important Notice
Please read this notice completely BEFORE installing any optional
accessories. As failure to properly install the additional board or
connector with the power ON could damage the machine’s SPC or
SC board.
Please follow the instructions below:
1. It is essential that you turn OFF the Main Power Switch located
on the Right Side of the machine.
2. It is essential that you unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall
outlet. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution
disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the
AC Power Cord, if the Fax option is installed.)
3. Please read the installation instructions carefully and follow each
step.
<Example: DP-1820E>
Note:
O = Power OFF, l = Power ON
Note:
If the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being
performed (similar to Windows OS when the power is abruptly interrupted), it is
important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switch on the
machine.
1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch on the
Right Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)",
continue to step 2 below.
2. Press "FUNCTION" and "ENERGY SAVER" keys simultaneously first.
3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive
Unit and advances into "ENERGY SAVER MODE".
4. Turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position.
5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the
Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord, if the Fax option is installed.)
* The specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves
the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice.
3
Caution:
Depending on your machine’s model, it may weight approximately 93.26 - 98.33
lb (42.3 - 44.6 kg) without any options.
To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and lift or move
the machine as illustrated.
Do not lift the machine by the Paper Tray as it may cause damage and/or bodily
injury.
Note:
Refer to the Installation Instructions when installing the machine.
4
Precautions
For Your Safety
To prevent severe injury and loss of life, read this section carefully before servicing the Panasonic
machine to ensure proper and safe operation.
Please ensure that the machine is installed near a wall outlet and is easily accessible.
This section explains the graphic symbols used in the machine and/or this manual.
WARNING:
Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION:
Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
This section also explains the graphic symbols used in the machine and/or this manual.
These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure
that must not be performed.
These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure
that must be emphasized in order to operate the machine safely.
Installation and Relocation Cautions

CAUTION
Do not place the machine near heaters or volatile, flammable, or combustible materials
such as curtains that may catch fire.
Do not place the machine in a hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment.
Prolonged exposure to these adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks.
Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand.
If tilted, the machine may tip-over and cause injuries.
When relocating the machine, remove the toner and/or developer, and pack the machine
with proper packing materials for shipping.
When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the
machine is moved with the power cord attached, it can cause damage to the cord which
could result in fire or electric shock.
Power and Ground Connection Cautions

WARNING
Ensure that the plug connection is free of dust. In a damp environment, a contaminated
connector can draw a significant amount of current that can generate heat and
eventually cause fire over an extended period of time.
Always use the power cord provided with your machine. When an extension power cord
is required, always use a properly rated cord.
120 V/15 A or AC 220 - 240V/10 A
If you use a cord with an unspecified current rating, the machine or plug may emit smoke
or become hot to the touch externally.
Do not attempt to rework, pull, bend, chafe or otherwise damage the power cord. Do not
place a heavy object on the cord. A damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.
5
Never touch a power cord with wet hands. Danger of electric shock exists.
If the power cord is broken or insulated wires are exposed, replace immediately with a specified cord only.
Using a damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.
Stop operation immediately if your machine produces smoke, excessive heat, unusual noise, or smell,
or if water is spilt onto the machine. These conditions can cause fire. Immediately switch Off and
unplug the machine.
Do not disconnect or reconnect the machine while it is on. Disconnecting a live connector can deform
the plug and cause fire.
When disconnecting the machine, grasp the plug instead of the cord. Forcibly pulling on a cord can
damage it and cause fire or electric shock.
When the machine is not used over an extended period of time, switch it Off and unplug it. If an unused
machine is left connected to a power source for a long period, degraded insulation can cause electric
shocks, current leakage or fire.
Be sure to switch Off and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machine for cleaning,
maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machines interior can cause electric shock.
Be sure to switch Off and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machine for
accessing interface cables, maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machines interior can
cause electric shock.
Once a month, unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following. If you notice any
unusual condition.
The power cord is plugged firmly into the receptacle.
The plug is not excessively heated, rusted, or bent.
The plug and receptacle are free of dust.
The cord is not cracked or frayed.
Others
The machine has a built-in circuit for protection against lightning-induced surge current. If lightning strikes in your
neighborhood, switch Off the machine. Disconnect the telephone line cable first, then unplug the power cord from
the machine and reconnect only when the lightning storm has stopped.
If you notice flickering or distorted images or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine may be causing
radio interference. Switch it Off and if the interference disappears, the machine is the cause of the radio interfer-
ence. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected.
Move the machine and the TV and/or radio away from each other.
Reposition or reorient the machine and the TV and/or radio.
Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets that operate on different circuits.
Reorient the TV and/or radio antennas and cables until the interference stops.
For an outdoor antenna, ask your local electrician for support.
Use a coaxial cable antenna.
Operating Safeguards
WARNING
Do not touch areas where these caution labels are attached to the surface may be very hot, and cause
server burns.
Do not place any liquid container such as a vase or coffee cup on the machine. Spilt water can cause
fire or shock hazard.
Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine. If metal and flammable parts get
into the machine, they can short-circuit internal components, and cause fire or electric shocks.
If debris (metal or liquid) gets into the machine, switch Off and unplug the machine.
Operating a debris-contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock.
Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. An unauthorized modification can
cause smoke or fire.
6
CAUTION
Do not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine. A magnet can activate the
machine accidentally resulting in injuries.
Do not use a highly flammable spray or solvent near the machine. It can cause fire.
When copying a thick document, do not use excessive force to press it against the
document glass. The glass may break and cause injuries.
Never touch a labeled area found on or near the heat roller. You can get burnt. If a sheet
of paper is wrapped around the heat roller, do not try to remove it when it is hot, to avoid
injuries or burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.
Do not use conductive paper, e.g. folding paper, carbonic paper and coated paper. When
a paper jam occurs, they can cause a short circuit and fire.
Do not place any heavy object on the machine. An off-balance machine can tip-over or
the heavy object can fall, causing damage and/or injuries.
Keep the room ventilated when using the machine for an extended period of time to
minimize the ozone density in the air.
When copying with the document cover open, do not look directly at the exposure lamp.
Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or damage.
Pull out paper trays slowly to prevent injuries.
When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in the
machine. A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a sheet of paper is
wrapped around the heat roller, or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult or
impossible to see, do not try to remove it by yourself. Doing so can cause injuries or
burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.
Consumable Safeguards
WARNING
Never throw a toner bottle into an open flame. Toner remaining in the bottle can
cause an explosion and you can get burnt.
Never throw toner or a waste toner container or a toner bottle into an open flame. It
can cause an explosion and you can get burnt.
Keep button batteries out of the reach of children. If a button battery is swallowed
accidentally, get medical treatment immediately.
CAUTION
Never heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated or scratched drum can be
hazardous to your health.
Do not mix new and old batteries together. Otherwise, batteries can burst or leak,
causing fire or injuries.
Be sure to use the specified type of batteries only.
Ensure that batteries are installed with correct polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries can
burst or leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.
7
Table of Contents
Specifications Table .............................. 10 5.2. Service Modes (For Facsimile) ............ 206
1.1. Copy Function.........................................10
System Description ............................. 235
1.2. Fax, Printer and Internet Fax
Functions ................................................20 6.1. Mechanical Operation .......................... 235
1.3. System Combination...............................30 6.2. Automatic Document Feeder ............... 237
1.4. Options List.............................................31 6.3. Inverting Automatic Document
Feeder .................................................. 239
1.5. External View..........................................32
6.4. Receive Mechanism ............................. 241
1.6. Control Panel ..........................................36
6.5. Signal Waveforme ................................ 251
1.7. Sensors...................................................38
1.8. Fans and Motors.....................................38
Installation............................................ 312
1.9. Clutches and Switches ...........................39
7.1. Set Up Precautions .............................. 312
1.10. PC Boards ..............................................39
7.2. Unpacking ............................................ 314
7.3. Installation Procedure .......................... 315
Disassembling, Cleaning and
Replacement .......................................... 40
Options and Supplies.......................... 323
2.1. General Disassembly..............................40
8.1. Service Notes "Firmware Update"
2.2. Disassembly Instructions ........................41 for PCL or PS Option Installation ........ 323
2.3. Hardware Identification Template ...........91 8.2. Installing the Printer Controller Module
for PCL6 (DA-PC180) .......................... 329
Maintenance, Adjustments and Check 8.3. Installing the Printer Controller Module
Points...................................................... 94 for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC180) .................. 331
3.1. Preventive Maintenance .........................94 8.4. Installing the Network Scanner Module
3.2. Required Tools .......................................96 (DA-NS180) for DP1820P/1820E......... 333
3.3. Preventive Maintenance Points ..............97 8.5. Installing the Internet Fax / E-Mail
Module (DA-NF180)
3.4. Preventive Maintenance Check List .......99
for DP-1820P/1820E ............................ 335
3.5. Resetting the P/M
8.6. Installing the Fax Communication
(Preventive Maintenance) Counter .......101
Board (DA-FG180)
3.6. Lubrication Point List ............................102 for DP-1820P/1820E ............................ 339
3.7. Updating the Firmware .........................103 8.7. Installing the Keyboard Option
3.8. Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure (DA-KB180) for DP-1820P/1820E........ 348
(Order) ..................................................112 8.8. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit
3.9. Adjusting the Printer Registration, (DA-HD18) ........................................... 352
LSU Image Side to Side .......................115 8.9. Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board
(DA-EM600) ......................................... 360
Troubleshooting .................................. 119 8.10. Installing the Sorting Image Memory
4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ..........119 16 / 64 / 128 MB
(DA-SM16B / 64B / 28B) ...................... 361
4.2. Improper LCD Display ..........................120
8.11. Installing the Expansion Flash Memory
4.3. Printed Copy Quality Problems.............121
Card 4/8 MB (UE-410047/410048)
4.4. Document Feeder (ADF) ......................140 for DP-1820P/1820E ............................ 362
4.5. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......146 8.12. Installing the Accounting Software
4.6. Error Codes (For Copier) ......................154 (DA-WA10) For DP-1820P/1820E ....... 363
4.7. Information Codes Table 8.13. Installing the Inverting Automatic
(For Facsimile)......................................164 Document Feeder (DA-AR202)
for DP-1820E ....................................... 364
4.8. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile).........170
8.14. Installing the Automatic Document
4.9. Troubleshooting (For Printer)................177
Feeder (DA-AS181) ............................. 371
8.15. Installing the 2nd/4th Paper Tray
Service Modes...................................... 179
(DA-DS184), 3rd Paper Tray
5.1. Service Modes (For Copier)..................179 (DA-DS185), and the Plain Stand ........ 377
8
Table of Contents
8.16. Installing the Platen Cover

(DA-UC200) for PU...............................385
8.17. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater Kit
(DZTQ000074)......................................386
8.18. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater Kit
for Paper Tray (DZHP009959)..............397
8.19. Installing the Mechanical Counter
(DZTK000002) ......................................405
8.20. Installing the Key Counter Harness Kit
(DA-KH180) ..........................................409
8.21. Replacing the OPC Drum .....................415
General Network Information ............. 418

9.1. Network Protocol ..................................418
9.2. Layer Functions and Technology..........420
9.3. Network Layer.......................................424
9.4. Transport Layer ....................................428
9.5. Upper Layer ..........................................430
9.6. SMTP
(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) ............435
9.7. ITU T.37 and RFC2305 ........................436
9.8. Communication Protocols.....................442
9.9. POP
(Post Office Protocol Version 3) ...........445
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC...................448
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail
Account Type (SMTP or POP)..............449
9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) - Extended Feature .................450
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications
(MDN) - Extended Feature ...................453
9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) - Extended Feature ..................457
9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response
Mechanism POP (APOP)
- Extended Feature ...............................457
9.16. SMTP Service Extension
for Authentication (SMTP Auth)
9.17. Direct SMTP Transfer
Schematic Diagram ............................. 463

10.1. General Circuit Diagram .......................463
9
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
1 Specifications Table
1.1. Copy Function
Copy Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1520P DP-1820P DP-1820E
Basic Specifications
1 Type Desktop
2 Platen Fixed
3 Original Position
Platen Left / Rear
ADF / i-ADF Left / Center
4 Recording Paper Path Center
5 Face Up / Face Down Face Down
6 Drum Organic Photo Conductor (OPC)
7 Copy Process Dry Electrostatic System
8 Developing Process Dry Dual Components
9 Toner Recycle No
10 Fusing System Heat & Pressure
Ledger (11 x 17 in) /
11 Max Original Size
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
12 Paper Size
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R For USA and Canada
For EU
Paper Tray A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4, FLS
FLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R For Other Destinations
For EU
Bypass Tray A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, FLS
FLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R For Other Destinations
#10 (4.1 x 9.5 in) For USA and Canada
Bypass Tray (Envelope)
DL (4.3 x 8.7 in) For EU
13 Paper Weight
Paper Tray 0.13 - 0.20 lb (60 - 90 g/m2)
Bypass Tray 0.12 - 0.29 lb (55 - 133 g/m2)
ADU 0.14 - 0.20 lb (64 - 90 g/m2) For DP-1820E only
ADF / i-ADF 0.11 - 0.24 lb (50 - 110 g/m2)
14 Warm-up Time Less than 30 sec 68 °F (20 °C)
15 From Platen, Letter/ A4 Portrait, 1st
Paper Tray. Period between Start Key
First Copy Time Less than 6.9 sec is pressed and Paper ejected to the
Exit Tray.
When LSU is ready.
10
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Copy Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1520P DP-1820P DP-1820E
16 Copy Speed
Ledger / A3 9 cpm 11 cpm
Legal / B4 / FLS 10 cpm 12 cpm From Platen, Letter/A4 Portrait, 1st
Paper Tray, and Paper ejected to the
Letter-R / A4-R 12 cpm 15 cpm / 14 cpm
Exit Tray, LSU is ready, and
Letter / A4 15 cpm 18 cpm Continuous Copy.
Invoice-R / A5-R 15 cpm 18 cpm
17 Zoom
Enlargement Selected Original size / Copy size
Reduction Selected Original size / Copy size
Zoom 50 - 200% 1% Step
Front Loading Universal Paper
18 Paper Feed
Tray
Paper Tray
Capacity 550 sheets x 1 LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Auto Size Setting No Control Panel Selectable
Low Level Warning Empty Only
Bypass Paper Tray
Capacity 50 sheets LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Auto Size Setting Yes
Paper Capacity Paper Tray 1 (Std) +
600 sheets
(Std. Configuration) Bypass Paper Tray
19 Multi Copy Range 999 sheets
20 Gradation
Text Bi-Level
Text / Photo 256 steps Halftone by Error Diffusion
Photo 256 steps
21 Resolution 600 dpi Scanning and Printing.
Standard Sorting Memory
22 16 MB
Size
Standard Page Memory
23 32 MB
Size
24 Exit Tray Capacity Standard: 250 sheets
25 Color No
26 Dimensions
22.0 x 21.9 x 18.1 in
H: To Platen Glass.
(558 x 557 x 460 mm)
(W x D x H)
33.2 x 24.6 x 24.5 in
Includes ADF / Bypass Paper Tray.
(844 x 624 x 623 mm)
27 Operating Space
33.2 x 22.2 in
(W x D) Includes Bypass Paper Tray.
(844 x 565 mm)
95.46 lb
93.26 lb (42.3 Kg) For USA and Canada
(43.3 Kg)
Weight
98.33 lb
96.12 lb (43.6 Kg) For EU and Other Destinations
(44.6 Kg)
11
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Copy Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1520P DP-1820P DP-1820E
Options
550
1 Paper Feed System 550 sheets x 3
sheets x 1
550 sheets 2nd
Yes Yes Motor is not mounted.
Paper Tray
Paper Size Detection Manual Manual Control Panel Selectable
Low Level Paper Empty
Empty Only
Warning Only
550 sheets 3rd
No Yes Motor is mounted.
Paper Tray
Paper Size Detection - Manual Control Panel Selectable
Low Level Paper
- Empty Only
Warning
550 sheets 4th
No Yes Motor is not mounted.
Paper Tray
Paper Size Detection - Manual Control Panel Selectable
Low Level Paper
- Empty Only
Warning
1,150
Max. Paper Capacity 2, 250 sheets LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
sheets
2 Plain Stand
Low Plain Stand with Casters
Stand for DA1D18C : For USA and Canada
4*-Paper Tray No Option Only
Configuration DA-DA191-PE : For Other
Destinations
Low Plain Stand with Casters
Stand for DA1D18C : For USA and Canada
3*-Paper Tray No Option Only
Destinations
Mid Plain Stand with Casters
Stand for DA1D18B : For USA and Canada
2-Paper Tray Option Option Only
Destinations
High Plain Stand with Casters
Stand for DA1D18A : For USA and Canada
1-Paper Tray Option Option Only
Destinations
Note:
The same Plain Stand (DA1D18C) is used for either 3 or 4 Paper Tray Configuration for USA and
Canada.
Option For USA and Canada
3 Platen Cover
Standard For EU and Other Destinations
Free Stop Yes From 30 to 70 degrees.
12
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Copy Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1520P DP-1820P DP-1820E
4 ADF
Single Side Type Option
Original Set Face Up
Scanning Method Sheet Through
Capacity (Originals) 50 sheets LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
SADF Mode Yes
Free Stop Yes From 30 to 70 degrees.
5 Inverting ADF (i-ADF)
Duplex Type No Option
Original Set - Face Up
Sheet
Scanning Method -
Through
Capacity (Originals) - 50 sheets LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
SADF Mode - Yes Available for single side scanning only.
Free Stop - Yes From 30 to 70 degrees.
6 Exit Tray (Inner)
Tray Position Inner
Number of Bins 1
Face Up / Face Down Face Down
Bin Capacity 250 sheets
Multi Tray Function No
Shift Tray Function No
7 Finisher No
8 Exit Tray (Outer) No
11 Automatic Duplex Unit No Standard
12 Counter
The Harness Kit contains only
Key Counter Capability Option
Harnesses, Bracket and a Screw.
13 Dehumidifier Option Supplied as a Service Part.
14 Sorting Image Memory
Optional Image Memory 1
Yes
(16MB)
Unit comes standard with 16 MB.
Yes 1-Slot available for an Optional Image
(64MB)
Memory module.
Yes
(128MB)
Additional Optional Sorting Image
Memory (Minimum 16 MB) is required
15 Hard Disk Drive Option
for the Hard Disk Drive to function.
(For Tandem, Remote Copy, etc.)
13
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Copy Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1520P DP-1820P DP-1820E
Features
1 Automatic Features
Auto Magnification
Yes
Selection Using ADF only
Auto Paper Selection Yes
Auto Paper Tray
Yes
Selection
Reservation while Power On
Auto Start Yes
Initializing.
Requires the Fax Communication
Board (DA-FG180) option or the
Remote Diagnostic Yes
Internet Fax / E-MAIL Module
(DA-NF180) option.
Machine Stops when Out
Yes PPC Function
of Toner
2 Additional Features
Low Level Paper Warning Empty Only
Photo Mode Yes 256 steps
Original Detection Manually overridden when using the
No
Release Original Size keys.
Edit / Effects
Book Mode Yes
Edge Mode Yes
Margin Mode Yes
X-Y Zoom No
Stamping /
No
Page Numbering
Inverse Mode
No
(Negative / Positive)
Centering Mode Yes
With Digital Sky Shot
Image Repeat Yes
Mirror Mode No
Others (Inverting ADF & ADU)
LDR → LTR x 2
2-Page Copy Mode Yes
(A3 → A4 x 2, B4 → B5 x 2)
2 in 1 Yes
4 in 1 Yes
6 in 1 No
8 in 1 No
Copy from four 1-Sided
Booklet Mode No pages to 1 Booklet Mode
sheet.
14
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Copy Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1520P DP-1820P DP-1820E
Duplex Copy
1→2 No Yes
2→1 Yes Yes
Scanning twice by turning the original.
2→2 No Yes
Book→2 No Yes
1st Page BLANK No 1 → 2/2 → 1/2 → 2
1st Page IMAGE No Book → 2
Image Rotation (90 or
Yes
270 °)
Electronic Sorting Yes
Rotation Sorting Yes
Insertion Job
Cover Mode No
Page Insertion Mode No
OHP Interleave Mode No
Presentation Mode No
Department Counter Yes 300 Departments
ADF
Multi Size Feed No
JOB Build and SADF
Yes
Mode
Original Counter No
Job Memory Yes 2 Jobs in Memory
Job Time Display Yes
Concurrent Copy Yes 12 Concurrent Copy Jobs
Tandem Copy Mode No
Remote Copy Mode No
Scan Once Print Many
Yes
Mode
Job Complete Notice No
Trial Copy Mode No
Weekly Timer No
Function Mode Yes
Interrupt Yes
Electronic Counter Yes
Digital Sky Shot Mode Yes
Double Exposure Yes
3 Control Panel
Display LCD 20 digits x 2 lines
GREEN : Scanning /
Status Lamp Yes Printing
RED : Alarm / Warning
15
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Copy Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1520P DP-1820P DP-1820E
Key
Original Size Yes
Copy Size Yes
Keypad Yes
Clear Yes
Stop Yes
Start Yes
Energy Saver Yes
Multi Size Feed No
Sort Yes
Function Mode Yes
Original Detection
No
Release
Interrupt Yes
Reset Yes
One-Touch key Yes With Keyboard Option
Copier / Printer / NW Scanner / Fax
Mode Change No Yes
and Internet Fax Mode
LCD Main Indication
Message Language English (American) For USA and Canada
(Default) Specified Language For EU and Other Destinations
Original Size / Image Yes
Indication (without Image)
Paper Size / Image Yes
Indication (without Image)
Paper Tray Selection Yes
Selected Paper Tray /
Yes
Tray Status
Original Mode Text / Text-Photo / Photo
Yes
Selection
Copy Density Selection Yes
Setting Confirmation Yes
Function Classification Yes
Zoom Magnification Yes
Number of Copies Yes
JOB Build and SADF /
Yes
Multi Size Feed Mode
Error Code Yes
Finishing No
Warning Indicators Yes
Add Toner Yes
Toner Waste
Yes
Container Full
Add Paper (No Yes
Paper)
Add Paper
No
(Under 50 sheets)
16
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Copy Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1520P DP-1820P DP-1820E
Paper Jam Indication Yes
Paper Jam Location Yes
Service Alert Call Yes
User Error Yes
Machine Error Yes
History of Jam Errors Yes
4 Main Unit
Total Counter
Electronic Yes
Standard for EU.
Mechanical Yes Available as a Service Part for Other
Destinations.
Max. Weight of
Documents on the Platen 11.02 lb (5 kg)
Glass
ADF with Document
Yes
Guide
Clip Pocket Yes
Operating Instructions
No
Pocket
Warning / Caution Label Specified Language
5 Optical System
Original Detection
Reflective Photo Sensor Type
Method
Scanning Method 600 dpi CCD
Dehumidifier Yes Supplied as a Service Part
Mechanical Multi Copy
No
Mode
6 Process System
Separate OPC Unit and
Type
Developer Unit Type
Toner 10 K
User replacement
Toner Waste Container 10 K
Drum Life 60 K
Developer Life 60 K
Dehumidifier Yes Supplied as a Service Part
Manually adds toner to the developer
Manual Add Toner Yes
(up to TDC threshold)
Efficiency
1 Productivity
ADF Productivity (LTR /
100%
A4)
Throughput when the LSU is ready;
ADU Copy Productivity
- 55% Paper is fed from the 1st Paper Tray
(LTR / A4)
and is ejected to the Exit Tray.
17
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Copy Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1520P DP-1820P DP-1820E
PM Cycle
1 PM Cycle
Major PM 120 K
Minor PM (Cleaning) 60 K
Packing Configuration
28.5 x 28.6 x 34.1 in
For USA, Canada and China
(724 x 727 x 866 mm)
1 Packing Dimension
28.4 x 28.4 x 29.5 in
For EU and Other Destinations
(722 x 722 x 750 mm)
121.25 lb 123.46 lb
For USA and Canada
(55 kg) (56 kg)
127.87 lb 130.07 lb
2 Packing Weight For China
(58 kg) (59 kg)
112.44 lb 114.64 lb
For EU and Other Destinations
(51 kg) (52 kg)
3 Accessories
Process Unit Yes
Developer No
Toner No
Toner Waste Container No
Operating Instructions Yes
Power Supply
99 - 132 VAC 47 - 63 Hz
120 VAC
Single phase
1 Power Requirement
180 - 264 VAC 47 - 63 Hz
220 - 240 VAC
Single phase
2 Power Consumption
Max.Power Consumption
100 VAC PS Less than 1.3 KW
220 VAC PS Less than 1.3 KW
Standby
100 VAC PS 120 W
Turns On the Heater Power.
220 VAC PS 120 W
Energy Saver Automatically enters the Sleep or
Power Saver Mode Shutdown Mode after 10 minutes from
100 VAC PS 19.0 W the Standby or Energy Saver Mode.
Manually enters the Energy Saver
220 VAC PS 19.5 W
Mode by pressing the Energy Saver
Sleep Mode key.
100 VAC PS 8.5 W Sleep or Shutdown mode is controlled
220 VAC PS 9.5 W by the General Functions setting.
Shutdown Mode
100 VAC PS 1.4 W
Network Function not available
220 VAC PS 1.6 W
18
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Copy Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1520P DP-1820P DP-1820E
Ambient Conditions
1 Temperature 50 - 80 °F / 10 - 30 °C
2 Relative Humidity 30 - 80%
UL1950-1 / CSA C22.2 No.950 For USA and Canada
3 Safety
EN60950-1 For EU and Other Destinations
4 Energy Saver Energy Star Compliant
Class A computing device in FCC
For USA and Canada
Rules Part 15
5 EMI Class B
EN55022, EN55024, For EU
EN61000-32, EN61000-3-3
This Product uses Lead Free
6 Lead Free Solder (PbF) Refer to the Parts Manual for details
(PbF) PCBs
19
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
1.2. Fax, Printer and Internet Fax Functions
1.2.1. Fax Function
Fax Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1820P / 1820E
Main Specifications
1 Compatibility G3 ITU-T Std & Non-Std
2 PSTN Line Port Yes 1-Line Only
3 Leased Line Port No
4 V.24 Line Port No
5 Modem Speed 33.6 - 2.4 kbps T.30/V.34/V.17/V.29/V.27ter
6 Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
7 ECM Yes Conforms to ITU-T Rec. T.30 ECM
8 Short Protocol Yes (B, D)
ITU-T Image No. 1
9 Transmission Speed Approx. 2.9 sec
(A4, Std Resolution)
Transmission
Std. : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) 600 dpi communication is only
Communication Resolution
600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi possible between T.30 Compliant
10 dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/
Reception Panafax, WORKiO, and other T.30
mm)
Std. : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85) compliant machines.
Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)
600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi
Scanner Mechanism
1 Scanning Device CCD (ADF / Platen)
2 Scanning Speed (ADF)
Resolution Vertical Horizontal
Std: 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/
mm)
1.0 sec 0.7 sec
Fine: 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/ A4, Scanned in Vertical or Horizontal
mm) Direction.
S-Fine: 406 x 391 (16 x Excluding Initializing Time and ADF
15.4) dpi x lpi (pels/mm x 2.0 sec 1.4 sec slipping factor.
lines/mm)
600dpi: 600 x 600 2.8 sec 2.1 sec
3 Scanning Speed (Platen)
Resolution Vertical Horizontal
600dpi: 600 x 600 2.8 sec 2.1 sec
Std. : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Scanning Resolution Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
4 dpi x lpi (pel/mm x lines/ S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
mm) 406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)
600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi
20
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Fax Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1820P / 1820E
5 Document Size (Max.) ADF: Ledger / A3
6 Effective Scanning Width LDR (11.5 in) / A3 (292 mm)
7 A3 size TX/RX Yes Conforms to ITU-T A3
8 Reduction XMT Yes A3 to B4 / A3 to A4 / B4 to A4
Face-Up, feed from top page
9 ADF Capacity 50 sheets
LTR / A4 (20 lb / 75 g/m2)
10 Collation Stack Yes Face Down
Printer Mechanism
1 Recording Method LP
23 / 30 ppm Recording Speed attained after the 1st
2 Recording Speed
(A4 Horizontal) copy.
3 Recording Resolution Fax 600 x 600 dpi
Invoice : Not supported.
Ledger size is transmitted as A3 size
Ledger / Legal / Letter / for N. American models. If A3 is
4 Recording Paper Size
A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 received, approx. 1" of image on both
edges are not printed on Ledger size
paper.
5 Effective Printing Width 11.4 in (289 mm) Conforms to ITU-T A3
Optional max. 2250 sheets
6 Recording Paper Capacity 600 sheets
LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
7 Collation Stack Yes Face Down
Toner Bottle, Developer,
8 Consumable
OPC Drum
Fax Memory
Flash ROM, ITU-T Image No.1
1 Standard Memory 2 MB (120 pages)
(A4, Std Resolution)
4 MB Expansion Flash Memory Card, using
2 Optional Memory
8 MB ITU-T Image No.1 (A4, Std Resolution)
Dual Operation
1 Multi Task Operation Yes
2 Direct XMT Reserve Yes
3 Memory XMT Reserve Yes
Number of Memory Job
4 Yes Max. 50 files
Files
Dialing/Telephone Features
1 One-Touch Keys 28
2 One-Touch / Program Keys 4 Requires Optional Keyboard.
3 One-Touch Auto Dialers 32
4 Abbr. Auto Dialers 200
Plus an additional 800 stations
available to select from, when the
5 Total Auto Dialers 232
optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD18) is
installed.
6 Directory Search Dialing Yes
7 Max. Tel Number Digits 36
21
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Fax Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1820P / 1820E
8 Max. Station Name
15
Characters
Full Number Dialing
9 Yes Max. 50 stations
(Buffered Dialing)
10 Direct Dialing
Yes Voice mode
(Monitor Dialing)
11 Automatic Redialing Yes Up to 15 times at 0 to 15 min. intervals
12 Manual Redialing Yes Pressing the REDIAL/PAUSE button
13 Line Monitor Speaker Yes
14 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial) Yes In Monitor Dialing mode only
15 Pulse / Tone Dialing Yes 10 pps / DTMF
16 Pulse to Tone Change No
17 Flash Key Yes
18 Handset No
Transmission Features
1 Direct Transmission Yes
2 Memory Transmission Yes Page Retransmission
Quick Memory
3 Yes
Transmission
Multi-Station Transmission
4 Yes Max. 250 stations
(Sequential Broadcasting)
Direct Deferred
5 No ADF Deferred Transmission
Transmission
6 Deferred Transmission Yes Max. 50 timers
Deferred Multi-Station
7 Yes
Transmission
8 Priority Direct Transmission Yes Priority ADF Transmission
Priority Memory
9 No
Transmission
10 Batch Transmission Yes Real Time (up to 5 Files)
90 Degree Rotation
11 Yes
Transmission
12 Cover Sheet Yes
13 Confidential Mail Box No
14 Multi-Copy Transmission No
FAX : Back-up with Flash Memory.
15 Memory Back-Up Yes Copy / Printer : No Back-up with D-
RAM
16 Duplex Scanning Yes With Inverting ADF (i-ADF)
Reception Features
1 Substitute Reception Yes
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
2 Fixed Reduction Yes (in 1% Steps),
Top & Left Alignment
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
3 Auto Reduction Yes (in 1% Steps),
Top & Left Alignment
22
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Fax Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1820P / 1820E
4 Overlap Printing Yes Page End Approx. 0.51 in (13 mm)
5 Receive to Memory Yes
Distinctive Ring Detector
6 No
(DRD)
90 Degree Rotation
7 Yes
Reception
8 Duplex Printing Yes
Polling
1 Polling Yes
2 Turnaround Polling No
3 Multi-Station Polling Yes Max. 250 stations
4 Deferred Polling Yes Max. 50 timers
Deferred Multi-Station
5 Yes Max. 50 timers / 250 stations
Polling
6 Direct Polling Tx No
7 Memory Polling Tx Yes 1 File
8 Preset Polling Password Yes
Temporary Polling
9 Yes
Password
10 Continuous Polling Yes
Convenience
1 Panel Display LCD
2 Voice Contact No
3 Edit File Mode Yes With View Mode
4 Incomplete File Save Yes With View Mode
5 Automatic Cover Sheet Yes
Certainty
1 Verification Stamp Yes
2 Header / Total Page Print Yes
3 Transaction Journal Yes 200 Transactions / with View Mode
4 Comm. Journal Yes With Image Data
5 Last Ind. XMT Journal Yes
List Printouts
1 One-Touch List -
2 ABBR. No. List -
3 Program List Yes
4 Address Book Search List Yes Auto Dialer List
5 Fax Parameter List Yes
6 File List Yes With View Mode
7 Ind. XMT Journal Yes
8 Directory Sheet No
23
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Fax Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1820P / 1820E
Identifications
1 Logo Yes 25 Characters
2 Multiple Logo No
3 Character ID Yes 16 Characters
4 Numeric ID Yes 20 Digits
Special Communications
1 Password XMT / RCV No
2 Selective Reception No TSI Check
3 Relay XMT Request No
4 Relay XMT Center No
5 Confidential XMT / Polling No
6 Confidential Center No
7 Mailbox XMT / Polling No
8 Mailbox Center No
9 File XMT No
Received File Transfer
10 Fax Forward Yes
(Only with Internet Fax Option)
11 Sub-Address XMT Yes T. Routing
12 Sub-address RCV No
13 OMR-XMT No
Standards
FCC Part 68 For USA
1 PSTN Industry Canada CS-03 For Canada
TBR 21 For EU
Others
1 Fax Access Code Yes
2 PIN Code Access Yes For USA and Canada only
3 Intelligent Redial (AI) Yes 5 Files
4 Department Code Yes 300 Departmental Codes
5 Power Saver Mode Yes
6 Self Diagnostic Function Yes
Remote Diagnostic
7 Yes
Function
8 Check & Call Function Yes
9 V.24 / Encryption Interface No
24
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
1.2.2. Printer Function
Printer Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1520P / 1820P / 1820E
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F No
Ethernet 10Base-T/
2 LAN (Network)
100Base-TX
3 USB Port Yes USB
4 IEEE-1394 No
Printer Function
1 Printing Size A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4, FLS For EU
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R For Other Destinations
2 Bypass Paper Tray Yes
3 Stapling No
Selectable 600 dpi, with Smoothing,
4 Printing Resolution (dpi) Max. 1200 (Equivalent) x 600 dpi the results are similar to PS3 / PCL6
Printers (1200 dpi Equivalent).
5 Interface USB / Ethernet
Win 98 / Win Me /
6 OS Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / MAC 8.6-10.1 is PS only.
Win XP / MAC 8.6-10.1
7 Printer Work Memory Size 20 MB Not expandable
8 GDI Yes
9 PDL (PCL6) Yes Requires Optional PCL6 Emulation Kit.
Requires Optional PS / PCL6
10 PDL (PS3) Yes
Emulation Kit
DP-1820E only.
11 Duplex Printing Yes Custom Size/Post Card Size is not
available.
12 Collation Stack Yes
13 Status Monitor
Network Yes
USB No
14 Network Printing Yes
15 Smoothing Yes
16 Applicable PC IBM PC, AT or Compatible, MAC MAC is PS only.
17 Multi-Task Operation
Printing while Fax-XMT
Yes
from Memory
Printing while Fax-RCV
Yes
into Memory
Fax-XMT from Memory
Yes
while Printing
Fax-RCV into Memory
Yes
while Printing
Output to separate tray for
18 No
Printing, Fax, Copy
25
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Printer Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1520P / 1820P / 1820E
Requires Optional PCL6 or PS / PCL6
19 Font Yes
Emulation Kit
Requires Optional HDD Unit.
20 Mailbox Yes Max. 100 Users.
Max. 20 mailboxes for each User ID
Requires Optional HDD Unit.
21 Secure Mailbox Yes Max. 100 Users.
Max. 20 mailboxes for each User ID
26
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
1.2.3. Network Scanner Function
Network Scanner Function

Description
Items Remarks
DP-1820P / 1820E
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F No
Ethernet 10Base-T/
2 LAN (Network)
100Base-TX
3 USB Port No
4 IEEE-1394 No
Network Scanning Function
1 Scanning Device CCD (i-ADF / ADF / Platen)
600 x 600 : 2.1 sec Letter / A4
Scanning Speed
2 300 x 300 : 1.1 sec
(ADF / I-ADF)
150 x 150 : 1.1 sec
3 Halftone 256 Halftone shades With Error Diffusion
4 Max. Document Size Ledger, A3
600 x 600
Scanning Resolution
5 300 x 300 Selectable, 600 dpi Optical Scanner
(dpi)
150 x 150
Win 98 / Me /
6 OS
Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / XP
7 2-Sided Scanning Yes With i-ADF.
TIFF can also be converted to PDF
8 File Format Mult-page TIFF / PDF
with the PDMS Software
Auto Pop-up on the PC Screen
9 Completion Notice Yes
(requires WEB Status Monitor)
10 Protocol TCP/IP, Non-Std
Network Address Features
Requires Optional Keyboard.
1 One Touch Address Keys 32 Shared with Fax/Internet Fax
One Touch Address, 32 in Total
2 Abbr. Address Numbers 60 Independent for Network Scanner
27
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
1.2.4. Internet Fax Function
Internet Fax Function

Description
Items Remarks
DP-1820P / 1820E
Main Specifications
1 Communication Protocols SMTP / POP3 / MIME
2 Max. Modem Speed NA
3 Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
Selectable
4 File Format TIFF / PDF PDF file is only available if sending to
PC (Network Scanner).
5 Line Interface RJ-45 Ethernet LAN
Scanner Mechanism
1 Max. Document Size Ledger, A3
2 Effective Scanning Width 11.4 in (289 mm)
Std. : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7) LAN: 600 dpi, 16 x 15.4 Scanning
Scanning Resolution
3 S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4) Resolution is available with
dpi x lpi (pel/mm x lines/mm)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) Parameter setting
600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi
Printer Mechanism
1 Printing Resolution 600 dpi
2 Effective Recording Width 11.4 in (289 mm)
Transmission Features
Simultaneous operation of G3 Fax and
1 Multi-Task Operation Yes
LAN is available.
2 Memory Transmission Yes
Sequential Multi-Station
3 Yes
Transmission
Max. 250 stations
Simultaneous Multi-Station
4 Yes (200 Address Book + 50 Full Number
Transmission
Dialing)
5 Sender Selection Yes
G3 / Email Mixed
6 Yes
Broadcasting
7 Deferred Transmission Yes
Received File Transfer, only with
8 Fax Forward Yes
Internet Fax Option
Inbound Routing, only with Internet
9 Sub-address RCV Yes
Fax Option
10 Mail Header
Email Header Print Selection Yes All or From / To / Subject only
Subject Line Random Entry
28
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Internet Fax Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-1820P / 1820E
LAN Features
A3 Communication is available with
1 Internet Fax Communication Yes
Parameter setting.
2 Internet Mail Reception Yes
3 Internet Fax Server Features
Internet Fax Relay XMT Yes Internet Fax → Internet Fax → G3FAX
Email Relay MXT Yes PC → Internet Fax → G3FAX
Received Fax / Email
Yes Local print available
Forward
PC to FAX Transmission No
Using Sub-Address.
Inbound Routing Yes
Local print available
Phone Book Registration from
Yes Via Email
PC
Internet Fax Parameters
4 Yes
Registration via Email
5 Internet Delivery Confirmation Yes With MDN
6 Network Scanning Yes 600 dpi
7 Network Printing
LPR / LPD Yes 600 dpi
GDI Yes 600 dpi
Requires Optional PCL6 or PS
PDL Yes
Emulation Kit
8 DHCP Client Yes
9 LDAP Yes Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
10 TIFF Viewer Yes Selectable, PDMS / TIFF Viewer
Certainty
1 Comm. Journal (w / Image) Yes
ID
1 Email Address Yes
29
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
1.3. System Combination
ADF
Inverting ADF (DP-1820E only)

ADF PC Board
Scanner Unit Document Sensor

(SPC PC Board) Motor
Panel
(PNL PC Board)
Main PC Board PCL6 Fax Communication
(SC PC Board) Emulation Option Option (FXB/MJR)
PS/PCL6 Printer
Emulation Option
Network USB
Scanner Option Interface
Key Counter Automatic
Harness Option Duplex Unit Internet Fax/ 10/100 Ethernet
(DP-1820E only) E-Mail Option Interface
Dehumidifier
Heater Kit Electronic Sorting Memory
Expansion Flash Image Memory

Memory Card 16, 64, 128MB
4 or 8M Hard Disk
Either Option
Drive Option
SPC PC Board
2nd Paper Tray (CST2 PC Board)
3rd Paper Tray (CST3 PC Board)
Standard Configuration
4th Paper Tray (CST2 PC Board)
Option
30
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
1.4. Options List
■ Options
Option Name Option Number Remarks
Printer Controller Module (PCL) DA-PC180 Printer Controller for PCL6*
Multi Page Description Language
DA-MC180 Printer Controller for PCL6/PS3*
Controller Module (PCL/PostScript)
Network Scanner Module DA-NS180 For Network Scanning
Internet Fax / E-Mail Module DA-NF180 Internet Fax/Email Communication
Fax Communication Board DA-FG180 G3 Fax Communication
Keyboard Option DA-KB180
Additional Optional Sorting Image Memory
(Minimum 16 MB) is required for the Hard
Hard Disk Drive Unit DA-HD18
Disk Drive to function.
(For additional 800 address book, etc.)
Expansion Board DA-EM600 F-ROM Board (8 MB)
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB UE-410047
Additional Memory for Fax / Internet Fax
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8MB UE-410048
Image Memory (16MB) DA-SM16B
Image Memory (64 MB) DA-SM64B For Electronic Sorting
Image Memory (128MB) DA-SM28B
Accounting Software DA-WA10 For Accounting Function
Platen Cover DA-UC200 Available in Specified Destinations
Automatic Document Feeder DA-AS181
Inverting Automatic Document Feeder DA-AR202
4th Paper Tray is for DP-1820P/1820E
2nd / 4rd Paper Tray DA-DS184
only.
3rd Paper Tray is for DP-1820P/1820E
3rd Paper Tray DA-DS185
only.
Plain Stand (High) DA1D18A
Plain Stand (Mid) DA1D18B For USA and Canada
Plain Stand (Low) DA1D18C
Plain Stand (1-Paper Tray Configuration) DA-DA188-PE
Available in Specified Destinations
Key Counter Harness Kit DA-KH180
■ Supplies
Part Name Part Number Remarks
Toner DQ-TU10J 10K
OPC Drum DQ-H60J 60K
Developer DQ-Z60J 60K
Note:
PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
PS3 is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company.
31
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
1.5. External View
1. Standard Configuration
(For USA Only)

Complies with FDA radiation
performance standards, 21 CFR
Subchapter J
Factory ID
Manufacturer's Name and Address
Top View
18.19 in (462 mm)
21.97 in (558 mm) 21.54 in (547 mm)
Left View Front View Right View Rear View
For USA, Canada and Europe For Other Destinations
! CAUTION
Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
* THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE.
"IMPROPER USE OR REPLACEMENT MAY CAUSE OVERHEATING, RUPTURE OR EXPLOSION RESULTING IN
INJURY OR FIRE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL
SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS AND LOCAL REGULATIONS"
Note: The service life of the Battery is approximately 1 year under normal use.
32
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2. With Optional System Console Configuration
Top View
45.91 in (1166 mm)

39.57 in (1005 mm)
6.61 in (168 mm)
21.97 in (558 mm) 24.76 in (629 mm)
Left View Front View Right View Rear View
33
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3. Space Requirements With Options
Main Unit
3.94 in (100 mm)
10.83 in
(275 mm)
21.97 in (558 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)

21.93 in (557 mm)
45.67 in (1160 mm)
16.14 in (410 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
40.67 in (1033 mm)
Main Unit + ADF

3.94 in (100 mm)
10.83 in
(275 mm)
21.97 in (558 mm)
23.54 in (598 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)

47.28 in (1201 mm)
16.14 in (410 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
40.67 in (1033 mm)
Main Unit + i-ADF

3.94 in (100 mm)
10.83 in
(275 mm)
21.97 in (558 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)

24.57 in (624 mm)
48.31 in (1227 mm)
16.14 in (410 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
40.67 in (1033 mm)
34
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
1.5.1. Serial Number Contents
The contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Sequential Production Number

5-Digit Sequential Production Number
00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units

A0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units
(Letters I and O are skipped)
Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit)

3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation
(Except Letters I and O )
For Example:
3SL = DP-1520P-PU 3SK = DP-1520P-PB
3SN = DP-1820P-PU 3SM = DP-1820P-PB
3SP = DP-1820E-PU 3SV = DP-1820E-PB
Production Facility
Production Year
Starting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year is
represented as: A ~ T
A : 01 (2001) K : 11 (2011)
B : 02 L : 12
C : 03 M : 13
D : 04 N : 14
E : 05 O : 15
F : 06 P : 16
G : 07 Q : 17
H : 08 R : 18
I : 09 S : 19
J : 10 (2010) T : 20 (2020)
Production Month
A : January G : July
B : February H : August
C : March I : September
D : April J : October
E : May K : November
F : June L : December
35
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
1.6. Control Panel
For USA and Canada
DP-1520P
DP-1820P
DP-1820E
OPTIONS (DP-1820P/1820E only)
Included with Fax,

Internet / E-Mail and
Network Scanner Options
Note:
LCD Display Brightness Adjustment
To adjust the brightness of the LCD display, press and while holding down the "CLEAR" key, keep
pressing the "ORIGINAL SIZE" or the "COPY SIZE" key until the desired brightness is achieved.
ORIGINAL SIZE : Dimmer
COPY SIZE : Brighter
36
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
For Other Destinations
DP-1520P
DP-1820P
DP-1820E
OPTIONS (DP-1820P/1820E only)
Included with Fax,

Internet / E-Mail and
Network Scanner Options
37
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
1.7. Sensors
ADF Original Length Sensor 1 (131)
ADF Sensor 1 (131)
ADF Original Length Sensor 2 (131)
ADF Sensor 2 (131)
ADF Sensor 3 (131)

ADF Cover Open
Home Position Sensor (131) Sensor (131)
Sheet Bypass Sensor 1 (131) Fuser Unit Sensor (131)

Registration Sensor (131)
Sheet Bypass Sensor 2 (131) Mechanical Counter (821)
1st Paper Tray Detection 1st Paper Tray NP
Sensor (131) Sensor (131)
2nd Paper Tray Detection 1st Paper Tray Upper
Sensor (131) Limit Sensor (131)
2nd Paper Tray Jam Cover Toner Waste Container
Open Sensor (131) Sensor (2806)
2nd Paper Tray NP
2nd Paper Tray Paper Sensor (131)
Path Sensor (131)
2nd Paper Tray Upper
Limit Sensor (131)
1.8. Fans and Motors

ADF Motor
(i-ADF: 2601) Scanning Motor (316)
(ADF: 1905)
Rear Fan (815)
Drive Motor (1511) PS Fan (816)

Toner Motor (1539)
Lift DC Motor (3132)
Note:
Numbers in parenthesis "(xxxx)" represent the Part Reference Number(s) found in the Parts Manual for
your quick reference.
38
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
1.9. Clutches and Switches
ADF Roller
Clutch (2324)
Intermediate
Clutch (2632)
Feed 2 Roller
Clutch (2325)
Interlock Switch (227)
Registration Roller
Clutch (694) Heater Switch (814)
Paper Feed Roller
Clutch (695) Power Switch (818)
Paper Feed Roller

Clutch (695)
Intermediate Roller
Clutch (694)
1.10. PC Boards
SNS PCB (2832)
CCD Unit (427)

ADF PCB
(i-ADF: 2847) PNL1 PCB (2904)
(ADF: 2846)
PNL3 PCB (2906)
PNL2 PCB (2905)
PNL4 PCB (2907)

Sort Memory Board MJR PCB (2902)
SPC PCB (2802) Hardware Key (3505)
F-ROM Board (2805) RLB PCB (2804)
SSN PCB (2910) DC PCB (2803)
HDD (804)
PCL PCB (2807)
WTS PCB (2806)

PS PCB (2901)
FXB PCB (2903)
SC PCB (2801)
CST2 PCB (2908)
Note:
Numbers in parenthesis "(xxxx)" represent the Part Reference Number(s) found in the Parts Manual for
your quick reference.
39
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2 Disassembling, Cleaning and Replacement

2.1. General Disassembly
Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below.
40
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2. Disassembly Instructions

2.2.1. Inverting-Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF) Unit
(1) Open the ADF Cover (2126).
(2) Remove 4 Silver Screws (B1).
(3) Lift the ADF Input Tray (2201).

(4) Slightly pull the right edge of the ADF Rear
Cover upward.
(5) Release the Latch Hooks.
(6) Remove the ADF Rear Cover (2101).
(7) Lower the ADF Input Tray back in place.

(8) Disconnect the ADF Motor and Clutch Harness
(2853) from the Clutch.
(9) Remove the Snap Ring (S9).
(10) Remove the ADF Roller (2314) Assembly.

(12) Remove the Clutch (2324).
(13) Remove the Bushing (2321).
(14) Remove the Rear ADF Guide (2311).
41
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(16) Remove the Pin (2327).
(17) Remove the ADF Shaft (2310).
(18) Remove the ADF Roller (2314).

(20) Remove the Pre Feed Roller Shaft (2316).
(21) Remove the Pre Feed Roller (2018).
(22) Remove 1 Silver Screw (B1).

(23) Remove the ADF Front Cover (2210).
Note:
Release 3 Latch Hooks in the direction as shown
by each arrow.
(24) Remove 4 Screws (19).

(25) Remove the Upper ADF Guide (2502).
42
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(27) Remove the Torque Limiter Bushing (2510)
and Torque Limiter Spring (2511).
Note:
When reinstalling the Torque Limiter Assembly,
ensure that the Torque Limiter Spring is placed
into the deeper slot of the Separation Roller.
<Cleaning Torque Limiter Bushing and Torque

Limiter Spring>
Clean the Torque Limiter Bushing and Torque
Limiter Spring with a soft cloth, saturated with
isopropyl alcohol.
(28) Remove the Separation Roller (2509).
<Cleaning Separation Roller>

Clean the Separation Roller with a soft cloth,
saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
(29) Disconnect the Read Point Sensor Harness

(2858) and remove Sensor (131) (Original
Detection Sensor).
(30) Disconnect all Harnesses on the ADF PC
Board.
(32) Remove the i-ADF PC Board (2847).

(34) Remove the ADF Motor (2601).
43
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(36) Remove the Sensor Bracket (2120).

(38) Remove the Motor Bracket (2610) and Gear
Bracket (2602) Assemblies.
Note:
Apply Molykote EM-50L Grease to all Gears and
Shafts except to the following: E26S35 Drive Gear
(2604), ADF Motor (2601), and the shafts of Drive
Shaft 2 (2615) and Exit 3 Roller (2515).
< Cleaning ADF Roller, Pre-Feed Roller, Drive

Roller and Feed 2 Roller>
(1) Open the ADF Cover (2126).

(2) Clean the ADF Roller (2314), Pre Feed Roller
(2018), Drive Roller (2706) and the Feed 2
Roller (2517) with a soft cloth, saturated with
isopropyl alcohol.
< Cleaning Exit Roller and Inverting Feed Roller>
(3) Lift the ADF Input Tray (2201).

(4) Open the ADF Exit Cover (2429).
(5) Clean the Exit 3 Roller (2515) and the Inverting
Feed Roller (2428) with a soft cloth, saturated
with isopropyl alcohol.
44
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.2. ADF Unit
(1) Open the ADF Cover (1902) and release the
ADF Cover Stopper (2013).
(2) Remove the Pad Cover (2023).
(3) Remove the Separation Rubber (2024).
(5) Remove the ADF Cover (1902).

(6) Disconnect the ADF Motor Harness (2848).
(7) Remove the Pick Up Spring (2022).

(8) Remove 2 Snap Rings (G3).
(9) Remove the Clutch (2324).
45
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(10) Remove 2 Bushings (698).

(11) Remove Roller Holder (2026) Assembly.
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Roller
Holder (2026) Assembly is properly placed on the
ADF Unit.
(12) Remove the Paper Feed Shaft Assembly

(2029).
(13) Remove Paper Feed Roller (2001) and D26 D
Gear (2025).
(14) Remove the Pre Feed Roller (2018), Pre Feed
Shaft (2019) and Pre Feed Gear 1 and 2 (2020,
2021).

(16) Lift cover and release the Latch Hook then
remove the ADF Rear Cover (1701).
46
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Note:
When reinstalling the ADF Rear Cover (1701),
make sure to properly route the ADF Harness as
illustrated.
(17) Remove 1 Screw (19).

(18) Remove the ADF PC Board Cover (1916).
(19) Release the Clamp from ADF Unit.

Note:
Do not cut the Tie-Wrap. Push the release clip on
the side of the clamp to remove it.
(20) Disconnect the ADF Harness (2827) on the ADF

PC Board (CN21).

(22) Remove 2 Angle Plate (1801).
47
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(23) Open the ADF Unit.

(24) Remove 4 Screws (6A).
Caution:
Don’t close the ADF Unit subsequent to this step.
(25) Remove the ADF Unit.
(26) Disconnect 5 Harnesses (2848, 2849, 2850,

2851) on the ADF PC Board. (5 connectors)
(28) Remove the ADF PC Board (2846).
(29) Release the Harness from the Clamp.

(30) Disconnect 2 Harnesses (2848, 2850).
(32) Remove the Motor Bracket (1906) Assembly.
Note:
When reassembling the Motor Bracket (1906)
Assembly, follow the step sequence as illustrated.
48
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(34) Remove the ADF Motor (1905).
(35) Remove 2 Drive Belts (1911, 1912).
(36) Remove the S27 Pulley (1910).

(37) Remove the Snap Ring (B9).
(38) Remove the S27 Pulley (1910).
(39) Release the clips and remove the Switch

(1918).
Note:
Apply Molykote EM-50L Grease to 3 shafts on
Right Bracket (1914).
49
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
<Turn the ADF upside down>
(41) Detach the Hook and Loop Fastener on the left

side of the Scanning Pad (1822).
(43) Remove the Exit 1 Roller (1812) and P6L8
Bushing (1813).
<Return the ADF to its upright position>
(44) Release 2 Latch Hooks.

(45) Remove the ADF Front Cover (1702).
(46) Release the Harnesses (2849, 2851) from the

Clamp.
(48) Remove the Original Tray.
(49) Remove the Timing Actuator (2004).
50
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(50) Remove the Snap Ring (B9).

(52) Remove the Feed Roller (2010).
<Cleaning the Rollers and Rubber>
(1) Open the ADF Cover.

(2) Release the Stopper.
(3) Clean the Separation Rubber, Feed Roller, Pre

Feed Roller and Paper Feed Roller with a soft
cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
<Cleaning the Exit Roller>
(1) Lift the Original Tray.

(2) Clean the Exit Roller with a soft cloth, saturated
51
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
<Cleaning the Scanner>

(2) Clean the White Guide, Scanning Pad,
Scanning (S) Glass, and Platen (L) Glass with
a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
Note:
Ensure that the Clear Film as illustrated by A is not
damaged.
52
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.3. Control Panel Unit, Battery
<Replace the Battery>
(1) Remove 1 Screw (Q8).

(2) Remove the Battery Holder (503).
(3) Replace the Battery (504).

Note:
Ensure that the battery is installed with correct
polarity.
(4) Reinstall the Battery Holder (503) and the

Screw (Q8).
<Control Panel>
(5) Open the Left Cover.

(6) Remove 2 Silver Screws (S6).
(7) Remove the Left Scanner Cover (101).
(8) Remove 2 Shoulder Silver Screws (X2).
(9) Remove the Right Scanner Cover (132).
(10) Remove 2 Silver Screws (1027).
(11) Slightly lift the Control Panel Assembly (538).
(12) Disconnect the Harness on the PNL1 PC Board

(CN220).
(13) Remove the Control Panel Assembly.
53
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(14) Disconnect all the Harnesses on PNL1 PC

Board.
(15) Release the Harnesses from 2 Harness
Clamps.
(16) Remove the Harness Protection Cover (518).
(17) Disconnect the Harness on PNL1 PC Board as

illustrated.
(18) Remove 2 Screws (X8).

(19) Remove the PNL1 PC Board (2904).
54
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(21) Remove the PNL 2 PC Board (2905) as
illustrated.

(23) Remove the PNL 3 PC Board (2906) as
illustrated.
(24) Remove the LCD Holder (520).
(25) Remove the LCD Module (519).
55
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.4. Scanner Unit
(Refer to 2.2.3.)
(3) Remove the Rear Document Plate (107).
(4) Remove the Platen (L) Glass (106).
(5) Holding by the center, slowly move the Lamp

Base Assembly to the center of the Scanner
Base Frame in the direction shown by the arrow.
(6) Release the Harness.

(7) Release the Latch Hook.
(8) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the Inverter PC

Board (CN1 and CN2).
(9) Remove the Inverter PC Board (416).
56
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(10) Slide the Lamp Base Assembly to the right side

as illustrated.
(11) Release the Harness.
Note:
When reinstalling the Harness, confirm that the
Harness is installed as illustrated.
(12) Slide the Lamp Base Assembly to the right side

as illustrated.
(13) Remove the Scanning Lamp (410) as

illustrated.
(14) Remove 8 Screws (Y2).

(15) Remove the CCD Cover (406).
57
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(17) Remove the CCD Assembly (427).
Note:
Before proceeding, mark the position of the CCD
Assembly as illustrated.
If the CCD Assembly is not reinstalled at the same
position, it will affect the copy quality.

(19) Remove the Rear Scanner Cover (102).
(21) Remove the Synchro Belt (318).
58
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(22) Disconnect the Harness.

(24) Remove the Scanning Motor (316).

(26) Remove the Left Document Plate (109).
Note:
When reinstalling the Left Document Plate, ensure
the Scanning (S) Glass is in its original position
against the key as illustrated.
59
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(27) Clean the White Reference Sheet with a soft

(28) Clean both Mirror 2 (421) with a soft cloth,

(29) Clean the Mirror 1 (415) with a soft cloth,

60
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.5. Process Unit
Note:
To avoid Toner spill in the machine, follow the steps below before removing the Process Unit.
1. Press "FUNCTION" and "1 SIDED COPY" keys simultaneously.
2. The LCD shows “Please wait...” for approx. 5 sec. Then it will be ready.

(2) Open the Front Cover.
(3) Remove the Toner Waste Container (1201).
(4) Remove the Toner Bottle.

Caution:
Do Not install the Toner Bottle before installing
the Process Unit first. If the Toner Bottle is installed
and turned to the "Locked" position without the
Process Unit, the Toner will spill inside the
machine.
<Cleaning Charge Wire>

Slide the Corona Cleaner in and out 3 or 4 times
slowly, then return the Cleaning Lever Handle to
original position.
61
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(5) Remove 1 Screw (Y3).

(6) Remove the Connector Cover (203).
(7) Loosen 1 Screw.

(9) Remove the Process Unit.

Caution:
To prevent damage to the Process Unit, ensure
that the Left Cover is still open before removing
the Process Unit out of the machine.
(10) Unhook 2 Springs as illustrated.

62
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(12) Turn the OPC Drum Assembly in the direction

of the arrow and remove.
Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.
Caution:
The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light.
Even if it is a fluorescent lamp, approx.1000 lm/m2
(1000 lx).
(13) Release 3 Latch Hooks and remove the

Developer Cover.
(14) Remove the Support Pipe (1338).
<Removing the Old Developer and Toner>
(15) Hold the Developer Unit as illustrated over a

suitable container and dump the used Developer
and Toner by rotating the Gear.
(16) Clean the Developer Unit with a soft dry cloth.
63
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(17) Shake the Developer Bottle thoroughly (approx.

30 seconds).
(18) Pour the developer evenly into the developer unit
by turning the Black Gear as illustrated. Make
sure to empty the bottle.
<Removing the Old OPC Drum>
(19) Remove the OPC Drum Shaft Holder

Assembly.
(20) Remove the Roller Spacer (1409).

(21) Lift the OPC Drum, holding the left side where
the OPC Drum Shaft Holder Assembly was
installed.
(22) Remove 1 Screw (X9).

(23) Remove the Charge Corona Assembly.
64
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(24) Remove the Charge Grid (1433).
(25) Remove 2 Charge Cover (1432,1438).
(26) Draw out the Cleaning Lever Handle (Green)

(1427).
(27) Remove the Charge Cleaning Base (1439).
(28) Remove the Charge Wire Assembly.
65
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(29) Remove the Pad Base (1441).

(31) Remove the Cleaning Blade (1408).
(32) Remove the Front Cleaning Felt (1410), Rear
Cleaning Felt (1411) and 2 Cleaning Sponges
(1412).
(33) Remove the Sheet Scoop (1415).
66
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.6. Fuser Unit
CAUTION:
To prevent from getting burned, do not install, remove, clean or make adjustments when the Fuser Unit is
hot.

(3) Remove the Rear Fuser Cover (1006) and the
Front Fuser Cover (1007).
(4) Disconnect 2 Harnesses.

(6) Remove the Fuser Unit.
(7) Release 2 Harnesses from Latch Hooks.
67
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(10) Remove the Upper Fuser Cover Assembly.
<Cleaning Exit 2 Roller>

Clean the Exit 2 Roller with a soft cloth, saturated
(11) Unhook 2 Springs.
68
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(13) Release 2 Harnesses.
(15) Remove the Exit Roller Cover (1101).

(17) Remove the Fuser Roller (1115) Assembly.

(19) Remove the Front Lamp Holder (1123).
(20) Remove the Fuser Lamp (1116).

(22) Remove the Exit Roller Assembly.
69
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(24) Remove the Finger Base (1108) Assembly.
(25) Remove 5 Separators (1109).
<Cleaning Separators>
Clean the Separators with a soft cloth, saturated
(26) Remove the Fuser Roller (1115) Assembly.
(27) Remove the 2 C-Rings (1113).

(28) Remove the E39 Heat Roller Gear (1112).
(29) Remove the 2 Fuser Roller Bushings (1114).
Note:
Do not scratch the surface of the Fuser Roller
when removing or reinstalling it.
<Cleaning Fuser Roller>

Clean the surface of the Fuser Roller with a soft
70
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(31) Remove the Thermostat (1120).
(33) Remove the Thermal Fuse (1118).
(35) Remove the Thermistor Assembly (1125).
<Cleaning Thermostat>
Clean the surface of the Thermostat only with a
soft dry cloth.
<Cleaning Thermistor Assembly>

Clean the surface of the Thermistor Assembly only
with a soft dry cloth.
(36) Remove 2 Screws (S6, X8).

(37) Remove the Ground Plate 2 (1024).
(38) Remove the Pressure Roller (1021) Assembly.
(39) Remove the Front Pressure Plate (1019) and

the Rear Pressure Plate (1018).
(40) Remove 2 Pressure Roller Bushings (1020).
Note:
Do not scratch the surface of the Pressure Roller
when removing or reinstalling it.
<Cleaning Pressure Roller>

Clean the surface of the Pressure Roller with a soft
71
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.7. Drive Unit
2.2.7.1. Drive Motor and Toner Bottle Motor
(2) Remove the Rear Cover (220).

(4) Remove the Fly Wheels (1555).
(5) Disconnect the Harnesses on the SPC PC

Board (CN719, CN721 and CN723) and Main
Motor.
Clamps.

(9) Remove the Fan (815) Assembly.
72
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(11) Remove the Main Drive Frame B.
(12) Remove 2 Snap Rings (S9).

Clamps.
(14) Remove 2 Clutches (694, 695).
(15) Slide the 1st Paper Tray out of the unit.

(17) Remove the Feed Drive Assembly (1541).

(19) Remove the Main Drive Assembly (1540).
73
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(21) Remove the Drive Motor (1511).
(22) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SPC PC

Board.
(23) Release the Harnesses from Harness Clamps.
Note:
When reinstalling the ILS Harness (SPC PC Board
CN708), ensure that it is secured by the Harness
Clamp as illustrated.

(25) Remove 2 Silver Screws (S6).
(26) Remove the Left Scanner Cover (101).
(28) Remove the Right Scanner Cover (132).
(30) Remove the Rear Scanner Cover (102).
74
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(32) Remove the SPC Bracket (926).

(35) Remove the Toner Bottle Motor Unit.
75
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.7.2. Lift Up Motor and 3rd Main Motor
(2) Remove the Rear Cover (220).

(4) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover (3004).

(11) Remove the 3rd Main Motor (3134).

Clamps.
(13) Disconnect the Harness on the SPC PC Board
(CN706).
(15) Remove the Lift Up Motor (3132).
76
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

Clamps.
(17) Disconnect the Harness on the CST2 PC Board
(CN774).

Clamps.
(CN774).
77
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.8. Left Cover
(3) Remove the ADU.

(5) Remove the Bias Transfer Guide (701).
(6) Remove the E-Ring (J6).

(7) Remove the BTR Ring Spacer (705).
(8) Remove the BTR 27 Gear (706).

(10) Remove the Bias Transfer Roller (711)
Assembly.
78
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(11) Remove 2 Bias Transfer Roller Bushings

(709).
<Cleaning Bias Transfer Roller>

Clean the surface of the Bias Transfer Roller only
with a soft dry cloth.
<Cleaning Duplex Feed Rollers>

Clean the surface of the Duplex Feed Roller with a
soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
79
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.9. Bypass Paper Tray
(3) Remove the Duplex Guide (638) Assembly.

(5) Remove the Feed Roller (689) Assembly.

<Cleaning Feed Roller>

Clean the surface of the Feed Roller with a soft
(9) Remove the Pressure Plate (649).
80
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(11) Remove the Guide (659).
(12) Remove the Separation Roller (658) Assembly.

(14) Remove the Torque Limiter 2 (691).
(15) Remove the Separation Roller (658).

Clean the surface of the Separation Roller with a
81
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.10. Paper Feed Module
(2) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).

(3) Remove the Pickup Roller (619).
<Cleaning Pickup Roller>

Clean the surface of the Pickup Roller with a soft



(8) Remove the One-way Clutch (622).

82
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(10) Slide the 2nd Paper Tray out of the unit.

(11) Open the Jam Access Cover (3015).
(12) Remove 3 Screws (Y3, X8).

(13) Remove the Paper Guide (3022).



(18) Remove the One-way Clutch (622).

83
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(21) Remove the Pickup Roller (619).
<Cleaning Pickup Roller>

Clean the surface of the Pickup Roller with a soft
<Cleaning Intermediate Roller>

Clean the surface of the Intermediate Roller with a
84
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.11. PC Boards and Power Supply PC Boards
<SC PC Board>
(1) Remove the Rear Cover and Lower Rear
Cover (Refer to 2.2.7.2.).
(3) Remove the LAN Spring (812).
(4) Remove the Process Unit (Refer to 2.2.5.).

(7) Remove the Front Cover 1 (211).

(9) Remove the Right Cover (216).

(11) Remove the Ground Plate (947).
85
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(12) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SC PC

Board.
(14) Remove the SC PC Board (2801).
<SPC PC Board>
(15) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SPC PC
Board.
Note:
When reinstalling the ILS Harness (SPC PC Board
CN708), ensure that it is secured by the Harness
Clamp as illustrated.
(17) Remove 2 Harness Clamps (3805).

(19) Remove the SPC PC Board (2802).
86
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
<Power Supply PC Boards>

(20) Remove the Inner Cover (219).

(22) Remove the Right Bracket (803).

(24) Remove the PS Cover (801).
Note:
When reinstalling the PS Cover, ensure that the
PS Cover is installed into the Ground Plate as
illustrated.
(25) Disconnect the Fan Harness.

(27) Remove the Fan (816) Assembly.
87
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(28) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the PS PC

Board.
(31) Remove the PS PC Board Assembly.
(32) Remove 3 Screws (Y3) and 3 Screws (X3).

(33) Remove the PS Bracket (802).

(35) Remove the PS PC Board (2901).
88
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.12. LSU Unit
(1) Remove the PS PC Board Assembly.
(Refer to 2.2.11.)
(2) Disconnect 3 Harnesses.

(5) Remove the LSU Unit (829).
89
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.2.13. Filter
(1) Remove the Rear Cover (Refer to 2.2.7.).
(2) Remove the Ozone Filter (825).
(3) Remove the Filter Holder (824).
90
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2.3. Hardware Identification Template
Ref. No. Part No. Figure Remark
18 XYN3+J6 Screw
19 XTB3+8J Screw
24 XYN4+F8 Screw
62 XTB3+6J Screw
1N XTB4+8J Screw
3F XYN3+F5 Screw
5M XYN3+F4 Screw
5Y XUC4 E-Ring
5Z XUC6 E-Ring
6A XTB3+12J Screw
B1 DZPB000007 Silver Screw
B4 XTB3+8JK Blue Screw
B9 DZJM000171 Snap Ring
C2 DZPB000020 Screw
E8 XTW3+10S Screw
F7 XSN4+W10FN Silver Screw
G3 FFPFJ0041 Snap Ring
G6 FFPFJ0039 Snap Ring
91
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
H6 FFPFJ0033 Snap Ring
H7 FFPFJ0041 Snap Ring
J6 XUC3VM E-Ring
J7 XUC4VM E-Ring
J8 XUC7VM E-Ring
K5 XUC5VM E-Ring
K9 FFPFJ0043 Snap Ring
M2 DZPA000064 Thumb Screw
P2 XTB3+12J Screw
Q8 XTB3+8GFN Screw
S6 DZPA000086 Screw
S9 DZJM000171 Snap Ring
W9 XTB3+12JFJ Screw
X1 XTB3+10GFJ Screw
X2 DZPA000089 Screw
X3 XYN3+F8FJ Screw
X4 XTB3+20GFJ Screw
X6 XTB3+8JFJ Screw
92
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
X7 XYN3+F14FJ Screw
X8 XTB3+8GFJ Screw
X9 XTB3+8FFJ Screw
Y1 XTW3+8PFJ Screw
Y2 XTB3+6FFJ-RP Screw
Y3 XTW3+6LFJ Screw
Y4 XTB3+32GFJ Screw
Y5 XSN3+W10FJ Screw
Y6 XTW3+6LFJR Screw
Y7 XNC3FJ Nut
Y8 XTN3+10GFJ Screw
Y9 XYN4+F8FJ Screw
Y10 XYN4+F6FJ Screw
93
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points

3.1. Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is performed at specific intervals and consists of machine
cleaning and parts replacement.
It is essential to perform these service activities properly and at the specified intervals
for customer satisfaction.
The purpose of this service is to maintain machine performance and image quality.
- You should prepare the replacement parts, and cleaning tools beforehand.
- After completing the preventive maintenance, discard the used parts and
packaging in accordance with local regulations and clean the surrounding
area.
- Before servicing the equipment, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.
- Before using solvents such as IPA (Isopropyl alcohol), put on rubber gloves
and eye protection.
1 Timing
- Perform the preventive maintenance in accordance with the Preventive
Maintenance Check List (refer to 3.4) in the service manual.
2 Cleaning the Rollers

- Rollers should be cleaned with water and cloth.
- Use the IPA (Isopropyl Alcohol) sparingly.
3 Disassembly and Adjustment Precautions

CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF
position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall outlet
before disassembling the machine. (During a Lightning Storm, to
prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first
before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)
- After taking the unit apart, do not attempt to operate the machine.
- When operating the machine with covers removed, be careful and avoid clothing
from being caught by moving components.
- While the electricity is applied to the unit, do not connect nor disconnect the
connectors on any PC Board.
- When handling the drum, follow the precautions listed in section 3.3.
- Ensure to use correct screws.
- Use toothed lock washers for the installation of ground wires to ensure electrical
continuity.
- To reassemble, reverse the sequence of disassembly, unless otherwise specified.
- Blown fuses should only be replaced with fuses of the same specified rating.
94
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4 Laser Handling Precautions

The optical laser system employed by this photocopier is completely sealed by
a protective housing and an external cover. Therefore, the laser beam will not
stray or leak during photocopying operation.
However, when servicing the photocopier, take the following precautions:
1. Do not insert any screwdrivers or other tools that have high reflective
properties into the laser's path.
2. .Before servicing the photocopier, remove watches, rings, or other metallic
objects that you may be wearing. (This is to avoid the danger of the laser
striking the eye by reflecting off the metallic objects being worn.)
Since the laser beam cannot be seen with the naked eye, for maximum
safety, please follow the above precautions.
5 Safety Interlock Switches

- The service technician may defeat the safety interlock switches by inserting a
interlock cheater into the opening of the switch cover.
- Ensure to remove the interlock cheater from the switch cover after completion
of service.
95
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.2. Required Tools
No. Tools No. Tools

1 Soft Cloth 7 Pliers
2 Isopropyl Alcohol 8 Cotton Swab
3 Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 9 Brush
KS-660 - Conductive Grease
4 Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 10 (Available from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc.
URL: http://www.shinetsusilicones.com)
Molykote EM-50L Grease
5 Slotted Screwdriver (3/32 in) 11 (Available from Dow Corning,
URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)
6 Tweezer
3.2.1. Preventive Maintenance Method
Important
No. Part Description Comments
Action
1 Memory Data Check 1. Print the RAM DATA for reference and as a precaution.
2. After completing the task(s), print and compare the RAM
DATA with the previously printed one.
2 Auto Document Check & 1. Clean the Rollers and Separation Rubber with Wet soft
Feeder (ADF) Clean cloth (Water).
Note:
For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth
saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with
a soft cloth saturated with water.
3 Scanner Unit Check & 1. Clean the Scanning Glass or White Reference Sheet with
Clean Isopropyl Alcohol when required.
4 Transmitter Unit Check & 1. Remove any foreign obstacles.
Clean 2. Clean the Rollers with Wet soft cloth (Water).
5 Mirrors Check & 1. Do not touch the surface of the Mirrors with your bare
Clean hands. Clean any dirt or fingerprints with a soft cloth,
saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol.
6 Inspection Items Check 1. Check the Harnesses.
2. Check the Connectors.
3. Check the Screws. If required, replace consumable parts.
7 Gears, Rollers Shafts Check & 1. Check and grease the required Gears and Shafts.
Grease
8 Timing Belts Check & 1. Check for belt looseness or abrasion.
Clean 2. Adjust the Idle Pulley.
96
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.3. Preventive Maintenance Points
3 4 5 1 2 i-ADF
ADF
8 11 9 10 6 12
16
15
13
14
43
44
42
37 39
36 38 41
27
26 DETAIL A
27
25 45
20
22
17
18 19
23 24
21
20
17
18 19
21
20
17
18 19
21
20
17
18 19
97
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
29 30
28
35
32 33 34
31
DETAIL A
98
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.4. Preventive Maintenance Check List

The chart outlined below is a general guideline for maintenance.
Cleaning Replacement/Adjustment
Ref. Ref.
No. Mechanical Parts Cycle Cycle
No. Method Procedure Counter
(Sheet) (Sheet)
i-ADF Unit
1 ADF Roller 2314 60K Alcohol 120K Refer to F7-08
2 Pre Feed Roller 2018 60K Alcohol 120K 2.2.1.
3 Separation Roller 2509 60K Alcohol 120K
4 Torque Limiter 2510 60K Alcohol 120K
Bushing
5 Torque Limiter 2511 60K Alcohol 120K
Spring
ADF Unit
6 Exit 1 Roller 1812 60K Alcohol - Refer to F7-08
7 White Sheet 1814 60K Alcohol - 2.2.2.
8 Feed Roller 2010 60K Alcohol -
9 Pre Feed Roller 2018 60K Alcohol 120K
10 Separation Rubber 2024 - - 60K
11 Paper Feed Roller 2001 60K Alcohol 120K
12 Scanning Pad 1822 60K Dry soft cloth -
Scanner Unit
13 Mirror 1 415 60K - - Refer to F7-04
14 Mirror 2 421 60K - - 2.2.4.
15 Platen (L) Glass 106 60K - -
16 Scanning (S) Glass 110 60K - -
Paper Feed Module
17 Pickup Roller 619 60K Alcohol 120K Refer to F7-12/-13/-
18 Separation Roller 629 60K Alcohol 120K 2.2.10. 14/-15
19 Torque Limiter 1 690 - - 120K
20 Feed Roller 623 60K Alcohol 120K
21 Intermediate Roller 3104 60K Alcohol -
Sheet Bypass
22 Feed Roller 689 60K Alcohol 120K Refer to F7-11
23 Separation Roller 658 60K Alcohol 120K 2.2.9.
24 Torque Limiter 2 691 - - 120K
25 Registration Roller 601 60K - -
Bias Transfer Unit
26 Bias Transfer Roller 711 60K Dry soft cloth 120K Refer to F7-02
(BTR) 2.2.8.
27 Duplex Feed Roller 735 60K -
Process Unit
- Developer - - - 60K Refer to F7-10
28 OPC Drum 1403 - - 60K 2.2.5. F7-06
99
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Cleaning Replacement/Adjustment
Ref. Ref.
No. Mechanical Parts Cycle Cycle
No. Method Procedure Counter
(Sheet) (Sheet)
29 Charge Corona Case 1444 60K - - Refer to F7-07
30 Charge Wire 1443 10K - 60K 2.2.5.
By Customer
31 Cleaning Blade 1408 - - 60K
32 Front Cleaning Felt 1410 - - 60K
33 Rear Cleaning Felt 1411 - - 60K
34 Cleaning Sponge 1412 - - 60K
35 Sheet Scoop 1415 - - 60K
Fuser Unit
36 Fuser Roller 1115 60K Alcohol 120K Refer to F7-02
37 Pressure Roller 1021 60K Alcohol 240K 2.2.6.
38 Fuser Roller Busing 1114 - - 120K
39 Pressure Roller 1020 - - 240K
Busing
40 Thermistor 1125 60K Dry soft cloth 120K
Assembly
41 Fuser Lamp 1116 - - 240K
42 Separator 1109 60K Alcohol 120K
43 Exit 2 Roller 1104 60K - -
Main Unit
44 Ozone Filter 825 - - 240K Refer to F7-02
45 Toner Spill Tray 1202 60K - - 2.2.13.
Note:
1. Wet Cloth represents a soft cloth saturated with water.
For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then
follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.
2. The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module.
To verify the counter information, print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode: F7 - Electronic
Counter - 00 (List Print).
3. Cleaning, Replacement and Adjustment Cycle (Sheet) are based on using Panasonic's recommended
standard paper and supplies. These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used, Paper size,
orientation, print duty, continuous/interval print and/or ambient conditions.
• Total Counter View Mode on the LCD

The Total Counter can be displayed on the Panel Display by pressing "COPY SIZE" and "PAPER TRAY"
keys simultaneously in Standby mode for quick reference.
TOTAL COUNTER
1234
• LCD Contrast Adjustment
Press holding the “CLEAR” key and press “ORIGINAL SIZE” key for Lighter or “COPY SIZE” key for
Darker.
100
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.5. Resetting the P/M (Preventive Maintenance) Counter

When the machine reaches the preset P/M Cycle, it will show "Call for P/M" or "Replace The Toner Waste
Container" on the LCD Display. The PM Counter can be reset by following the procedures below.
3.5.1. "Call for P/M" (Default: 120K)

1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4.
2. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE”, and “3” keys sequentially to enter the Service Mode.
3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-70 (PM Cycle) and change to the desired value.
4. Press “FUNCTION” and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
3.5.2. "Call for P/M ADF" (Default: Not Set)

1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4.
3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-87 (ADF PM Cycle) and change to the desired value.
3.5.3. U14 "Replace The Toner Waste Container"

A. Blinking Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators
Upon detecting that the Toner Waste Container is full, the machine will complete the current job, and
stop operating.
A blinking Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators will appear on the display.
To continue using the machine temporarily while waiting for the Service Technician, press any key
(up to 100 additional copies can be made).
B. Steady Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators

Upon reaching the 100 copies, the machine stops and will not allow further operation until the Toner
Waste Container is replaced.
Replace the Toner Waste Container. (Refer to Section 2.2.5.)
101
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.6. Lubrication Point List

This information is used for routine Preventive Maintenance (PM) calls to ensure the highest degree of
reliability. Inspect the following areas and lubricate as required. The inspection interval is usually 120K
copies or more, however the interval may be reduced due to environmental conditions.
Ref.
Mechanical Parts Grease Lubrication Point
No.
Automatic Duplex Unit
Pinch Timing Roller 712
KS-660
Bias Transfer
709
Bushing
102
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.7. Updating the Firmware

The Quickest and Most Easiest Method of Updating the Firmware is to use the Network Firmware
Tool (FUP) using Ethernet LAN Port and a Crossover Cable.
The Network FUP Tool version must be 3.XX or higher, and it can be found on the Panasonic Document
Management System CD-ROM included with the main unit or on the CD-ROM included with the PCL or
PS/PCL options.
Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.
3.7.1. Firmware Configuration
A. Hardware Configuration
This machine is controlled by three (3) CPUs which are located on the System Control (SC) PC Board
and the Scanner Printer Control (SPC) PC Board.
SC PC Board Standard With PCL Option With PS Option
Configuration Configuration Configuration
On Board (A) (B) (D)

PC F-ROM (1) (2) (5)
Program Program Program
CPU 4 MB
Ethernet Port 4 MB 4 MB 4 MB
PC
USB Port Slot 1 (C) 8MB (E) 8MB

(3) (6)
Program Program
FRM 2 MB (a) (a)
4 MB
PCB
(4) (7)
8 MB Font
Flash Memory Font
Card (b) (b)
4 MB 4 MB
4 MB or 8 MB
Slot 2
Not
Used
SPC PC Board
F-ROM
Scanner Control Program
CPU
512 KB Printer Control Program
B. SC PC Board Firmware
The 4 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SC PCB. An Optional Expansion 8 MB
Program Memory (FRM8 PCB) can be installed into SLOT 1.
The Firmware to be written into the 4 MB onboard and the 8 MB of SLOT 1 depends upon the
configuration of the Standard, PCL or PS Options.
(1) Standard
The Standard Program (1) is only written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM
Code (A).
(2) For PCL Option
The PCL Control Program (2) must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM
Code (B). The PCL Control Program (3) and PCL Font data (4) are written into the 8 MB in the
SLOT 1. The Firmware (3) and (4) are assigned as ROM Code (C).
When using 8 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB Program (C) can be written onto one card.
103
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (C) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4
MB card for the PCL Control Program (3) and one 4 MB card for the PCL Font data (4).
(3) For PS Option
The PS Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code
(D). The PS Control Program (6) and (7) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1.
Both Firmwares (6) and (7) are assigned as ROM Code (E).
When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (E) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4
MB card for the PS Control Program (6) and one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (7).
C. SPC PC Board Firmware

The 512 KB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SPC PCB. The Programs for Scanner
Control and Printer Control are saved on the Board. The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from
the SC PCB.
D. Firmware Updating Ports

Three (3) types of Ports are available for updating the firmware.
(1) Ethernet LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Local Area Network (LAN). Refer to the
Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.
(2) USB Port (Alternate)
The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via USB Port. The Master Firmware Card can
also be created from a PC using the USB Port. Refer to the Firmware Update Operation
Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.
(3) Flash Memory Card (Alternate)
The machine's Firmware can be updated using the Master Firmware Card. The Master Firmware
Card can be created by copying the Firmware from an existing machine's SC PCB using a 4 MB or
8 MB Flash Memory Card.
To update the SC, SPC and PNL PCB, 3 Flash Memory Cards are required for the Standard
configuration or 5 Flash Memory Cards for the PCL or PS/PCL configuration.
104
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.7.2. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.
1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the Network Firmware Update Tool OI on the
CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2) Preparing the Firmware Code

Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File: DP-1520_1820_PU_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade

Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code

Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the
C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to
upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Transferring Order
\ DP-1520_1820_PU_xxxxxx \ SC_STD \ DP-LLNewAxVxxxxx-xx 1
\ SC_PCL \ DP-LLNewBxVxxxxx-xx 1
\ SC_PS \ DP-LLNewDxVxxxxx-xx 1
\ SPC \ DP-LLNewSPCAxVxxxxxx 2
When you select the Parent Folder, the following
Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders
are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware
Type.
The transferring order is set up automatically.
105
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating
through the USB Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
5) After the Firmeware Update is completed, enter the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed
in step (3) above.
3.7.3. Updating through USB Port (Alternate method)

If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.
1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe

Example:
From:
To:

Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.
Print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copier Service Mode F9-03-00).
Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port.
If the unit does not boot up, follow the procedure below:
a. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the right side of the unit).
b. Turn the power On while holding the “ENERGY SAVER” key.
c. When the unit's front panel green lamp (DATA lamp) turns On, release the “ENERGY SAVER” key, it
is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port.
Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC.
106
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Start the Local Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in
the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the
display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
You must process each firmware file separately in this manner and sequence.
Transferring
Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File
Order
\ DP-1520_1820_PU_xxxxxx \ SC_STD \ DP-LLNewAxVxxxxx-xx DP-LLNewAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1
\ SC_PCL \ DP-LLNewBxVxxxxx-xx DP-LLNewBxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1
DP-LLNewCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2
DP-LLNewCxVxxxxxb.bin 1-3
\ SC_PS \ DP-LLNewDxVxxxxx-xx DP-LLNewDxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1
DP-LLNewExVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2
DP-LLNewExVxxxxxb.bin 1-3
\ SPC \ DP-LLNewSPCAxVxxxxxx LLNewSPCAxVxxxxxx.bin 2
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type
window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by
selecting the Firmware Type.
Note:
2. Please refer to the Firmware Update Tool OI for additional details.
location.
Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.
5) After the Firmeware Update is completed, enter the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed
in step (3) above.
3.7.4. Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card (Alternate method)
1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).
2. Turn the Power Switch on the Right side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning
Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC
Power Cord, if the Fax Option is installed.)
3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine.
4. Turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the ON position.
5. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” keys and then Key “3” on the keypad sequentially.
6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Master Card).
7. The firmware is copied into the machine.
8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.
9. Turn the Power Switch on the Right side of the machine to the OFF position.
10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine.
12. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are
other than factory default.
107
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Note:
After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby mode.
Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9
Parameters F9-02-xx.
Caution:
If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to 3.7.8. (Firmware Emergency Recovery)
3.7.5. Creating a Master Firmware Card
A. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit

Setup:

Example:
From:
To:
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Firmware Card
2. Insert/Remove the Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into/from the machine.
5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port.
(Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.
108
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB)
2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine.
5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup).
6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card.
7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys
simultaneously to return to standby.
9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.
11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.
3.7.6. Erasing the Master Firmware Card

2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine.
5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts “READY TO PROGRAM PRESS SET TO
START”. Press “STOP”.
7. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.
10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.
3.7.7. Notice after installing the HDD option

After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed (similar
to Windows OS when the power is abruptly interrupted), it is important to follow the step sequence below
when turning OFF the Power Switch on the machine.
1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch on
the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown
Mode)", continue to step 2 below.
3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive
Unit and advances into “ENERGY SAVER MODE”.
5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the
Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord, if the Fax option installed.)
6. After finishing the installation of the Hard Disk Drive, please go over the above Power Down
procedure with the customer to avoid the Scan Disk Function from being performed (indicated by
SCANNING HARD DISK message on the display), and customer inquiries related to abrupt Power
Off.
7. Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.
109
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.7.8. Firmware Emergency Recovery
The easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to either use the Local
Firmware Update Tool software by selecting the Independent File method, or using the Master Firmware
Flash Card method (2 Flash Cards required).
Whichever method you select, it is easier to restore the machine's firmware to the Standard (AAV) Type
first as it only requires 2 files to bring the machine to initial working condition. (Install the files in this
order: SC and SPC).
After recovering, if optional PCL or PS/PCL firmware is required, use the Network Firmware Update Tool
or the Local Firmware Update Tool to update the firmware to the required level.
If the unit does not boot up properly, follow the steps below:
1. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the right side of the unit).
- Before proceeding to the next step, you must prepare either the Local Firmware Update Tool or
create the Master Firmware Flash Cards (read the appropriate sections first).
- If using the Master Firmware Card, insert the Master Firmware Flash Cards in the unit.
2. Turn the power On while holding the “ENERGY SAVER” key.
3. When the green lamp on the front panel turns On, release the “ENERGY SAVER” key.
- If using the Master Firmware Card, the unit will start updating the Firmware code files
automatically.
The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port or Master Firmware Card.
110
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.7.9. Firmware Version
SC : DP-LLNew A A Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU)

Destination Code (Fax)
AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
Destination Code (Copier)
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Division Soft
(When it is divided into (a) and (b))
Firmware Version (V1xxxx)
Language Code
A : A-English, C-French & Spanish
c : French, German, Italian, Dutch,
Portuguese, Spanish, English & Greek
d : French, German, Swedish, Norwegian,
Danish, Finnish, Turkish & English
e : French, German, English, Polish,
Hungarian, Czech & Russian
j : English & Korean
k : English & Taiwanese
l : English & Chinese
Firmware Type
A : Standard
B, C, D, E : Optional
Model Number
SPC : LLNew SPC A A Vxxxxx
Firmware Version (V1xxxx)

AA: Fixed
SPC
Model Number
111
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
3.8.
Ver. 1.0
When the following items are replaced or cleaned, perform adjustments in the correct order.
Adjustment LSU Image
Toner OPC PWM LSU Print
Process TDC PWM Density
Optics Spill Counter Adj.
No. Work Unit Adj. Pattern Adj. F5/F6 Adj. F6-49 Remark
Clean Tray Reset F6-39
Clean Print (Note 4) (Note 1) /50/51
Part Item Clean F8-09 F8-14
F8-18 (Note 3) (Note 2)
1 Installation Main 1 2 3 4
2 Cleaning Optics 1 2 3
3 Process Unit 1 2 3
4 Toner Spill Tray 1 2
5 Replace Scanning Lamp 1 2 3
6 Platen Glass 1 2
7 OPC Drum 1 2 3 4 5
112
8 Developer 1 2 3
9 OPC Drum & 1 2 3 4 5 6
Developer
10 Corona Wire 1 2 3 4
11 Process Unit 1 2 3 4 5
Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure (Order)
12 Toner Density 1 2 3
Sensor Replace Developer
13 LSU 1 2 3 4 5
14 SC PC Board 1 2 Input F5/F6 Parameter
JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Note:
1. Print F5/F6
1) Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE”, and “3” keys sequentially to enter the Service Mode.
2) Press the "9" key to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).
3) Press the "START" key.
4) Press "3" and "SET" keys.
5) Press "V" or "/\" arrow keys to select "00 F5/F6 PARAMETERS" and press "SET" key.
6) Prints the memory contents of the F5 and F6 modes.
2. Contrast Adjusting
2) Press the "2" and the "START" keys to enter the F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).
3) Set the exposure to the center position.
4) Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode.
5) Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N: FQ-SJ1011) and compare the density to the
chart shown below. If it is within specification, skip to step (14).
a. Gray scale “A” should not be visible.
b. Gray scale “2” should be clearly visible.
A Not visible
. . . . . .
. . . . .. . . . . . 1 . (Not visible or hardly visible)
. .
2 Clearly visible
6) Press the "STOP" key to exit the F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).
7) Press the “6” and the "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).
8) Enter F6-50 Mode (T/P Mode Image Density).
9) Press the "SET" key to highlight the current value.
10) Enter a new value (up to 3-digits).
Note:
The “RESET” key is used to change to a Negative or Positive (+/-) value.
(+) : Lighter
(-) : Darker
11) Press the “SET” and “STOP” keys.
12) Enter F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).
13) Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.
Note:
Repeat Steps (3) to (10) until desired density is attained.
F6-49 : T Mode Image Density (Text)
F6-51 : P Mode Image Density (Photo)
14) Press “FUNCTION” and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
113
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3. PWM Adjustment
1) Ensure that Ledger / A3 Size Paper is loaded in one of the Trays, and pull out the remaining trays
(including the bypass tray) to disable them.
3) Press the "8" key to enter the F8 Mode (Service Adjustment).
5) Press the "1", "8" and "SET" keys sequentially to enter the F8-18 "C18 PRT PWM ADJ. PTN.".
6) Press the "START" key to begin the LSU PWM Pattern Printing.
Sample:
4 gray patches are visible in the illustration, the value of the uppermost patch position is "+2" in
our example.
(-5)
(0)
+2
(+5)
In our sample, 4 patches

are visible.
Test Pattern
7) Press the "STOP" key.

8) Press the "6" and the "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).
9) Select "39 LSU Unit PWM ADJUST".
10) Press "SET" button and enter the value of the gray patch, as established in Step (6).
4. LSU Adjustment
Refer to 3.9.
114
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.9. Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side

When installing the Paper Tray option, the following LSU Image Side to Side adjustment must be
performed.
The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory.
If copy image is abnormal, specially in the Rotation Copy mode, adjust it by the following procedure.
3.9.1. Printer Registration
1. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper
size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1).
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-04 (Printer Registration) to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value.
standby.
<Figure>
Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge).
For Ledger or A3, place as Portrait.
For Letter or A4, place as Landscape.
5 mm
Top (Lead edge)
Two lines are printed
5 mm 5 mm
Two lines are printed
3.9.2. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the Tray

1. Insert paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull
out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-10 to F6-14, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
7. Proceed the above steps for other Tray.
standby.
115
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.9.3. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the ADU
1. Insert paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull
out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-16 (ADU Side Adjust), to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
standby.
3.9.4. 100% Read Adjustment
1. Place the Original Document on the Platen Scanner.
4. Perform the Service Mode F2 (Single Copy Test).
5. Check the Image size of the Copy and the Original as Portrait.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-00 (Adj 100% Side-Side Read), to adjust for an identical vertical
(side-to-side) size ratio.
7. If the image is smaller than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-)
value.
8. Perform the Service Mode F6-01 (Adj 100% Lead-Tail Read), to adjust for an identical horizontal
(top-to-bottom) size ratio.
value.
standby.
Note:
This is the size adjustment and do not worry about the positioning.
3.9.5. Original Registration & CCD Read Adjustments
1. Place the Original Document on the Platen Scanner.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-03 (Original Registration), to adjust the platen original registration
detection timing.
7. If the gap is smaller than the Original, input a (-) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (+) value.
8. Perform the Service Mode F6-53 (CCD Read Position Adj), to adjust the CCD Read side position.
9. If the gap is smaller than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.
standby.
116
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.9.6. ADF 100% Image 1-Sided Adjustment
1. Place the Original Document on the ADF.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-93 (ADF 100% Image 1-Sided), to adjust for an identical vertical
(side-to-side) magnification for 1-sided scan.
value.
standby.
Note:
This is the size adjustment and do not worry about the positioning.
3.9.7. ADF Original Read Edge & ADF Main Scan Adjustments
1. Place the Original Document on the ADF.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-91 (Original Read Edge ADF), to adjust for the ADF Original Read
Edge detection timing.
7. If the gap is less than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.
8. Perform the Service Mode F6-90 (ADF Read Main Scan Pos.), to adjust for the ADF horizontal
image read start position.
9. If the gap is less than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.
standby.
117
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
3.9.8. Double Exposure Lead and Side Edge Adjustments
Caution:
Confirm that the Scanning Pad is installed and aligned correctly on the ADF/i-ADF prior to making
any adjustments. (Refer to the ADF/i-ADF Installation Instructions in Sect. 8.13. or 8.14.)
1. Place a Business Card, Driver's License, Insurance Card, etc. (Invoice size or smaller) on the
Platen Glass as illustrated.
License
Driver's
Platen
2. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st Paper Tray or onto the Sheet Bypass and change the tray
settings to the appropriate paper size.
3. Make a copy using the Double Exposure Copy Mode.
4. Check the Copy Image.
a. For a Horizontal Black Line in the Center, adjust the Service Mode F6-63 (Lead Edge Read
Timing) by following the steps below.
b. For a Vertical Black Line at the Leading Edge, adjust the Service Mode F6-64 (Side Edge Read
Adjust) by following the steps below.
Output of Letter (A4) Paper (not LTR-R)
Driver's Driver's
License License
Adjust with F6-63
Driver's Driver's
License License
Adjust with F6-64
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-63 (Lead Edge Read Timing) and F6-64 (Side Edge Read Adjust).
Note:
It is not recommended setting the value higher than "4" as it will increase the Void Area.
standby.
8. Repeat the above steps 3 to 7 until the Black Line(s) disappear.
118
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4 Troubleshooting
4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart
START
Plug the Power Cord in and turn

the Power Switche ON.
Does the unit power up No

normally?
Does the LCD display No
Yes the function correctly?
Yes Troubleshoot Improper
LCD Display
Troubleshoot any 3-digit

CODE displayed
Does the unit produce No

normal copies?
Yes Does the original document No
feed through correctly?
Yes Troubleshoot the
Document Feeder
Does the recording paper No

exit the unit?
Yes Check for recording
paper path problems.
Troubleshoot communication
problems (transmission,
reception, dialing, polling, Troubleshoot printed
information codes, or copy quality problems
diagnostic codes.)
119
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.2. Improper LCD Display

START
Check connectors: CN52 (SC PCB)

and CN220 (PNL1 PCB).
Yes
Is LED/LCD displayed? Does the display appear normal?
No Yes No
Does CN52, pin 6 on the SC Yes

PCB measure +5 VDC?
No
Replace the LCD
Replace the SC PCB. Module.
No Replace the
Is the trouble
resolved? Power Supply
Yes Unit.
END
END
Note:
LCD Display Brightness Adjustment
To adjust the brightness of the LCD display, press and while holding down the "CLEAR" key, keep
pressing the "ORIGINAL SIZE" or the "COPY SIZE" key until the desired brightness is achieved.
ORIGINAL SIZE : Dimmer
COPY SIZE : Brighter
120
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3. Printed Copy Quality Problems

4.3.1. Black Copy
Paper Travel
START
Is the Test Pattern printout in No

Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal?
Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes
Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operational?
Yes Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.
No
Is the PS normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and voltages
on the PS.
2. Check the contacts between
PS and Developer Unit.
3. Replace the PS.
No
Is the SPC PCB normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and voltages
on the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the SPC PCB.
END
121
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.2. Blank Copy
Paper Travel
START

Yes Check the Scanner mechanism.

Unit operational?
Yes
Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.
Are there any foreign particles Yes

or stains in the Charge Unit?
No 1. Clean the Charge Wire
with a soft, dry cloth.
2. Replace the Charge Unit.
No
Is the PS normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the PS.
2. Check the Spring Connector
and voltage on the PS.
3. Replace the PS.

or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path?
1. Remove the particles from the
No laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.
No
Is the SPC PCB normal?
voltages on the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the SPC PCB.
END
122
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.3. Vertical White Lines
Paper Travel
START

Yes Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes
Is the recording paper damp?
No
Replace the recording paper.

Unit operational?
Yes

or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path? 1. Remove the particles from
No the laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.
Are the Fuser and Pressure No

Roller surfaces clean?
Yes
Clean or replace the rollers.
END
123
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.4. Ghost Images
Paper Travel
AAA
A
START

Yes
Is the recording paper damp? Yes
No

Unit operational?
Yes

Yes
END
124
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.5. Vertical Dark Lines
Paper Travel
START

Yes

Unit operational?
Yes
No
Is the LSU normal?
Yes
Replace the LSU.

Yes
END
125
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.6. Horizontal Dark Lines
Paper Travel
START

Yes

Unit operational?
Is the LSU normal?

Yes Replace the LSU.
No
Is the PS normal?

voltages on the PS.
and voltage on the PS.
3. Replace the PS.

Yes Clean or replace the rollers.
END
126
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.7. Dark Background
Paper Travel
START

Service Mode 3 normal? Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes
No

Unit operational?
Yes
No
Is the LSU normal?
Yes
Replace the LSU.
No
Is the PS normal?
voltages on the PS.
and voltages on the PS.
3. Replace the PS.

Yes
END
127
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.8. Light Print
Paper Travel
START
Is the Test Pattern printout in Yes

No
Yes
No
Replace the paper.
Is the OPC Drum/Developer Unit No

operational?
Yes
Are there any foreign particles or
stains blocking the Laser Unit
path? 1. Remove the particles from the
laser beam path or clean the stains.
No 2. Replace the LSU.
No
Is the PS normal?
voltages on the PS.
2. Replace the PS.
Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller No

surfaces clean?
Yes
END
128
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.9. Horizontal White Lines
Paper Travel
START

Yes
No

Unit operational?
Yes

or stains in the Charge Unit?
No 1. Clean the Charge Wire
with a soft, dry cloth.
2. Replace the Charge Unit.
No
Is the PS normal?
voltages on the PS.
2. Replace the PS.

Yes
END
129
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)
P
START
Yes
No
No
Is the Fuser Unit normal?
Yes Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note)
END
Note:
Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat and/or the Thermistor fail (open-circuit).
130
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.11. Voids in Solid Areas
Paper Travel
START
No

Unit operational?

Yes
END
4.3.12. Black Dots
P
Paper Travel
START

Unit operational?

Yes
END
131
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.13. Recording Paper Creases
Paper Travel
START
No

or stains in the paper path?
No Remove any obstructions and / or
clean the paper path.
Is the recording paper skewing? Yes
No Ensure the paper is set correctly in

the Paper Tray and that the Paper
Guides are properly adjusted.
Are the Fuser and Pressure Yes

Roller surfaces soiled or are
there any foreign particles or 1. Remove any foreign particles
stains in the Fuser Unit? and / or clean the stains.
No 2. Clean or replace the rollers.
3. Replace the Fuser Unit.
END
132
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.14. Poor Printed Copy Quality
START
Is the Test Pattern printout No

in Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal? 1. Replace the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the LSU.
Yes 3. Replace the PS.
4. Replace the Developer Unit.
Make a local copy.
No
Is the printed copy correct?
Yes Check the connections of

CN850 on the CCD PCB,
CN 55 on the SC PCB,
the Scanning Lamp.
Perform a receiving test

with the reference fax unit.
No
Is the received copy correct?
Yes 1. Check CN390 on the FXB PCB.
2. Check CN22/25 on MJR PCB.
3. Check the Telephone Line Cord.
4. Replace the FXB PCB.
Is a poor copy printed only No

when receiving from a
specific transmitter?
Yes Telephone line quality is poor.
The transmitting machine

may be defective.
END
133
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.15. Document Skewing
START
Mo de
Copy le Is the Test Pattern printout No Check the Scanner
Samp in Copier F1 Mode normal? or ADF/iADF mechanism.
Yes
Is the LSU normal? No Check or replace LSU.

Yes
END
134
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.15.1. LSU Skew Adjustment
(1) Open the Front Cover and the Left Cover.
(2) Slide the Process Unit out. (Refer to 2.2.5.)
Caution:
hands.
(3) Remove the Front Cover 1. (Refer to 2.2.11.)

(4) Loosen 4 Screws.
Adjust the Lever Plate downwards and recheck the

< Example of Printed Image > Document Skewing. Readjust as needed.
Document Leading Edge
One scale adjusts the skewed image by
approximately 0.01 mm.
A
Adjust the Lever Plate upwards and recheck the
< Example of Printed Image > Document Skewing. Readjust as needed.
135
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.16. Abnormal Printing
START
Is the recording paper loaded No

in the Paper Tray properly?
Yes 1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide.
2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide.
Is the recording paper size and No

thickness within specification?
Yes Replace with correct paper.
Is the Panasonic Toner No

being used?
Yes Replace with the Panasonic Toner.
Are all switches and sensors No

operating properly?
Yes Adjust, clean or replace.
Yes
Are there any foreign particles
or paper pieces in the receiver
unit? Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces
No from the receiver unit.
No
Do the rollers rotate properly?
Yes 1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches and

springs.
2. Adjust or replace any defective parts.
Is the receiving mechanism No

operating correctly?
Yes Adjust or replace any defective parts.
END
136
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.17. Scanned Copy Quality Problems
START
Is the Scanning Lamp Yes

abnormal?
No
Replace the Scanning Lamp.

or paper pieces in the scanning
area? Remove the foreign particles or paper
No pieces from the scanning area.
Yes
Is the scanning area dirty?
No 1. Clean the Scanning Glass.
2. Clean Mirrors 1 and 2.
Are the Transmitting Yes

Rollers dirty?
No Clean the rollers.
Yes
Is the Scanner Block abnormal?
No 1. Check CN (SC PCB).
2. Check CN (CCD PCB).
3. Replace the CCD Assembly.
4. Replace the SC PCB.
END
137
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.3.18. Print Skew Adjustment for Platen Glass Scanning
Follow the procedures below to adjust for the skewing when scanning original(s) from the Platen Glass.
Remove the Platen (L) Glass. (Refer to 2.2.4.)

<Adjustment 1>
When the printed image is skewed as illustrated.
< Example of Printed Image >
A
(1) Mark the original positions of the Screw A and B
before making any adjustments.
(2) Rotate the Screw A counter-clockwise and
Screw B clockwise by the same amount.
(Half rotation of the screw, adjusts the skewed
image by approximately 0.9 mm.)
Caution:
Do not rotate the screw by more than half a
rotation.
(3) Make a copy to confirm the correction.

A
(4) Rotate the Screw A clockwise and Screw B
counter-clockwise by the same amount.
(Half rotation of the screw, adjusts the skewed
image by approximately 0.9 mm.)
Caution:
Do not rotate the screw by more than half a
rotation.
(5) Make a copy to confirm the correction.
138
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
<Adjustment 2: Alternate method>

It is delicate method as a factory adjustment.
Only when it can not be fixed by the adjustment 1.
A
(1) Mark the original position of the Plate before
making any adjustments.
(3) Adjust the Plate to left and recheck the
Document Skewing. Readjust as needed.

A
(5) Adjust the Plate to right and recheck the
Document Skewing. Readjust as needed.
(6) Perform the Service Mode F6-03 to adjust the

Top field, if necessary.
139
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.4. Document Feeder (ADF)

4.4.1. No Document Feed
START
Is the Document set No Set the Document

properly? properly.
Yes
Is the Document No Set the Document on

thickness or size
the Platen Glass.
within specifications?
Yes
Does the NP Sensor

Does the LCD activate No No Adjust or replace the
Actuator move
when a Doument is set? Actuator.
smoothly?
Yes Yes
Does CN27, pin 3 on No Check the connections

Check the Harness of
the ADF PCB of CN21 on the ADF
the ADF Motor.
measure +5 VDC? PCB and CN605
on the SC PCB.
Yes
Is the trouble No
resolved?
Yes
END
Does the ADF Roller No Replace the Clutch Replace the ADF
rotate? or the ADF Motor. PCB or the SC PCB.
Yes
No
Is the trouble Replace the ADF PCB.
resolved?
Yes
END
Is the Feed Roller No Check and adjust the

surface dirty? separator pressure.
Yes
Is the trouble No Replace the Pre-Feed

Clean the Feed Roller
resolved? and / or the ADF Roller.
surface.
Yes
END
140
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.4.2. Document Jam
START
Are there any obstacles in Yes Remove any obstacles

the document path? blocking the path.
No
Does the ADF Roller No Check the ADF Motor
rotate? connector.
Yes
Yes
Is the trouble resolved?
No
Replace the ADF Motor or
the ADF PCB.
Does the document feed No Check the Gear and

normally? the Roller.
Yes
Does CN27, pin 3 on the No Check the connections of

ADF PCB measure CN21 on the ADF PCB and
+5 VDC? CN605 on the SC PCB.
Yes
Yes
Is the trouble resolved?
No
Replace the ADF PCB or
SC PCB.
END
141
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.4.3. Document Skew
START
Are there any obstacles Yes

Remove any obstacles
in the document path?
from the document path.
No
Are the Pre-Feed and ADF No Replace the Pre-Feed
Rollers operational? and / or ADF Roller.
Yes
Are the components of the No Replace any worn out /
Feeder Unit operational? defective component.
Yes
Does the NP Sensor No Adjust or replace the

Actuator move smoothly? Actuator.
Yes
Adjust Feed Skew
Yes
Front Page skew? Adjustment "A".
(See Sect. 4.4.3.1.)
No
Adjust Feed Skew
Yes
Back Page skew? Adjustment "B".
(See Sect. 4.4.3.1.)
No
END
142
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.4.3.1. ADF Feed Skew Adjustment
Using a lined Original (about 20 lb (75 g/m2) weight pager), make a copy from the ADF to check for
feeding alignment.
(3) (1) Copy an Original using the ADF.

(2) Open the ADF Cover and release the Stopper.
(3) Remove the ADF Front Cover.
(2) Note:
(2) Release the 2 Latch Hooks from back by opening
the ADF.
(4) Remove 1 Screw and turn the Adjusting
(3) Bracket counter-clockwise.
(4)
90
(A) If the Document is Skewed to the right, set the

<Example of Printed Image>
Copy Image Adjusting Bracket to the right and secure with 1
Leading Edge Screw.
Right
Skewed to
the right
(B) If the Document is Skewed to the left, set the

<Example of Printed Image> Adjusting Bracket to the left and secure with 1
Copy Image
Leading Edge
Screw.
Left
Skewed to
the left
143
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.4.3.2. i-ADF Feed Skew Adjustment
Pinch Roller (1838)
(Feed Skew Adjustment "A")
Pinch Roller (1838)

(Reverse Registration or Feed Skew Adjustment "B")
1. Front Page Skew Adjustment
Using a lined original (about 20 lb (80 g/m2) weight pager), make a copy from the ADF / i-ADF to check
for feeding alignment.
Adjust the Feed Skew Adjustment "A" downwards

< Example of Printed Image > and recheck the feeding alignment. Readjust as
Document Leading Edge needed.
A
Adjust the Feed Skew Adjustment "A" upwards and
< Example of Printed Image > recheck the feeding alignment. Readjust as needed.
144
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2. Back Page Skew Adjustment (i-ADF Only)
Using a lined original (about 20 lb (80 g/m2) weight pager), make a copy from the i-ADF to check for
feeding alignment.
Adjust the Feed Skew Adjustment "B" downwards

< Example of Printed Image > and recheck the feeding alignment. Readjust as
Document Leading Edge needed.
B
Adjust the Feed Skew Adjustment "B" upwards and
< Example of Printed Image > recheck the feeding alignment. Readjust as needed.
B
4.4.4. i-ADF Free Stop Adjustment
Follow the procedure below to adjust the Free Stop function, if necessary.
Fasten 2 Adjusting Screws on the Right Hinge.

Screws The Adjustment should be performed by 1/4 turn
while checking the Free Stop.
Make sure that the rotation values of both Adjusting
Screws are the same.
145
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.5. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface

4.5.1. Checking Network Configuration
START
Print the current Internet Parameters List
Ask the customer for the Pre-Installation

Information form filled out by the Network
Administrator.
Verify this information with the Internet No
Parameters List that you just printed. Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.
Are the Internet Parameters entered
correctly into the unit?
Yes
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet
Mask as the unit
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following

command-line utility: ipconfig /all
Does the displayed Network configuration,

match the following settings of the unit
Internet Parameters ?
No
Default Gateway IP Address:
DNS Server IP Address: Ask the Network Administrator to
Subnet Mask: verify the proper information.
Yes
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following
command-line utility: "route print"
Does the current routing table for the No

Gateway match ?
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to correct
the routing table on that Gateway.
Does the Default Gateway respond to the No
"ping IP" command ?
Yes Check the power switch, cables and the
current settings of unit.
Does the DNS Server respond to the
No
"ping IP" command ?
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway and system status.
Does the unit respond to the No
"ping host name" command ?
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway and system status.
Does the unit respond to the No
"telnet" command ?
Yes Replace the SC PCB
Ask the Network Administrator to verify the

POP/SMTP account and system status.
146
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.5.2. Testing the TCP / IP Network
It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent
manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts.
In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance.
When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to
isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don't
work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then
you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring.
In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole
series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers.
As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by
checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s).
In our examples, we'll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for
troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are
Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee.
1. System Diagram Model

Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the
Network Administrator.
A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS
server is required.
Network Configuration
Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com Network D
PC Client
[210.232.71.18]
js2.labo.mgcs.com
WAN
SMTP/POP DNS
Server Server
sv2.labo.mgcs.com sv1.labo.mgcs.com
[192.168.1.2] [192.168.1.1]
Network A
[192.168.3.0] [192.168.3.254]
[192.168.1.253]
Router (R1)
Network B PC Client
"ping" [192.168.1.0] [192.168.1.4]
ec5.labo.mgcs.com
Hub
PC Client Panasonic Device Network C PC Client

[192.168.3.4] [192.168.3.5] [192.168.4.0] [192.168.4.1]
ec4.labo.mgcs.com ef1.labo.mgcs.com fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com
147
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2. Checking Current Configuration
Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration.
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the
following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP.
Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter
settings of the unit:
Default Gateway IP Address:

DNS Server IP Address:
Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid)
For Windows 98 / Me / 2000 / NT / XP

The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:
C:\>ipconfig /all
Windows NT IP Configuration
Host Name : ec4.labo.pcc.com
DNS Servers : 192.168.1.1
Node Type : Hybrid
NetBIOS Scope ID :
IP Routing Enabled. : No
WINS Proxy Enabled : No
NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS : No
Ethernet adapter IBMFE1 :

Description : IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter
Physical Address : 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8

DHCP Enabled : No
IP Address : 192.168.3.4
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway : 192.168.3.254
Primary WINS Server : 192.168.3.18
From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as
follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP
Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.pcc.com
(obtained from the Host Name).
3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity

The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client
(any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to
send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the
packet is echoed back (returned).
Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options
that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n
and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long.
-n count : The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four.
-w timeout : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.
148
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
PINGing the Unit
C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.pcc.com
Pinging ef1.labo.pcc.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253

PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address)

C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254
Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data:

PINGing the SMTP/POP Server
C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.pcc.com
Pinging sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data:

If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the
destination and the following output is displayed:
C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.pcc.com
Pinging fmrt7.labo.pcc.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.

Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
149
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
If the physical destination is far and it's connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option
command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response.
e.g.
-n 10 : The number of echo requests that the command should send.
-w 2000 : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.
C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.pcc.com -n 10 -w 2000
Pinging js2.labo.pcc.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data:

4. Tracing a Packet Route

Another useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to
reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each
particular router to reach the specified destination.
The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each
router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain
Name) is available, it will be displayed as well.
This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes:

a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you
know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the
communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point
where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with
an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out.
b. To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be
installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet
to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it
should be upgraded.
To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert <IP Address or Hostname>
Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server

C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.pcc.com
Tracing route to sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
over a maximum of 30 hops:
1 4 ms 2 ms 2 ms 192.168.3.254
2 4 ms 5 ms 5 ms sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
Trace complete.
150
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5. Managing Network Route Tables
In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join
the two segments needs to know only about these segments.
The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes:
Network Address Netmask Gateway Interface

192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.254 192.168.3.254
192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253 192.168.1.253
When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the
ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID
is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network.
IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table.
Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and
sends the packet to router R1.
The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the
router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through
the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took
only a single hop.
When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on
the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it
cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating
"destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator.
Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks,
and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and
clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables,
some are shown below:
• MASK
If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter.
• Netmask
If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it
defaults to 255.255.255.255.
• Gateway
Specifies the gateway.
• METRIC
Specifies the metric / cost for the destination.
All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS.
The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.
151
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is
properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route
print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:
C:\WINDOWS>route print
Active Routes:
Network Address Netmask Gateway Address Interface Metric

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.3.254 192.168.3.2 1
127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1
192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
192.168.3.2 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1
192.168.3.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
6. Host Name Query on DNS Server

Windows NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working properly.
This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me.
From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output:
C:\>nslookup
Default Server: sv1.labo.pcc.com
Address: 192.168.1.1
NS(Name Server) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t NS labo.pcc.com.
[sv1.labo.pcc.com.]
labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com
MX(Mail Exchange) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t MX labo.pcc.com
[sv1.labo.pcc.com]
labo.pcc.com. MX 10 sv2.labo.pcc.com
A (Address) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t A labo.pcc.com
[sv1.labo.pcc.com]
labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com
sv1 A 192.168.1.1
sv2 A 192.168.1.2
ec5 A 192.168.1.4
ec4 A 192.168.3.4
ef1 A 192.168.3.5
(To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.)
152
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command
TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb
terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works.
From Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP and SMTP
Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server.
For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then,
click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials
and click on the OK button.
Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System.
Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button.
For example,
C:\WINDOWS>telnet
telnet to ef1.labo.pcc.com[192.168.3.5]
220 ef1.labo.pcc.com DP18xx V.xx
helo
250 Hello
mail from:test
250 Sender OK
rcpt to:[email protected]
250 Receipient OK
data
354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF"
[Press the Enter Key]

Panasonic Internet Fax
test
test
250 OK, Mail accept
quit
221 Closing transaction channel
153
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.6. Error Codes (For Copier)

The self-diagnostic functions detect troubles in the important components of the copier.
When any trouble occurs, the copier stops.
4.6.1. User Error Codes (U Code)
U20
U22
U21
U90 U00
U18
U01
U13 / 14 / 15 / 16 / 25
U07
Note:
Uxx and a message will appear on the Panel Display.
User Error Codes (U Code) Table

Code Item Possible Cause(s)
U00 Key Counter 1. Card Key not installed.
2. Key Counter Harness disconnected.
3. Department Code not assigned.
U01 Close Front Cover 1. Front Cover / Side Cover open.
2. Front Cover / Side Cover Sensor disconnected.
3. Front Cover / Side Cover Sensor defective
4. PS connector disconnected.
5. PS defective.
6. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
7. SPC PCB defective.
U07 Close Feed Cover 1. Feed Cover open.
2. Feeder Unit incorrectly installed.
3. Feeder Unit connector disconnected.
4. Feeder Unit Sensor disconnected.
5. Feeder Unit Sensor defective.
7. PS defective.
8. CST2/CST3 PCB connector disconnected.
9. CST2/CST3 PCB defective.
154
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
User Error Codes (U Code) Table

Code Item Possible Cause(s)
U13 Add Toner 1. Toner Bottle incorrectly installed.
2. Low Toner.
3. Toner Sensor disconnected.
4. Toner Sensor defective.
U14 Replace Toner Waste 1. Toner Waste Container full.
Container (See Sect. 3.5.3.)
U15 No Toner Waste Container 1. Toner Waste Container not installed.
2. Toner Waste Container Sensor disconnected.
3. Toner Waste Container Sensor defective.
U16 No Developer Unit 1. Developer Unit not installed.
U18 Total Copy Limit Over 1. Department Copy Counter full.
U20 Close ADF Cover 1. ADF Cover open.
2. ADF not installed correctly.
3. ADF Cover Sensor disconnected.
4. ADF Cover Sensor defective.
6. PS defective.
U21 Close ADF 1. ADF and ADF Cover open.
2. ADF Sensor disconnected.
3. ADF Sensor defective.
U22 Close ADF Exit Cover 1. ADF Exit Cover open.
2. ADF not installed correctly.
3. ADF Exit Cover Sensor disconnected.
4. ADF Exit Cover Sensor defective.
6. PS defective.
U25 Shake Toner Bottle 1. Toner blocked in the Toner Bottle.
U90 Replace Battery 1. Internal battery requires replacement.
155
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.6.2. Jam Error Codes (J Code)
D2
D3
D4
Section Jam Location

A ADF / i-ADF / Scanner
B Paper Transport / Exit Area
C Paper Entry Area
D2 2nd Paper Feed Unit
D3 3rd Paper Feed Unit
D4 4th Paper Feed Unit
• Jam Sensor Location of i-ADF

Original Detection Sensor Original Length Sensor
Read Point
Sensor
Eject Sensor
Duplex Eject
Sensor
156
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
• Jam Sensor Location of ADF
Read Point and Eject Sensor Original Length Sensor
Original Detection Sensor
• Jam Sensor Location of Printer
Paper Exit Sensor
ADU Sensor
Registration Sensor
2nd Paper Path Sensor
3rd Paper Path Sensor
4th Paper Path Sensor
157
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
• Paper Transport / Exit / Entry / Feed Unit Area
Jam Error Codes (J Code) Table

Code Contents Section
J00 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the B
paper starts feeding. (Sheet Bypass)
J01 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the
Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (1st Feeder Unit)
J02 The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after D2
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (2nd Feeder Unit)
J03 The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after D3
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (3rd Feeder Unit)
J04 The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after D4
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (4th Feeder Unit)
J07 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the B, D2
2nd Paper Path Sensor is activated. (2nd Feeder Unit)
J08 The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after the D3
3rd Paper Path Sensor is activated. (3rd Feeder Unit)
J09 The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after the D4
4th Paper Path Sensor is activated. (4th Feeder Unit)
J12 The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the B, D2
Paper Path Sensor is activated.
J13 The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the D3
J14 The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the D4
J19 The Registration Sensor does not detect within a predetermined time after the ADU B
Sensor is activated.
J22 The 2nd Paper Path Sensor detect paper at the time of the initials. B, D2
J23 The 3rd Paper Path Sensor detect paper at the time of the initials. D2, D3
J24 The 4th Paper Path Sensor detect paper at the time of the initials. D3, D4
J30 The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor B
is activated. (Sheet Bypass)
J31 The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor
is activated. (Except Sheet Bypass)
J32 The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the ADU
Sensor is activated. (DP-1820E)
J33 The Registration Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode.
J45 The Paper Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time, during
non-printing mode.
J46 The Paper Exit Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor is
activated.
J48 The Paper Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the
Registration Sensor is activated.
J82 The ADU Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Duplex
Feed Roller starts rotating.
J85 The ADU Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor is
activated.
J87 The ADU Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode.
J95 The paper size of a Tray differs from the Machine setting size.
J98 The VRDY Signal is not ON after a predetermined time has lapsed.
158
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
• i-ADF / ADF Area
Jam Error Codes (J Code) Table

Code Contents Section
J70 The Read Point Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the A
original starts feeding.
J71 The Read Point Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after
scanning starts.
J72 The Eject Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Read A
Point Sensor is activated. (i-ADF
J73 1. The Eject Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after only)
scanning starts.
2. The Eject Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after the
Read Point Sensor is deactivated.
J76 The Duplex Eject Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after
scanning starts.
J78 The Duplex Eject Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after
2-Sided Scanning.
J79 The Read Point Sensor keeps detecting paper in the ADF. A
J92 The Read Point Sensor does not detect paper in the ADF.
J93 The paper remained in the ADF.
The ADF does not go off after the predetermined time.
J94 Unexpected Jam timing (i.e. Original is too short, Ledger / A3 size original is fed
without being recognized that the length is abnormal for a Fax Transmission, etc.)
159
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.6.3. Mechanical Error Codes (E Code)
E1: Optical Unit Error

Code Function Possible Cause(s)
E1- 01 Abnormal Platen Glass 1. Home Position Sensor connector disconnected.
Scanning 2. Home Position Sensor defective.
3. Scanner Motor connector disconnected.
4. Scanner Motor defective.
5. Scanning Mechanism defective.
8. PS defective.
E1- 20 Laser Unit Horizontal 1. LSU connector disconnected.
Synchronization 2. LSU defective.
E1- 22 Polygon Motor Synchronization 1. Polygon Motor connector disconnected.
3. LSU connector disconnected.
4. Polygon Motor defective.
5. PS defective.
E1- 31 Scanning Lamp 1. INV PCB connector disconnected.
(Does not turn On) 2. INV PCB defective.
3. Scanning Lamp defective.
5. PS defective.
E2: Lift DC Motor Error

E2- 01 Lift Motor Rotation 1. Level Sensor connector disconnected.
(1st Paper Tray) 2. Level Sensor defective.
3. Lift Mechanism defective.
4. Lift Motor connector disconnected.
5. Lift Motor defective.
8. PS defective.
E2- 02 Lift Motor Rotation 1. Level Sensor connector disconnected.
(2nd Paper Tray) 2. Level Sensor defective.
3. Lift Mechanism defective.
E2- 03 Lift Motor Rotation 4. Lift Motor connector disconnected.
(3rd Paper Tray) 5. Lift Motor defective.
E2- 04 Lift Motor Rotation 7. SPC PCB defective.
(4th Paper Tray) 8. CST2 PCB connector disconnected.
9. CST2 PCB defective.
10. CST3 PCB connector disconnected.
12. PS defective.
160
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
E2: Lift DC Motor Error

E2- 10 System Console Drive Motor 1. Drive Mechanism defective.
Rotation 2. Drive Motor connector disconnected.
3. Drive Motor defective.
8. PS defective.
E3: Development System Error

E3- 01 Toner Bottle Motor Rotation 1. Toner Bottle Motor connector disconnected.
2. Toner Bottle Motor defective.
3. Toner Bottle Motor Drive Mechanism defective.
4. Toner Bottle installed incorrectly.
7. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor connector
disconnected.
8. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor defective.
E3- 02 Toner Screw Motor Over 1. Toner Screw Motor defective.
Current 2. Toner Screw Motor Drive Mechanism defective.
E3- 03 Toner Density Sensor Gain 1. Sensor connector disconnected.
2. Sensor defective.
E3- 10 High Voltage Power Supply 1. PS connector disconnected.
leak (1) - Grid Charge Voltage 2. PS defective.
5. Corona Wire is abnormal. (Check for: contamination
with foreign particles, broken, not installed in the
proper position or loose tension)
E3- 20 Main Motor Rotation 1. Drive Mechanism defective.
2. Main Motor connector disconnected.
3. Main Motor defective.
6. PS defective.
161
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
E4: Fuser Unit Error

E4- 01 Fuser Warm-up Temperature 1. Fuser Thermistor dirty.
2. Thermistor position incorrect.
3. Thermistor defective.
4. Thermistor connector disconnected.
5. Fuser Lamp connector disconnected.
6. Fuser Lamp defective.
7. Fuser Thermostat defective.
8. Thermal Fuse defective.
11. Fuser temperature low. (Adjust F6-31)
E4- 02 Fuser Paper Jam 1. Paper Jam in Fuser Unit.
2. Paper Exit Sensor disconnected.
3. Paper Exit Sensor defective.
E4- 10 Fuser Fan Motor Rotation 1. Fuser Fan connector disconnected.
2. Fuser Fan defective.
5. PS defective.
E5: System Error

E5- 11 Printer Engine Communication 1. SPC PCB connector disconnected.
Abnormal 2. SPC PCB defective.
E5- 17 Scanner Synchronization 3. SC PCB connector disconnected.
E5- 19 Scanner Line Synchronization 4. SC PCB defective.
E5- 40 Sort Memory Abnormal 1. Sort Memory defective.
2. SC PCB connector disconnected.
3. SC PCB defective.
E5- 42 Total Counter Connection 1. Total Counter connector disconnected.
2. Total Counter defective.
E5- 60 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1. Cooling Fan connector disconnected.
Motor Rotation 2. Cooling Fan defective.
5. PS defective.
E7: Optional Unit Error

Code Function Check Points
E7- 90 Hard Key Abnormal 1. Wrong Hand Key installed.
2. Hard Key defective.
162
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
E13: Out of Toner

E13 No Toner Detection 1. Out of Toner.
2. Toner Bottle not installed.
3. Toner Bottle not installed correctly.
4. Toner Sensor disconnected.
5. Toner Sensor defective.
4.6.4. Technician Warning

The following message will be displayed in the event.
LCD Message Possible Cause(s)

1. Additional Sort memory is not installed.
• DA-SM16 (16 MB)
HDD OPTION REQURIES
• DA-SM64 (64 MB)
ADDITIONAL SORT MEM
• DA-SM28 (128 MB)
2. Make sure the SDRM PC Board was installed properly.
1. Incorrect SC PCB is installed.
• SC PCB for DP-1520P
MACHINE ID ERROR
• SC PCB for DP-1820P
• SC PCB for DP-1820E
163
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.7. Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)
Fax Information Codes

Code Mode Phase Description of Problem Possible Cause(s)
012 RCV C, D The length of the received
document is over 2 m.
030 XMT B Read Point Sensor does not Document not set properly.
activate within 4 seconds after the Defective Read Point Sensor.
document starts feeding.
031 XMT C Transmitting document was longer Document may be jammed.
COPY than 2,000 mm (78.7 in). Defective Read Point Sensor.
(Super Fine: 1,000 mm (39.4 in),
600 dpi: 430 mm (16.2 in))
061 - A ADF Door is open. Cover not firmly closed.
Connectors not firmly connected.
200 RCV C Decoding process did not Defective FXB PCB.
complete at the end of phase C.
212 XMT A-E Interface error occurred between Modem defective. (FXB PCB)
RCV the CPU and modem. Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)
301 XMT System fault. Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)
RCV
331 XMT C 8-minutes timer error.
(Germany only)
400 XMT B T1 timer (35±5 sec) elapsed Wrong number dialed and the START
without detecting 300 bps signal. button was pushed.
Telephone line disconnected while
dialing.
FXB PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB
defective.
Receiver defective. (It may only be
transmitting CED)
401 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver Your machine's ID Number is not
while transmitter is waiting for CFR programmed.
or FTT. Possible incompatibility or incorrect
Password (Password Reception,
Selective Receive).
Mailbox full.
402 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver Receiver working in non-CCITT mode
while transmitter is waiting for only. (Possible incompatibility)
NSF/DIS.
403 RCV B Transmitter had no polling "POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) not
(Polling) function. set at the transmitter.
Document to be transmitted not placed
at the transmitter.
404 XMT B Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS) Receiver defective. (Modem, MJR PCB,
followed by TCF three times, but etc.)
the receiver did not respond. (CFR FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
or FTT is usually returned) Receiver disconnects line during first
NSS (or DCS) transmitted.
164
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

405 XMT B Transmitter received FTT after it Line quality poor. (TCF is damaged due
transmitted TCF at 2400 bps. to line noise)
Received RTN after Receiver defective. (Modem, MJR PCB,
communicating at 2400 bps. etc.)
FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
406 RCV B XMT-Password mismatched. RCV- XMT, RCV password does not match.
(Password Password mismatched. Selective Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with
Comm.) RCV incomplete. the last 4 digits of Auto Dial telephone
number.
407 XMT D Transmitter received no response Receiver defective. (No paper, paper
after it transmitted post message, jamming, etc.)
such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or Receiver ceased receiving because of
received DCN. excessive errors. (Line quality poor)
FXB PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB
defective.
408 XMT D Transmitter received RTN after it Receiver receives data with errors.
transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM. (Line quality poor)
Receiver defective. (Modem, MJR PCB,
etc.)
409 XMT D Transmitter receives PIN after it Receiver receives data with error due to
transmitted a post message, such poor line quality, and receiving operator
as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc. requests voice contact.
Receiver defective. (Modem, MJR PCB,
etc.)
410 RCV D Received DCN while waiting for Interface or line faulty.
post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, Transmitter defective.
etc.)
411 RCV B Received DCN after transmitting Transmitter not ready for polling
(Polling) NSC. communication.
Password does not match between
transmitter and receiver.
412 G3 RX B, D No response within 12 seconds in Transmitter defective.
NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After FXB PCB defective.
transmitting FTT)
414 RCV B No response received after Password does not match between
(Polling) transmitting 3rd NSC. transmitter and receiver.
Transmitter defective. (No original,
document jam, etc.)
415 XMT B Remote side attempted to receive Inform the remote side that your
(Polling) message from your machine in machine does not have the polling
polling communication. transmission feature.
416 RCV D Receiver did not detect post Transmitter defective.
command, such as EOP, MPS, Line quality poor. (RTC signal distorted
EOM, etc. due to line noise)
417 RCV C Receiver returned RTN in Line quality poor. (There are excessive
response to post message. errors in received data)
165
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

418 RCV C Receiver transmitted PIN in Line quality poor. (There are excessive
response to PRI-Q from errors in received data)
transmitter. (Transmitting operator FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
requests voice contact)
420 RCV B T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without Wrong number dialed.
detecting 300 bps signal. (Non-facsimile communication)
Transmitter defective.
421 RCV B Busy Tone was detected after Remote station disconnected the line.
sending NSF Signal. Wrong number was dialed.
422 XMT B Content of NSF (or DIS) or NSC Incompatible content
(or DTC) was invalid.
427 G3 B DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS Interface is incompatible.
RCV transmitted.
433 XMT B, D T.30 Protocol abnormal. Defective remote station.
RCV
434 XMT or RCV B CD (response from Modem) did Remote unit defective.
not turn OFF within 180 sec. after FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
receiver detected FLAG signal.
436 G3 RX C DCN received after transmitting Transmitter defective or incompatible.
FTT. Line quality poor.
456 RCV B Received relay transfer request or
confidential document to distribute
to an end receiving station or all
confidential mailboxes are used.
457 RELAY XMT B Remote unit does not have
CONF. XMT/ Relayed XMT or Confidential
POLL Comm. capability.
459 RCV C Failed training in Phase C. Line quality poor. (Training signal
distorted due to line noise)
490 RCV C Sum of error lines exceeded the Line quality poor.
limit (Function Parameter No. 70) FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
of 64 lines.
494 RCV C Interval between two EOLs was Transmitter defective.
more than 10 sec. when receiver Line quality poor. (EOL damaged due to
received message data. line noise)
495 XMT C During reception, CD turned OFF Line disconnected.
RCV or continued ON for long time. Transmitter defective.
During communication, lost loop - FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
current.
496 XMT C CS of modem is not able to turn FXB PCB defective.
ON.
501 XMT/ B Incompatible Modem on the
RCV(V.34) Remote unit.
502 XMT/ B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF Line disconnected.
RCV(V.34) or continued ON for long time. Transmitter defective.
During communication, lost loop - FXB PCB or MJR PCB defective.
current.
166
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

503 XMT/ B, C, D CS of modem is not able to turn FXB PCB defective.
RCV(V.34) ON during training. Line disconnected.
504 RCV/V.34 B Polling is rejected from the remote No polling original set.
(Polling) station.
505 XMT/V.34 B Polling XMT is rejected. No polling original set.
(Polling)
540 XMT ECM B No response after transmitting 3rd Incompatible interface.
CTC or DCN received.
541 XMT ECM D No response after transmitting 3rd Faulty line.
EOR or received DCN. MJR PCB abnormal.
542 XMT ECM D No response to the 3rd RR Remote unit abnormal.
transmitted or received DCN.
543 XMT ECM D T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without Remote unit abnormal.
MCF.
544 XMT ECM D Stopped Transmission after EOR Faulty line.
Transmission. MJR PCB abnormal.
550 RCV ECM C Timer between frames in phase C Defective remote station.
has elapsed.
554 RCV ECM D Transmitted ERR after receiving Faulty line.
EOR.
555 RCV ECM D Transmitted PIN after receiving Faulty line and Operator Call requested
EOR. by RX side.
570 RCV B Password or machine code did not
match during remote diagnostic
communication.
571 XMT B Remote unit did not have the
remote diagnostic function.
580 XMT B Sub-address transmission to a unit Sub-address transmission to a unit that
that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit has no Sub-address function.
155) OFF.
581 XMT B Sub-address Password Sub-address transmission to a unit that
transmission to a unit that has their has no Sub-address function.
DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF.
582 XMT B Sub-address SEP (for Polling) Sub-address transmission to a unit that
transmission to a unit that has their has no Sub-address function.
DIS bit 47 (NSF bit 130) OFF.
601 XMT ADF Door was opened during ADF
transmission.
623 XMT A No original was in the ADF. (Built- Operator removed the original from the
in dialer engaged) ADF after dialing was completed.
Original was not set properly in the ADF.
630 XMT or RCV B Redial count over. No dial tone detected. Sensor did not
(Polling) detect dial tone. (Country dependent)
Busy tone is detected. (Country
dependent) T1 timer (35±5 sec) elapsed
without a signal from the receiver.
631 XMT A "STOP" key was pressed during
Auto Dialing.
167
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

634 XMT PSTN Redial count over with no
response or busy tone was not
detected.
Note:
U.S.A. and Canadian models
will redial only once if a busy
tone is not detected.
638 XMT PSTN Power turned Off with applicable Power switched Off.
LAN data in memory or during Power failure occurred.
communication.
712 XMT LAN Unknown email address replied Mail Server received an incorrect email
from the Mail Server. address. (Dependent on Server's Mail
application)
714 XMT LAN LAN Interface error. The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable not
RCV Cannot logon to the LAN. connected.
An unexpected LAN problem occurred.
715 XMT LAN TCP/IP connection timed out. Incorrect IP Address set.
Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP
Address, SMTP Server IP Address.
716 XMT LAN Cannot logon to the LAN. Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address set.
No email application activated on the
Mail Server.
717 XMT LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol Mail Server’s hard disk may be full.
transmission. Mail Server defective.
718 XMT LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred Check the document size and
while receiving printing data. The resolution.
paper size selected within your Ask originator to resend in a supported
application to print is larger than size and resolution.
the paper size loaded in the paper
tray(s).
719 RCV LAN Received data via LAN is in a Ask the originator to resend with a
format that is not supported. supported file attachment:
* In a TIFF-F format.
* Image data conforming to A4/Letter
size.
720 POP LAN Unable to connect to the POP Incorrect POP Server address set.
Server. POP Server is down.
721 POP LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name or Password set.
722 RCV LAN Failed to obtain the Network DHCP not available.
Parameters (such as: IP Address, (Contact the Network Administrator.)
Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP
Address, etc.) from the DHCP
server.
725 XMT LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address set.
POP DNS Server is down.
726 XMT LAN Received an error response from Incorrect POP Server address set.
POP the DNS Server. Incorrect SMTP Server address set.
729 XMT LAN Failed to authenticate (SMTP SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name
AUTHENTICATION) when and/or Password are incorrect.
connecting with the SMTP server. (Contact the Network Administrator.)
168
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

730 RCV LAN Unable to program the Internet Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is
parameters or the autodialer via set to Valid.
Email from a PC.
731 RCV LAN Dialer full while Relayed Dial buffer for manual number dialing
Transmission Request was (70 stations) is being used.
received.
741 XMT, Polling PSTN Unable to dial Deleted the registered station name
before dialing with Timer Controlled
Communications, etc.
800 Relay PSTN The machine was requested to
Comm. relay a document but has no Relay
Hub capability.
814 Conf. XMT PSTN The remote station does not have
Conf. Polling Relay XMT nor Confidential
Relay Communication capability.
Comm.
815 Conf. RCV PSTN Mailbox full.
816 Conf. Polled PSTN The received Polling Password did
not match.
825 Conf. RCV PSTN Parameter settings of the remote
Conf. Polled station are not properly set.
870 MEM XMT PSTN Memory overflow occurred while
Multi-Copy LAN storing documents into memory.
879 Memory PSTN Memory overflow occurred during Memory overflow on the Fax side.
RCV substitute memory reception.
LAN Memory overflow. Memory overflow on the Fax side.
Mail Server sent a reset command Mail server aborted the download (Busy
while downloading the data to the with other higher priority jobs).
machine.
880 - - File Access Error.
884 - - File Access Error.
961 RCV LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB defective.
962 XMT PSTN Memory file access error. SC PCB defective.
LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB defective.
169
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.8. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile)

The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service engineer to analyze how the communication was
performed. The code is recorded on the Journal.
Journal Example
************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********
NO. COMM. PAGES FILE DURATION X/R IDENTIFICATION DATE TIME DIAGNOSTIC
01 OK 001 129 00:00'42 XMT 123 456 789 MMM-dd 01:55 C8649003C0000
1st digit 13th digit
- PANASONIC MACHINE
****************************** - PANASONIC MACHINE- ***** -12345678901234567890- *******
1st Digit: Manufacturer Code

-: Not used/defined
Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data Manufacturer
Code
0 -
1 Casio
2 Canon
3 Sanyo
4 Sharp
5 Tamura
6 Toshiba
7 NEC
8 Oki
9 Hitachi
A Xerox
B Fujitsu
C Matsushita
D Mitsubishi
E Murata
F Ricoh
170
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2nd Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
ID (TSI, CSI, CIG) RTN DCN STOP Button
0 - - - -
1 Received - - -
2 - Received - -
3 Received Received - -
4 - - Received -
5 Received - Received -
6 - Received Received -
7 Received Received Received -
8 - - - Pressed
9 Received - - Pressed
A - Received - Pressed
B Received Received - Pressed
C - - Received Pressed
D Received - Received Pressed
E - Received Received Pressed
F Received Received Received Pressed
3rd Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
Resolution (dpi) Paper Width
0 - A4
1 S-Fine A4
2 400 x 400 A4
3 300 x 300 A4
4 - B4
5 S-Fine B4
6 400 x 400 B4
7 300 x 300 B4
8 600 x 600 A4
9 600 x 600 B4
A - -
B 600 x 600 A3
C - A3
D S-Fine A3
E 400 x 400 A3
F 300 x 300 A3
171
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
Scanning Rate Resolution
0 20 ms/line Std
1 5 ms/line Std
2 10 ms/line Std
3 - Std
4 40 ms/line Std
5 - Std
6 - Std
7 0 ms/line Std
8 20 ms/line Fine
9 5 ms/line Fine
A 10 ms/line Fine
B - Fine
C 40 ms/line Fine
D - Fine
E - Fine
F 0 ms/line Fine
5th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Memory/
Deferred Comm. Dialing/RCV
Non-Memory
0 - Manual Non-Memory
Communication
1 Used Manual Non-Memory
Communication
2 - Auto Dialing Non-Memory
3 Used Auto Dialing Non-Memory
4 - Auto RCV Non-Memory
5 Used Auto RCV Non-Memory
6 - Remote RCV Non-Memory
7 Used Remote RCV Non-Memory
8 - Manual Memory
Communication
9 Used Manual Memory
Communication
A - Auto Dialing Memory
B Used Auto Dialing Memory
C - Auto RCV Memory
D Used Auto RCV Memory
E - Remote RCV Memory
F Used Remote RCV Memory
172
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Password
Polling XMT/RCV Selective Comm.
Comm.
0 - RCV Off Off
1 Yes RCV Off Off
2 - XMT Off Off
3 Yes XMT Off Off
4 - RCV On Off
5 Yes RCV On Off
6 - XMT On Off
7 Yes XMT On Off
8 - RCV Off On
9 Yes RCV Off On
A - XMT Off On
B Yes XMT Off On
C - RCV On On
D Yes RCV On On
E - XMT On On
F Yes XMT On On
7th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Sub-Address Confidential Turnaround
Relayed Comm.
Comm. Comm. Polling
0 - - - -
1 Yes - - -
2 - Yes - -
3 Yes Yes - -
4 - - Yes -
5 Yes - Yes -
6 - Yes Yes -
7 Yes Yes Yes -
8 - - - Yes
9 Yes - - Yes
A - Yes - Yes
B Yes Yes - Yes
C - - Yes Yes
D Yes - Yes Yes
E - Yes Yes Yes
F Yes Yes Yes Yes
173
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Advanced Cover Sheet
Comm. XMT
0 - -
1 Report XMT -
2 Check & Call -
3 - -
4 Memory Transfer -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 - Yes
9 Report XMT Yes
A Check & Call Yes
B - Yes
C Memory Transfer Yes
D - Yes
E - Yes
F - Yes
9th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Standard/ Non-
Short Protocol
Standard
0 - Standard
1 - Standard
2 - Standard
3 - Standard
4 - Standard
5 - Standard
6 - Standard
7 - Standard
8 - Non-Standard
9 B Non-Standard
A - Non-Standard
B D Non-Standard
C - Non-Standard
D B Non-Standard
E - Non-Standard
F D Non-Standard
174
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
10th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
Coding ECM
0 MH -
1 MR -
2 MMR -
3 JBIG -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 MH Yes
9 MR Yes
A MMR Yes
B JBIG Yes
C - Yes
D - Yes
E - Yes
F - Yes
11th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Symbol Rate
V.34
(V.34)
0 - -
1 - -
2 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 2400 sr Yes
9 - Yes
A 2800 sr Yes
B 3000 sr Yes
C 3200 sr Yes
D 3429 sr Yes
E - Yes
F - Yes
175
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
12th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Modem Speed
Modem Speed
(V.34)
0 2400 bps -
1 4800 bps 2400 bps
2 7200 bps 4800 bps
3 9600 bps 7200 bps
4 TC 7200 bps 9600 bps
5 TC 9600 bps 12000 bps
6 12000 bps 14400 bps
7 14400 bps 16800 bps
8 - 19200 bps
9 - 21600 bps
A - 24000 bps
B - 26400 bps
C - 28800 bps
D - 31200 bps
E - 33600 bps
F - -
13th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
176
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.9. Troubleshooting (For Printer)

4.9.1. Checking the Basics
This section explains how to solve problems including error messages or unexpected printing results.
If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected, and if you are not sure
what to do, start your troubleshooting by checking the basics below:
• Ensure that the Ethernet LAN (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) Cable is connected properly
• Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct
• Ensure that the Unit is turned On
• Ensure that the Paper is set properly in the Unit
• No error message is displayed on the Unit
• Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box
4.9.2. Document Does Not Print Properly
Problem Possible Solution(s)

Character is not printing in the • Check and specify the paper size and orientation settings in the printer
correct positions or the driver to coincide with the application.
characters near the edges of the • Check if the specified paper is loaded in the Panasonic Device.
page are missing. • Increase the Page Margins in the application. The Panasonic Device
requires minimum margins of ¼ inches (5 mm) on all sides.
The font type is incorrect • Check if the selected font is installed in the PC.
• Check if the selected font is being replaced with a proper printer font in
the Font Substitution Table of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
• Select ”Always use True Type fonts” from the Font tab of the Printer
Driver Properties dialog box.
The character is not smooth. • Select an outline font instead of a bit map font.
Fine line print cannot be • Select 600 dpi resolution.
obtained.
Poor photograph print quality. • Select 600 dpi resolution.
Different character or symbol • Check if the Panasonic Printing System (PCL) printer driver is selected.
from the document is printed.
The printer does not print • Insufficient Printer Page Memory in the Panasonic Device, install an
anything or prints irregular Expansion D-RAM Card or change the resolution to 300 dpi in the
images from the middle of the Quality tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
1st page.
Printing is exceedingly slow. • Select the Spool settings "Start printing after first page is spooled "
from the Details tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
• Select 300 dpi resolution.
177
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
4.9.3. Error Message Appears on the PC
Error Message Possible Solution(s)
Network Print DLL Error. • Check if the Panasonic Device is turned "On" and the 10Base-T/
100Base-TX cable is properly connected.
• Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured. (i.e. Printer Port)
Network Port is Busy. • The Panasonic Device may be processing someone’s print job,
please wait and try again later.
• The Panasonic Device is either Transmitting or Receiving an email.
Cannot print because an error is • Verify and specify the paper size or orientation to coincide with the
found in the current printer application and the printer driver settings.
setting.
4.9.4. Error Message Appears on the Unit

Error Message Possible Solution(s)
Cannot complete print job • The available Sort Memory in the Panasonic Device may not be
Image memory overflow enough.
Either install an optional Sort Memory or change the
resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
Cannot complete • The print settings may not be matched for the system.
Confirm print condition Change the printing settings in the Printer Driver Properties
dialog box.
i.e. Multi-sized printing.
Cannot print • Change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver properties
System error dialog box.
4.9.5. System Error (CD Drive Related Error During Installation)

Problem Possible Solution(s)
Cannot read the drive. • Insert the CD into the drive and click “Retry”.
178
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5 Service Modes
5.1. Service Modes (For Copier)
These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier and a
means of making adjustments to the Input/Output of major components.
5.1.1. Service Mode Procedure
1. To select the Service Mode

The service mode is selected when “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE” and “3” keys are sequentially
pressed, then F1 will appear in the display.
2. To exit the Service Mode

The service mode is reset when the “FUNCTION” and “CLEAR” keys are pressed simultaneously.
5.1.2. Copier Service Mode Functions
Service Modes (For Copier)

Service
Item Function
Mode
F1 Self Test 00 CCD Test This test is used for checking the CCD.
01 LCD/LED Test This test is used for checking the LCD
and LEDs.
02 Page Memory Test This test is used for checking the Page
Memory.
03 Print Test Pattern 1 Prints the pattern for setting the Paper
position alignment.
04 Print Test Pattern 2 Prints the Slant pattern for setting the
Paper position alignment.
05 Print Test Pattern 3 Prints the Grid pattern for setting the
06 Print Test Pattern 4 Prints the pattern for setting the Duplex
F2 Single Copy Test One sheet is copied when the Start key
is pressed.
F3 Continuous Copy Test Multi copies are made when the Start
key is pressed.
F4 Input / Output Status Test The functioning of Input / Output items
(selected item numbers) is checked.
F5 Function Parameters Various function settings (selected by
code numbers) can be changed.
F6 Adjust Parameters Various function settings (selected by
code numbers) can be adjusted.
F7 Electronic Counter Electronic Counters for Maintenance
F8 Service Adjustment Perform pseudo-operation of an item
(selected by code numbers)
F9 Unit Maintenance Fax Service Mode
Service Alert Tel #
Firmware Version
Print Device Info.
179
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F5 / F6 Information List (Sample)
**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
F5-00 . . . . . F5-50 Auto contrast adj. Yes

F5-01 Frequency desired 60Hz F5-51 Dept. Counter (COPY) Yes
F5-02 . . . . . F5-52 Dept. Counter (FAX) No
F5-03 LSU startup speed Full F5-53 2-sided auto shift No
F5-04 LSU off timer 15 Sec. F5-54 Margin reduction No
F5-05 . . . . . F5-55 Margin value default 10mm
F5-06 . . . . . F5-56 Edge value default 5mm
F5-07 . . . . . F5-57 Book value default 20mm
F5-08 . . . . . F5-58 U14 Clear Any Keys
F5-09 Fuser lamp control Auto F5-59 Oper.add toner alarm Stop
F5-10 . . . . . F5-60 Auto Tray selection Yes

F5-11 . . . . . F5-61 TDC Adj.(Dev Cond.) Yes
F5-12 Printer fan extension 5 min F5-62 TDC Adj.(Dev Life) Yes
F5-13 . . . . . F5-63 U13 clear Any keys
F5-14 Paper size (tray1) LETTER F5-64 Dept. Counter (SCAN) Yes
F5-15 Paper size (tray2) LEDGER F5-65 Dept. Counter (PRINT) Yes
F5-16 Paper size (tray3) LEDGER F5-66 . . . . .
F5-17 Paper size (tray4) LEDGER F5-67 . . . . .
F5-18 . . . . . F5-68 . . . . .
F5-19 T Corona Current Adj No F5-69 Reduce N in 1 space No
F5-20 ADF Auto F5-70 PM cycle 120k
**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.02
F6-00 Adj 100% Read (S/S) 0 F6-50 T/P Mode Image Density 0
F6-01 Adj 100% Read (L/T) 0 F6-51 Photo Image Density 0
F6-02 100% Selection 0 F6-52 . . . . .
F6-03 Orig. Registration 0 F6-53 CCD Read Position 0
F6-04 Printer Registration 0 F6-54 Text Mode Contrast 0
F6-05 Main Motor Speed 0 F6-55 T/P Mode Contrast 0
F6-06 Polygon Motor Speed 0 F6-56 Photo Mode Contrast 0
F6-07 Registration Void 6 F6-57 . . . . .
F6-08 Trail Edge Read Tim. 0 F6-58 Corona Charger Curr. 0
F6-09 Trail Edge Prt Tim. -6 F6-59 Trail Edge(Trays) 0
F6-10 Side Adjust (Bypass) 0 F6-60 Trail Edge(Bypass) 0

F6-11 Side Adjust (Tray 1) 0 F6-61 Trail Edge(2-Side) 0
F6-12 Side Adjust (Tray 2) 0 F6-62 TDC Gain Voltage Adj 0
F6-13 Side Adjust (Tray 3) 0 F6-63 Lead Edge Read Tim. 0
F6-14 Side Adjust (Tray 4) 0 F6-64 Side Edge Read Adj. 0
F6-15 . . . . . F6-65 Trans Side1(S-Wide) 0
F6-16 Side Adjust (ADU) 0 F6-66 Trans Side2(S-Wide) 0
F6-17 Std Grid Voltage 0 F6-67 ADF Image Density 0
F6-18 Standard Laser Power 0 F6-68 . . . . .
F6-19 Bias Std Voltage 0 F6-69 Stamp Position Adj. 0
F6-20 . . . . . F6-70 . . . . .
F6-21 TDC Gain Voltage 0 F6-71 ADF Read Scan Pos. 0
F6-22 . . . . . F6-72 Original Lead ADF:S 0
180
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Machine Setup Information List (Sample)

**********- MACHINE SETUP INFORMATION -****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
1.MACHINE INFORMATION
MACHINE NAME : DP-1820E
MAC ADDRESS : 080023006FA1
SERIAL NUMBER :
2.FIRMWARE VERSION
SC : AAT001xxPU
SC BOOT : LL-NEW
PNL :
SPC :
FAX MODEM :
PDL FONT1 :
SC2 :
3.MEMORY CAPACITY
PAGE MEMORY : 32 MB
SORT MEMORY : 16 MB
FAX MEMORY : 2 MB
4.OPTION
DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF) : ADF
2nd PAPER FEED MODULE : Yes
3rd PAPER FEED MODULE : Yes
4th PAPER FEED MODULE : Yes
ADF DUPLEX SCANNING : Yes
FAX BOARD : Yes
NETWORK SCANNER : No
PCL PRINTER : No
PS PRINTER : No
EMAIL : Yes
HDD : No
KEYBOARD : Yes
5.ERROR LOG
TOTAL PRINT COUNT : 2082
NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:11 J27 XX-00000008
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:31 J41 XX-00000140
(See Remarks)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-PANASONIC -
****************************** -PANASONIC - ***** - 0001- ********
Remarks:
XX-00000140
Page Count
00 : Printer Error
02 : Scanner Error
181
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F7 Total Counter List (Sample)
**********-F7 TOTAL COUNTER LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
F7-01 Key Operator ID Code : 000
F7-02 Total Count : 295

F7-03 PM Count : 295
F7-04 Scanner PM Count : 61
F7-05 . . . . . :
F7-06 OPC Drum Count : 295
F7-07 Process Unit Count : 295
F7-08 ADF/i-ADF PM Count : 50
F7-09 . . . . . :
F7-10 Developer Count : 295
F7-11 Sheet Bypass Count : 147

F7-12 1st Paper Tray Count : 90
F7-13 2nd Paper Tray Count : 0
F7-14 3rd Paper Tray Count : 0
F7-15 4th Paper Tray Count : 0
F7-16 2-Sided Count : 28
F7-29 A4/LETTER Count : 284
F7-30 A4-R/LETTER-R Count : 73
F7-31 A3/LEDGER Count : 19
F7-32 B4/LEGAL Count : 0
F7-17 ADF/i-ADF Count : 26

F7-18 ADF/i-ADF Read Count : 26
F7-19 Scanner Count : 61
F7-20 Scanner Read Count : 18
182
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.1.3. F4 Mode: Input/Output Status Test
Set the machine to service mode and press "4" key on the Keypad.
↓
Press the "START" key.
↓
Enter the number to activate the test then press "START" key.
↓
Press "STOP" key to cancel the test.
↓
When the “CLEAR” key is pressed, the selected code input will not be accepted.
↓
Press “FUNCTION” and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
1. Check Input
F4 Mode (Check Input)

Message Display
No. Function Condition Remarks
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
000 Toner Screw Motor Over Over Current is 1
Current detected.
Power Supply Fan Signal Normal. 0
003 Paper Feed Module Unit is connected. 0
Detection Sensor
(2nd Paper Feed Module)
Paper Tray Detection Paper Tray is not 0
Sensor connected.
(2nd Paper Tray)
Sensor connected.
(1st Paper Tray)
NP Sensor Paper is not detected. 1
(Sheet Bypass)
Paper Length Sensor Sensor is activated. 1
(Sheet Bypass)
Size Sensor (PC1) Sensor is activated. 1
(Sheet Bypass)
Size Sensor (PC2) Sensor is activated. 1
(Sheet Bypass)
183
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
004 Size Sensor (PC3) Paper is not detected. 0
(Sheet Bypass)
ADU Detection Sensor Unit is connected. 0
JAM Access Cover Open Cover is open. 0
Detection Sensor
(2nd Paper Feed Module)
Upper Limit Sensor Upper Limit is detected. 1
(2nd Paper Tray)
(1st Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
(1st Paper Tray)
005 Total Counter Detection Counter is not detected. 1
Sensor
Polygon Motor Lock Signal Normal. 0
Main Motor Lock Signal Normal. 0
Fuser Fan Lock Signal Normal. 0
Toner Waste Container Toner Waste Container 0
Detection Sensor is detected.
Toner Waste Container Full Toner Waste Container 1
Detection Sensor is full.
Toner Bottle Motor Lock 0
Rotation Detection Sensor
006 ADU Paper Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Fuser Exit Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Registration Sensor Paper is detected. 0
(2nd Paper Tray)
008 Front / Left Cover Open See Remarks. * Front / Left Cover is
Sensor 1 closed.
Signal 1 = 0
Signal 2 = 0
Right Cover is open.
Signal 1 = 1
Signal 2 = 1
Developer Unit Detecting Unit is connected. 1
Sensor
184
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
009 JAM Access Cover Open Cover is open. 0
Detection Sensor
(4th Paper Feed Module)
Sensor connected.
(4th Paper Tray)
(4th Paper Tray)
Paper Feed Module Unit is connected. 0
Detection Sensor
(4th Paper Feed Module)
Feed Motor Lock Signal Normal. 0
(3rd Paper Tray)
Paper Feed Module See Remarks. * Unit is connected.
Detection Sensor 2 Signal 1 = 1
(3rd Paper Feed Module) Signal 2 = 0
A different signal
Paper Feed Module See Remarks. * pattern, indicates that
Detection Sensor 1 the unit is not
(3rd Paper Feed Module) connected, or CST 3
PCB is defective.
010 Registration Sensor Paper is detected. 0
(3rd Paper Tray)
JAM Access Cover Open Cover is open. 0
Detection Sensor
(3rd Paper Tray)
Paper Tray Detection Paper Tray is 1
Sensor connected.
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
(4th Paper Tray)
(4th Paper Tray)
011 Corona Leak Detection Leak 0
185
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
020 Size Sensor C Original detected on the 1 Z
(Not Used) C position.

Y Platen
Size Sensor B Original detected on the -
(Not Used) B position. X
C B A
Size Sensor A Original detected on the 1
Front Side
(Not Used) A position.
Size Sensor Z Original detected on the 1
(Not Used) Z position.
Size Sensor Y Original detected on the 1
(Not Used) Y position.
Size Sensor X Original detected on the 1
(Not Used) X position.
021 Home Position Sensor Home position is 1
detected.
ADF/Platen Cover Open ADF/Platen Cover is 1
Sensor open.
ADF/Platen Cover Angle ADF/Platen Cover is 1
Sensor open more than 30°
angle.
Fuser Lamp Disconnect No Lighting -
Detection Sensor
+24V Line Error Detecting +24V Line is ON. -
Signal
030 ADF B1 Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF B2 Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF Paper Exit Detection Original is detected. 1
Sensor
ADF Inverting Cover Open Cover is open. 1
Detection Sensor
ADF Cover Open Cover is open. 1
Detection Sensor
ADF Detection Sensor 1 See Remarks. * iADF
Signal 1 = 1
Signal 2 = 1
ADF
Signal 1 = 1
ADF Detection Sensor 2 See Remarks. * Signal 2 = 0
A different signal
pattern, indicates that
the unit is not
connected.
031 ADF Original Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF Original Width Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF Original Width Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF Original Length Original is detected. 1
Sensor 2
ADF Original Length Original is detected. 1
Sensor 1
186
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2. Check Output
Press the "START" key to start and press the "STOP" key to reset.
F4 Mode (Output Check)

No. Item Function Remark
040 Total Counter When SPC PCB CN715-8 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V,
count up the Total Counter.
041- Not Used
049
050 Main Motor When SPC PCB CN723-2 signal
level changes to 0V from +5V, the
Main Motor activates.
051 Toner Bottle Motor Rotation In When SPC PCB CN720-16 signal
Forward Direction level changes to 0V from +24V, the
Motor rotates in the forward
direction.
052 Toner Screw Motor When SPC PCB CN720-18 signal
level changes to 0V from +24V, the
Clutch activates.
053 Power Supply Fan When SPC PCB CN704-9,10,
CN709-16 are 24V, Power Supply
Fan rotates high-speed.
054- Not Used
055
056 Fuser Fan When SPC PCB CN709-13 is 24V,
Fuser Fan rotates.
057- Not Used
060
061 Registration Clutch When SPC PCB CN715-2 signal 1 minute
clutch operates.
062 Not Used
063 Paper Feed Roller Clutch When SPC PCB CN715-4 signal 1 minute
(1st Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.
064 Lift Motor When SPC PCB CN706-2 signal
(1st Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
motor rotates in the ascending
direction.
065 ADU Solenoid When SPC PCB CN728-2 signal 1 minute
solenoid operates.
066- Not Used
069
070 Paper Feed Roller Clutch When CST2 PCB CN773-2 signal 1 minute
(2nd Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.
071 Lift Motor When CST2 PCB CN774-2 signal
direction.
187
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

072 Intermediate Roller Clutch When CST2 PCB CN773-4 signal 1 minute
clutch operates.
073- Not Used
074
075 Paper Feed Motor When CST3 PCB CN805-4 signal
(3rd Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +5V,
activate the Motor.
clutch operates.
direction.
clutch operates.
079 Not Used
(4th Paper Tray) level changes to 0V from +24V,
clutch operates.
direction.
clutch operates.
083- Not Used
084
085 Paper Feed Roller Solenoid When SPC PCB CN715-6 signal 1 minute
(Sheet Bypass) level changes to 0V from +24V,
solenoid operates.
086- Not Used
119
120 Lamp When SPC PCB CN656-3 signal
level changes to +5V from 0V, Lamp
operates.
121- Not Used
159
160 ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating ADF paper feed motor rotates at
(35% speed rotating) 35% speed.
163 ADF Paper Feed Motor Reverse ADF paper feed motor rotates in
Rotating reverse at 35% speed.
(35% speed rotating)
188
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

166 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch 1 When ADF PCB CN22-10 signal
clutch operates for 3 seconds.
167 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch 2 When ADF PCB CN22-8 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, clutch
operates for 3 seconds.
168 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch 3 When ADF PCB CN24-2 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, clutch
operates for 3 seconds.
169 ADF Paper Exit Solenoid When ADF PCB CN26-2 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid
operates for 3 second.
170- Not Used
171
172 ADF Solenoid When ADF PCB CN26-5 signal level
173 ADF Inverting Solenoid When ADF PCB CN26-3 signal level
174 ADF Pinch Roller Solenoid When ADF PCB CN26-7 signal level
175 ADF Stamp Solenoid When ADF PCB CN25-2 signal level
189
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.1.4. F5 Mode: Function Parameters (For Copier)
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "5" key on the Keypad.
↓
↓
Enter the desired code number or press “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.
↓
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow keys.
↓
Press the "SET" key.
↓
Enter the desired function code number and press “SET” key.
↓
↓
Press “STOP” key, then press “FUNCTION” and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
↓
Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).
F5 Mode
No. Item Function Default Setting
00 Not Used
01 Frequency Desired 0 : Auto 2 (for USA / Canada)
1 : 50 Hz
2 : 60Hz 1 (for Europe)
02 Not Used
03 LSU Startup Speed 0 : Low 1
1 : Full
04 LSU Off Timer 1 : 5 sec. 3
2 : 10 sec.
3 : 15 sec.
4 : 20 sec.
6 : 30 sec.
8 : 40 sec.
10 : 50 sec.
12 : 60 sec.
05-08 Not Used
09 Fuser Lamp Control 0 : Off 0 (for USA / Canada)
1 : Auto 1 (for Europe)
10 Exit Tray Limitation 0 : None 0
(Up to 250 Sheets) 1 : Accumulate (Effective from August
2 : Job 2004 Production)
11 Replace Drum 0 : Off 0
1 : On (Effective from August
2004 Production)
12 Printer Fan Extension 5 : 5 min 5
2 : 2 min
0 : Non
13 Paper Out Red Indicator 0 : On 0
1 : Off
190
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F5 Mode
14 Paper Size Tray 1 0 : None 11 (for USA / Canada)
1 : A3
2 : B4 1 (for Europe)
3 : A4
4 : A4-R
5 : B5
6 : B5-R
7 : A5
8 : A5-R
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER-R
15 : INVOICE
15 Paper Size Tray 2 Same as F5-14
18 Not Used
19 T Corona Current Auto Adj. 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
20 ADF 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
21 Not Used
22 System Console 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
23-25 Not Used
26 2-Sided Unit 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
27-30 Not Used
31 ADF Duplex Scanning 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
32 Job Build And SADF Mode 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
33 TH Sensor (Laser duty) 0 : No 1
1 : Mid
2 : Large
34-37 Not Used
38 2-Sided Mode Default 0 : No 0
1 : 1 to 2
2 : 2 to 2
3 : B to 2
39 Not Used
40 Double Count 0 : No 1 (for USA / Canada)
1 : LDR 3 (for Europe)
2 : LDR, LGL
3 : A3
4 : A3, B4
41 Count Up Timing 0 : At feed 1
1 : At exit
191
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F5 Mode
42 KEY/DEPT Counter 0 : No 0
1 : Key Cntr
2 : DEPT.
3 : Card
43 Key Counter Timing Same as F5-41 0
44 Not Used
45 Dept Code Reentry Again 0 : Yes 0
1 : No
46 Not Used
47 TH Sensor (T corona current) 0 : No 1
1 : Mid
2 : Large
48 TH Sensor (DEV) 0 : No 1
1 : Mid
2 : Large
49 Not Used
50 Auto Contrast Adjust 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
51 Dept. Counter (COPY) 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
52 Dept. Counter (FAX) 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
53 2-Sided Auto Shift 0 : No 0
1 : Auto sft
54 Margin Reduction 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
55 Margin Value Default 0 : 5 mm 1
1 : 10 mm
2 : 15 mm
3 : 20 mm
56 Edge Value Default 0 : 5 mm 0
1 : 10 mm
2 : 15 mm
3 : 20 mm
57 Book Value Default 0 : 15 mm 1
1 : 20 mm
2 : 25 mm
3 : 30 mm
58 U14 Clear 0 : Continue 1
1 : Any Keys
59 Oper. Add Toner Alarm 0 : Stop 0
1 : Continue
60 Auto Tray Selection 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
61 TDC Auto Adj. 0 : No 1
(DEV Conditions) 1 : Yes
62 TDC Auto Adj.(DEV life) 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
63 U13 Clear 0 : Any keys 0
1 : Func + 1
192
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F5 Mode
64 Dept. Counter (SCANNER) 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
65 Dept. Counter (PRINTER) 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
66-68 Not Used
69 Reduce N in 1 Space 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
70 PM Cycle 0 : No 12
1 : 1.5 K
2 : 2.5 K
3: 5K
4 : 10 K
5 : 15 K
6 : 20 K
7 : 30 K
8 : 40 K
9 : 60 K
10 : 80 K
11 : 90 K
12 : 120 K
13 : 150 K
14 : 200 K
15 : 240 K
71 Add Toner Time Limit 0 : Unlimited 0
1 : 1/3 Limited
2 : 2/3 Limited
72-75 Not Used
76 TH Sensor (Corona, Grid) 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
77 TH Sensor (Bias DC) 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
78 A4/LTR Size Select 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
79 Not Used
80 Paper Size Priority 1 : A3 13 (for USA / Canada)
2 : B4 3 (for Europe)
3 : A4
4 : A4-R
5 : B5
6 : B5-R
7 : A5
8 : A5-R
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER-R
15 : INVOICE
81 B4/FLS Size Selection 0 : B4 0
1 : 8 x 13
2 : 8.5 x 13
193
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F5 Mode
82 Manual Skyshot Mode 0 : Off 0
1 : M1, On
2 : M2, On
3 : M1, M2, On
83 Digital Skyshot Mode 0 : No 1
1 : Normal
2 : Quality
84 Paper Tray Priority 0:S>C>B 1
1:C>S>B
85 Side Void Setting (ADF) 0 : None 0
1 : Yes
86 PM Cycle (Optics) 0 : No 0
1 : 40 K
2 : 60 K
3 : 120 K
4 : 240 K
5 : 360 K
6 : 480 K
7 : 600 K
87 PM Cycle (ADF) 0 : No 0
1 : 40 K
2 : 60 K
3 : 120 K
4 : 240 K
5 : 360 K
6 : 480 K
7 : 600 K
88 USB Port Function 0 : Off 0
1 : Once
2 : ON
89 LAN Speed/Duplex 0 : Auto 0
1 : 10 Half
2 : 10 Full
3 : 100 Half
4 : 100 Full
90 TCH Panel Beep Sound 0 : Off 1
1 : Soft
2 : Loud
91 M1 Set the default size for Manual Skyshot 160
92 M2 Mode, M1 and M2. 70
93 M2, Size Y 220
94 M2, Size X 95
95 Paper Size (FA) 0 : Japan 1 (for USA / Canada)
(Factory use only) 1 : USA/CAN 2 (for Europe)
2 : Europe
3 : Other
96 Bypass Detection 0 : Japan 1 (for USA / Canada)
(Factory use only) 1 : USA/CAN 2 (for Europe)
2 : Europe
3 : Other
194
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F5 Mode
97 Bp tray B4/FLS/LGL (FA) 0 : B4 3 (for USA / Canada)
(Factory use only) 1 : 8 x 13 0 (for Europe)
2 : 8.5 x 13
3 : LEGAL
98 TH Sensor (Laser Power) 0 : No 1
1 : Mid
2 : Large
99 Not Used
195
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.1.5. F6 Mode: Adjust Parameters (For Copier)
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
Note:
The Factory Setting is different in each model.
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
00 Adj 100% Side-Side Read Adjustment for identical vertical (side-to-side) -9 - +9 0.1%
size ratio.
01 Adj 100% Lead-Tail Read Adjustment for identical horizontal -9 - +9 0.1%
(top-to-bottom) size ratio.
02 100% Selection Adjustment from 99.1% to 100.9% -9 - +9 0.1%
03 Original Registration Adjustment of platen original registration -30 - +30
detection timing. 0.2mm
04 Printer Registration Delay time is adjusted from registration roller -50 - +50
clutch ON. 0.5mm
05 Main Motor Speed Adjustment of Main Motor speed. -10 - +10
0.1%
06 Polygon Motor Speed Adjustment Polygon Motor speed. -5 - +5 0.1%
07 Registration Void Registration void should be adjusted. 0 - +99
0.5mm
08 Trail Edge Read Timing Adjustment of trail edge void. -9 - 0
0.5mm
09 Trail Edge Print Timing Adjustment of trail edge void. -9 - +15
0.5mm
10 Side Adjust (Bypass) Adjustment of LSU side-side (Sheet Bypass). -8 - +7
0.5mm
11 Side Adjust (Tray 1) Adjustment of LSU side-side (1st Tray). -8 - +7
0.5mm
12 Side Adjust (Tray 2) Adjustment of LSU side-side (2nd Tray). -8 - +7
0.5mm
13 Side Adjust (Tray 3) Adjustment of LSU side-side (3rd Tray). -8 - +7
0.5mm
196
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
14 Side Adjust (Tray 4) Adjustment of LSU side-side (4th Tray). -8 - +7
0.5mm
15 Not Used
16 Side Adjust (ADU) Adjustment of LSU side-side (ADU). -8 - +7
0.5mm
17 Standard Grid Voltage Charge voltage compensation adjustment. -128 - +19
3.2V
18 Standard Laser Power Laser power compensation adjustment. -19 - +38
0.05mV
19 Std Bias DC Voltage Adjustment of bias standard voltage. -128- +48
2.6V
20 Not Used
21 TDC Gain Voltage Adjustment of toner density sensor gain -70 - +57
voltage. 0.033V
22 DC Bias ON timing Adjustment of DC Bias ON timing. -10 - +10
(Factory use only) 0.01Sec.
23 DC Bias OFF timing Adjustment of DC Bias OFF timing. -10 - +10
(Factory use only) 0.01Sec.
24-25 Not Used
26 TDC Judgment Level Adjustment of toner supply starting judgement -26 - +26
voltage level. 19.5mV
27-29 Not Used
30 Light Halftone Adj. Halftone duty ratio adjustment -127 - +127
31 Fuser Temperature Adjustment of fuser temperature. -15 - +15
0.833°C
32 Fuser Edge Temperature Temperature compensation for edges -15 - +15
0.833°C
33 TDC Max. Read Only Set by F8-20 TDC Check Operation -99 - +99
(Read only)
34 TDC Min. Read Only Set by F8-20 TDC Check Operation -99 - +99
(Read only)
35 TDC Avg. Read Only Set by F8-20 TDC Check Operation -99 - +99
(Read only)
36 Paper Loop (Tray 1) Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 1 -99 - +99
37 Not Used
38 F8-09 (TDC) Adjustment time Adjustment of TDC Adjustment timing. -1 - +5
(Factory use only) 60Sec.
39 LSU Unit PWM Adjust Adjustment of PWM value of LSU. -32 - +32
40 Transfer Current Side 1 Adjustment of Transfer Current. -62 - +110
0.15uA
41 Paper Loop (Bypass) Individual Fine Adjustment for Sheet Bypass -99 - +99
43 Paper Loop (2-Sided) Adjustment for the length of the loop formed -99 - +99
before the copier timing roller.
44 FAX Laser Duty Adj Printer Density Adjustment for FAX. -99 - +99
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
45 Not Used
197
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
46 PRINTER Laser Duty Adj Printer Density Adjustment for Printer. -99 - +99
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
0.15uA
48 Transfer Current Envelope Adjustment of Transfer Current. -62 - +110
0.15uA
49 T Mode Image Density Image density adjustment for Text mode. -99 - +99
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
50 T/P Mode Image Density Image density adjustment for Text/ Photo -99 - +99
mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
51 P Mode Image Density Image density adjustment for Photo mode. -99 - +99
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
52 Not Used
53 CCD Read Position Adj Adjustment of CCD read position. -42 - +44
0.2mm
54 T Mode Contrast Adjustment of Contrast for Text Mode. -128 - +127
55 T/P Mode Contrast Adjustment of Contrast for Text/Photo Mode. -128 - +127
56 P Mode Contrast Adjustment of Contrast for Photo Mode. -128 - +127
57 Not Used
58 Corona Charger Current Adjustment of Corona Charge Current. -77 - +76
1.3uA
59 Trail Edge Trans (Trays) Trail Edge Transfer Image High Voltage -30 - +30
Timing Adjustment for Trays 1-4 feeding. 0.5mm
60 Trail Edge Trans (Bypass) Trail Edge Transfer Image High Voltage -30 - +30
Timing Adjustment for Bypass Tray feeding. 0.5mm
61 Trail Edge Trans (2Sided) Trail Edge Transfer Image High Voltage -30 - +30
Timing Adjustment for the 2nd side of 2-Sided 0.5mm
printing.
62 TDC Gain Voltage Adjust Adjustment of Toner Density sensor gain -10 - +10
voltage. 0.033V
63 Lead Edge Read Timing Adjustment of Lead Edge Read Point. 0 - +9
(Adjustment for Double Exposure 0.5mm
Copy Mode, for details and
adjustment procedure, refer to
Sect. 3.9.8.)
64 Side Edge Read Adjust Adjustment of Side Edge Read Point. 0 - +9
(Adjustment for Double Exposure 0.5mm
Copy Mode, for details and
adjustment procedure, refer to
Sect. 3.9.8.)
(Small Width) 0.15uA
66 Transfer Current Side 2 Transfer Current -20 - +20
(Small Width) 0.15uA
198
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
67 ADF Image Density Compensation of ADF image density. -99 - +99
69 Stamp Position Adjust Adjustment of verification stamp position. -50 - +50
0.3mm
70 Not Used
71 ADF Read Main Scan Pos. Adjustment of ADF horizontal image read -99 - +99
(Reverse Side) start position. 0.05mm
72 Original Lead Edge ADF Adjustment of ADF Original Lead Edge -99 - +99
(Reverse Side) 0.3mm
73 Original Trail Edge ADF Adjustment of ADF Original Trail Edge -127 - +127
74 Stamp Position Adjust Adjustment of Stamp Position -50 - +50
75-76 Not Used
77 Add Toner Level Adjustment of Toner supply -1 - +1
1
79 MTF Adjust Adjustment of Scanning Sharpness by digital -2 - +2
image processing for Text /Photo Copy Mode. 1
80 Laser Power Control Value of Gamma Table for Photo Mode. -99 - +99
(Read Only)
81 Grid voltage Control Value of Laser duty of Check pattern. -99 - +99
(Read Only)
82 Bias DC Voltage Control Value of Laser duty of Black pattern. -99 - +99
(Read Only)
83 Temperature Sensor Value Value of Temperature sensor. 0 - 255
(Read Only)
84 Humidity Sensor Value Value of Humidity sensor. 0 - 255
(Read Only)
85 Not Used
86 ADF Reverse Stop Posi. Adjustment of ADF reverse stop position. -99 - +99
0.3mm
87 ADF Exhaust Stop Posi. Adjustment of ADF exit stop position -99 - +99
0.3mm
88-89 Not Used
90 ADF Image Read Start Adjustment of ADF horizontal image read -99 - +99
start position. 0.05mm
91 Original Lead Edge ADF Adjustment of original detection timing. -99 - +99
0.3mm
92 Original Trail Edge ADF Adjustment of trail edge detection timing. -127 - 127
0.3mm
93 ADF 100% Image 1-Sided Adjustment of magnification for 1-sided. -9 - +9
0.1%
94 ADF 100% Image 2-Sided Adjustment of magnification for 2-sided. -9 - +9
0.1%
95-96 Not Used
97 (Factory use only) Adjustment of Timer -5 - +99
10Sec
199
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
98 Not Used
99 F5/F6 Initialization Initialize F5/F6 parameter settings.
200
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.1.6. F7 Mode: Electronic Counter
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
F7 Mode
No. Item Remarks
01 Key Operator ID Code Key Operator’s identification code for access to the
counter mode.
02 Total Count Total count for all copies / prints.
03 PM Count Preventive Maintenance count.
04 Scanner PM Count PM count for scanner readings.
05 Not Used
06 OPC Drum Count PM count of recording paper fed through the OPC
Drum.
07 Process Unit Count PM count of recording paper fed through the
Process Unit.
08 ADF PM Count PM count of originals fed through the ADF.
09 Not Used
10 Developer Count PM count of recording paper fed through the
Developer.
11 Sheet Bypass Count Total count of paper fed from the sheet bypass.
12 1st Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 1st paper tray.
13 2nd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 2nd paper tray.
14 3rd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 3rd paper tray.
15 4th Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 4th paper tray.
16 2-sided Count Total count of 2-sided Print.
17 ADF Count Total count of originals fed through the ADF.
18 ADF Read Count Total count of originals scanned through the ADF.
19 Scanner Count Total count of scanning operations.
20 Scanner Read Count Total count of scanner readings.
21 Copy Print Count Total count of copies printed.
22 Copy Scan Count Total count of copies scanned.
23 PC Print Count Total count printed from PC.
24 PC Scan Count Total count scanned to PC.
201
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F7 Mode
No. Item Remarks
25 Fax Transmit Count Total count of Fax transmitted.
26 Fax Receive Count Total count of Fax received.
27 Fax Print Count Total count of Fax printed.
28 Total OPC Rotation Time Total Time of OPC Rotation.
29 A4/LT Count Total count of A4 / Letter Print.
30 A4R / LETTER R Count Total count of A4-R / Letter-R Print.
31 A3 / Ledger Count Total count of A3 / Ledger Print.
32 B4 / LEGAL Count Total count of B4 / Legal Print.
99 All Counter Clear All counters are cleared.
5.1.7. F8 Mode: Service Adjustment
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
F8 Mode
No. Item Remarks
00 Exp. Lamp replacement When replacing the exposure lamp.
Procedure:
a) Press the Start key to move the exposure lamp to
the position (approx. 250 mm from the optics
home position) where it can be replaced.
b) To return the optical system to the home position,
press the CLEAR key.*
01-05 Not Used
06 Error Log Print/View a) Each time the arrow key is pressed, the machine
errors or paper jam codes stored in memory are
displayed, beginning with the oldest code.
Note:
Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed.
07 Error Log Clear a) Press the Reset key.
A Message "Error code can be cleared with the
Start key" is displayed on the LCD.*
b) Press the Start key.
202
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F8 Mode
No. Item Remarks
08 (Factory use only) Lock operation for Scanner Unit.
09 Toner Density adjustment Adjustment operation of Toner Density.
10 Drum Charge adjustment Adjustment operation of Drum Charge.
11 Not Used
12 Org.size Sensor Adj. Adjust the slice level for the original size detection
(Not Used) sensors automatically. Execute this mode by closing
the platen cover.
13 Black Density reference Adjustment operation of Black Density sensor.
14 OPC Counter Reset Proceed when OPC is replaced.
15-17 Not Used
18 LSU PWM Pattern Print out the Test Pattern.
Proceed when the LSU is replaced.
19 Move Mirror To Lock a) Press the Start key to move the mirror unit to the
locked position for transporting the copier.
b) When the mirror unit is locked, the machine will
not accept any numerical key input.
Note:
The locking operation is automatically reset when
the Power switch is turned ON again.
20 TDC Check Operation Adjustment of TDC sensor.
21-46 Not Used
47 ADF Continuous Test Press START key to begin.
48 Platen Continuous Test Press START key to begin.
203
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.1.8. F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
F9 Mode
Service
Item Remarks
Mode
F9 Unit 00 Fax Service Mode
Maintenance 01 Service Alert Tel # Displays the contact number when a
machine malfunction occurs.
02 Firmware 00 SC Displays the firmware version for SC.
Version 01 SC Boot Displays the firmware version for SC
Boot.
02 PNL Displays the firmware version for PNL.
03 SPC Displays the firmware version for SPC.
04 Not Used
05 FAX Modem Displays the firmware version for FAX
option 1.
06 Not Used
07 SC2 Displays the firmware version for Slot 1.
03 Print 00 F5/F6 Parameters Prints the memory contents of the F5
Device Info. and F6 modes.
01 Machine Information Prints the machine setup information list.
02 Counter Information Prints the Counter information list.
03 System Address Prints the system memory setting.
Info.
04 RAM Address Prints the RAM data dump list.
Information
04 RAM Edit 0 Relative Address Setting of Relative address.
Mode 1 Absolute Address Setting of Real address.
05 Serial Number Registration of Serial Number for
Maintenance.
Clears by Shipment Set.
204
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
F9 Mode
Service
Item Remarks
Mode
F9 Unit 06 RAM 00 Parameter Initialize Resets the Fax and Function
Maintenance Initialize parameters to default values.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF
and back to the ON position to enable
the parameter settings.
01 All Job Clear Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
02 LBP Error Log Clear Clears LBP Error log
03 Shipment Set Clears All Jobs, All Preset Data,
Parameter Initialize & Resets the
Counters (Fax).
04 LBP Fuser Reset Clears the LBP fuser error.
05 Dept. Counter Clear Resets the Counter
06 Flash Memory Clear Clears the Flash Memory Data
07 Firmware 00 Update FROM Card Updates the firmware in the machine
Update with the Master Firmware Card.
01 Update from USB Updates the firmware in the machine
with the USB.
08 Program 00 Main Onboard F-ROM 4MB
Backup 01 Option 1 all Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 8MB
(Refer to 02 Option 1 a Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)
Sect. 3.7.)
03 Option 1 b Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)
04 Not Used Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 8MB
05 Not Used Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)
06 Not Used Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)
09 Update Program Card Creates a Master Firmware Card using
the Firmware Update Kit. A 4MB or 8MB
Flash Memory Card will be required
depending upon the model.
10 Program 00 From card to slot 1 Configuration for Program copy.
Copy 01 Not Used
02 From slot 1 to card
03 Not Used
04 Not Used
05 Not Used
11 Parameter Backup Backup the Parameter.
12 Parameter Restore Restore the Parameter.
13 Page Memory Size Displays the page memory size (MB).
14 Sort Memory Size Displays the sort memory size (MB).
205
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2. Service Modes (For Facsimile)

5.2.1. Fax Service Mode Procedure
1. To enter the Fax Service Mode

a. Press “FAX/EMAIL” key.
b. Press “FUNCTION” and then “7” keys.
c. Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”.
d. Enter the desired code number or press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.
2. To exit the Fax Service Mode

Press “STOP” key.
Note:
The following buttons provide these functions in the Service Mode:
"START": : The new setting value is stored in the machine.
"V” : Scroll the function parameter number down.
"/\ “ : Scroll the function parameter number up.
5.2.2. FAX Service Mode Table

The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and
determining the condition of the unit.
Service Modes (For Facsimile)

No. Service Mode Description
00 Not Used
01 Function Parameter Setting Allows changes to the function parameters (the home
position, etc.).
02 RAM Edit Mode Factory use only.
03 Print Parameter List / Report Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer
Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and Toner Order
Form.
04 Modem Tests Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the
modem.
05 Not Used
06 RAM Initialize Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function
parameters.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON
position to enable the parameter settings.
07 Not Used
08 Check & Call Allows input of information for Service Alert Report,
Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form.
09 System Maintenance Used for Firmware Update, Firmware Backup, Parameter
Restore, Parameter Backup, Transferring Firmware from the
PC to the Flash Card and Sending a Received File during a
fatal printer error.
206
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.3. Fax Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting)
Use the following procedure to change the function parameters.
Enter the desired code number and press “START” key.

↓
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.
↓
Select the desired function code and press the "START" key.
↓
↓
Press “STOP” key twice to exit the service mode.
Function Parameter Table

No. Parameter Selections Function
000 Monitor/Tel Dial 1 = Monitor Selects whether the machine starts to TX
2 = Tel/Dial automatically during On-Hook dialing.
Monitor : Start to TX after pressing START
TEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically
001 Alarm Status 1 = Off Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status.
2 = Timer OFF : Alarm is disabled.
3 = Constant Timer : Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds.
Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is
pressed or the error is cleared/
corrected.
002 Stop Comm. 1 = Off Selects whether the machine prompts to print the
JRNL 2 = On COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to
INC and STOP is pressed during communication.
003 Continuous Poll 1 = Off Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is
2 = Stn (Tx only) enabled.
3 = Hub (Rx only) Stn : Place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen,
then press the assigned Program Key to
store or add the documents into a polled file.
(See Note 1)
Hub : When the polling command is initiated, the
machine will continuously poll originals from
the remote stations until it is interrupted by
pressing "STOP".
004 Numeric ID Set 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to
2 = On (accepts) set or change the Numeric ID.
207
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

005 Destination Code 000 : Austria Specified destinations only.
001 : U.K.
002 : Canada
003 : Denmark
004 : Taiwan
005 : Finland
006 : Germany
007 : Netherlands
008 : Italy
009 : Spanish
010 : Hong Kong
011 : Australia
012 : Switzerland
013 : Norway
015 : Portuguese
016 : Ireland
017 : Belgium
018 : Sweden
019 : Turkey
020 : U.S.A.
021 : France
022 : New Zealand
025 : Japan
029 : Poland
030 : Czech
031 : Russia
032 : Greece
033 : Hungary
034 : Indonesia
035 : South Korea
038 : Malaysia
039 : China
045 : Thailand
048 : South Africa
049 : Singapore
050 : Universal
051 : East Euro
006 ID Display 1 = Number (Numeric ID) Selects the priority of displaying the ID.
2 = Chara (Character ID)
007 JRNL Column 1 = Station Selects the contents of the ID to display on the
2 = RCV’D ID Journal.
008 Monitor 1 = Off Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for
2 = On monitoring fax signals.
(FOR SERVICE USE ONLY)
009 DC Loop 1 = Off (Normal) Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back
2 = On (Off Hook) communication test.
010 TX Level 00 = 0 dBm Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~ dBm steps. (Refer to Chapter 4.3.)
15 = -15 dBm
011 RX Level 1 = -43 dBm Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48
2 = -38 dBm dBm.
3 = -33 dBm
4 = -48 dBm
208
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

012 DTMF Level 00 = 0 dBm Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~ dBm steps.
15 = -15 dBm
013 G3 RX EQL 1 = 0dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode,
2 = 4dB 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.
3 = 8dB
4 = 12dB
014 G3 TX EQL 1 = 0dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission
2 = 4dB mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.
3 = 8dB
4 = 12dB
015 ~ Not Used
016
017 TX Start 2400 bps Selects the transmission modem start speed,
4800 bps 14400/12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/
7200 bps 2400 bps.
9600 bps Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
TC7200 Note:
TC9600 This parameter is applicable only when
12000 bps communicating with regular G3 machines. When
14400 bps communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
use Parameter No. 32.
018 RX Start 2400 bps Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/
4800 bps 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.
7200 bps Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
9600 bps Note:
TC7200 This parameter is applicable only when
TC9600 communicating with regular G3 machines. When
12000 bps communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
14400 bps use Parameter No. 33.
019 ITU-T V.34 1 = Off Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On or Select.
2 = On Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off or On,
3 = Select when entering Phone Book Dialing
Numbers or Manual Number Dialing.
020 ITU-T ECM 1 = Off (Invalid) Select the ECM mode.
2 = On (Valid)
021 EP Tone 1 = Off (without EP Tone) Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on
2 = On (with EP Tone) V.29 mode.
(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)
On : Add
Off : Do not add
022 Signal Interval 1 = 100 ms Selects the time interval between the receiving
2 = 200 ms signal and the transmitting signal.
3 = 500 ms
023 TCF Check 1 = Normal (Short) Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short
2 = Long
024 CED Frequency 1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T) Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz
2 = 2100 Hz
025 COMM. Start-Up 1 = First Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT
2 = Second and Polling).
209
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

026 Non-Standard 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects own mode (Panafax mode).
2 = On (Valid)
027 Short Protocol B 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects the short protocol mode.
2 = On (Valid)
028 Short Protocol D 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it
2 = On (Valid) allows the machine to automatically store the
modem speed for each Auto Dial Number.
029 Remote 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts Remote
Diagnostics 2 = On (accepts) Diagnostics from the service station.
030 CED & 300 bps 1 = 75 ms Selects the pause interval between the CED and
2 = 1 sec the 300 bps signal.
031 RTC = EOL x 12 1 = Off (EOLx6) Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6 or EOLx12.
2 = On (EOLx12)
032 V34 TX Start 2400-33600bps Selects the transmission modem start speed for
V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps.
Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
033 V34 RX Start 2400-33600bps Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34
communication, 33600-2400 bps.
034 V34 TX SR 2400-3429sr Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/
3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.
035 V34 RX SR 2400-3429sr Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3200/
3000/2800/2400 sr.
036 Not Used
037 Protocol Display 1 = Off (not displayed) Selects whether to display the modem speed
2 = On (displayed) during communication.
(Press the Job Status Key to display)
038 Not Used
039 Flash Time 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the
~ Flash key.
100 = 1000 ms
040 Flash Time 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the
(PSTN) ~ Flash key.
100 = 1000 ms (For Germany, Austria and Czech)
041 Pause Time 1 = 1 sec. Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for
~ dialing through a switchboard or for international
10 = 10 sec. calls.
042 Not Used
043 Redial Interval 0 = no waiting Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1
~ minute steps.
15 = 15 minutes
044 Redial Count 0 = no redial Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step
~ intervals.
15 = 15 times Note:
In order to comply with the requirements TBR21
0 ~ 9 (For Australia Only) in the EC countries, do not select 15 times.
210
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

045 Ring Detect 1 = 1 ring Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in
Count ~ 1 ring step intervals.
9 = 9 rings
046 On-Hook Time 0 = 0 sec. Selects the on-hook time between sequential
~ communication calls in 1 second step intervals.
90 = 90 sec.
047 Response Wait 1 = 1 sec. Selects the waiting interval for the response after
Interval ~ completing the dialing.
90 = 90 sec.
20 ~ 150 sec.
(For France Only)
048~ Not Used
049
050 Ring Detect Mode 1 = Normal Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line
2 = Rough signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the
unit may detect the ringing signals.
051 Not Used
052 Pulse Rate 1 = 10 pps Selects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.
2 = 20 pps
053~ Not Used
054
055 Busy Tone Check 1 = Off Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone.
2 = On
056 Dial Tone Check 1 = Off Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing
(Except for USA 2 = On the telephone number.
and Canada)
057 DC Loop Check 1 = Off Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during
(Except for USA 2 = On communication.
and Canada)
058 Comm. JRNL + 1 = Off (without image) Selects whether the machine prints the COMM.
Image 2 = On (with image) Journal with image.
059 Confidential RCV 1 = Off (does not print out) Selects whether the machine prints the Confidential
Report 2 = On (prints out) RCV Report.
060 Version Indicates the Host software
version.
061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY TX:****** PRT:****** Displays the transmitted, received, total printed and
RX:****** CPY:****** copied document count.
062 Print Counter 1 = Off Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List,
2 = On the counter information that is displayed in the
Function Parameter No. 61.
063~ Not Used
067
211
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

068 NYSE Fax 1 = Off Selects whether the machine will forward the
Forward 2 = On incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station.
(USA and Canada Note:
Only) Once this parameter is activated, Fax
Forwarding via Fax Parameter No. 054 is
automatically disabled, an Access Code of
"0000" is automatically assigned and Fax
Parameter No. 038 has a new setting added
called "NYSE".
069 NYSE Local Print 1 = Inc Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes
(USA and Canada 2 = On (Always) after FAX Forwarding.
Only) INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails.
ON : Always prints.
070 Line Error 128 lines 1. Selects the line disconnect condition during
256 lines reception. If the number of line errors exceed this
512 lines setting, the unit will disconnect the line.
1024 line Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
2048 lines 2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or
Off RTN/PIN.
(will not disconnect line) (Available if No. 73 Error Detect is set to
"LINES") (See Note 1)
071 Total Error 1 = 5% Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/
2 = 10% PIN.
3 = 15% (Available if No. 73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
4 = 20% (See Note 2)
072 Continuous Error 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6
2 = 3 lines/STD or 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total
3 = 6 lines/STD error exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit
4 = 12 lines/STD RTN/PIN.
(Available if No. 73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
073 Error Detect 1 = Lines Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate.
2 = Rate
074 RTN Receive 1 = Disconnect Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or
2 = Continue continue when "RTN" is received.
075 Coding 1 = MH (MH only) Selects the coding scheme.
2 = MR (MH or MR)
3 = MMR
(MH or MR or MMR)
4 = JBIG
076 Batch TX 1 = Off Selects whether the batch transmission is available.
(USA and Canada 2 = On
Only)
077 RX JAM Length 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the maximum length of a received
2=2m document that can be printed.
078~ Not Used
079
080 Doc Top Feed -99 Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor
~ ON position and the scanning start position.
+99
081 Doc End Feed -90 Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor
~ OFF position and the scanning end position.
+127
212
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

082 JAM Length 1=1m Selects the maximum length of the original that can
2=2m be scanned.
083 Not Used
084 Line As No Paper 1 = Ring (ring) Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the
2 = Busy (keep line busy) remote station when the recording paper runs out or
the unit cannot receive because of any trouble.
085 Not Used
086 Reduction Fine 1 = Off Selects whether to fix with Fine Mode or not for the
2 = On Reduction transmission.
087 Darker Level 0 = Lightest Contrast Selects the contrast level.
088 Normal Level ~ 0← →15
089 Lighter Level 15 = Darkest Contrast Lightest← →Darkest
090~ Not Used
091
092 Smoothing 1 = Off Selects whether the smoothing function is available.
2 = On
093 ~ Not Used
094
095 Reduction Ratio (70-100) Selects Print Reduction Ratio (%).
096 ~ Not Used
101
102 Original -30 Adjustment of original registration detection timing.
Registration ~
+30
103 Trail Edge Read -9 Adjustment of trail edge void.
Timing ~
0
104~ Not Used
109
110 MAC Address Indicates the MAC Address.
111 Not Used
112 Insert EMAIL TXT 1 = Off Selects whether the Text Template (email message)
2 = On is programmable and added on all email sent in the
message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40
characters Programmed in the User Parameters.)
Note:
After enabling this feature, aside from entering
the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be
activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will
take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed
Numbers.
113 Not Used
114 SYMBOL SET 1 = Standard Selects whether the extended symbols other than
2 = Extended "%" is available for Internet Parameters entry.
115 Time Zone 1 = Scroll Selects the setting method for Time Zone.
2 = Direct Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll
through the Time Zone Table.
Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone
directly, (*) key to be used as a switch
between +/-.
213
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

116 Overwrite 1 = Yes Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included
Warning 2 = No on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when
programming the Auto Dialer via email.
117~ Not Used
121
122 LDAP 1 = Off When LDAP is used, specialized characters may be
2 = On displayed as different characters.
123 Not Used
~
199
Note 1: Continuous Polling (Station Mode)

This feature allows you to store or add documents into a polled file in memory.
To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station".
The last Program Key will be assigned with the “Store 4 Poll” Key name automatically
and cannot be changed.
To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen
and then press the Program Key to store or add the document(s) into a polled file.
(Note: If a regular polled file is stored in memory, the Program Key for Continuous Polling will
not be accepted.)
Note 2: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN
Setting
Signal
1:128 2:256 3:512 4:1024 5:2048 6:Off
MCF/PIP 0-31 0-63 0-127 0-255 0-511 Always
RTP/PIP 32-63 64-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 -
RTN/PIN 64-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 1024-2047 -
Note 3: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN
Setting
Signal
1:5% 2:10% 3:15% 4:20%
MCF/PIP 0-2 0-4 0-7 0-9
RTP/PIP 3-4 5-9 8-14 10-19
RTN/PIN 5- 10- 15- 20-
Note 4: The default setting of parameters depends on the country’s specifications or regulations. Print the
Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.
214
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.4. Fax Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports and Test Results)
From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All
Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form.
5.2.4.1. Function Parameter List
A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure.
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "3: Print Report/List" on the display.
↓
Press the “SET” key to select the "1: Function Parameter List".
↓
Press the “SET” key.
↓
Press the “STOP” key twice to exit the service mode.
215
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Function Parameter List (Sample)
************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01
000 Mon/Tel Dial Monitor 050 Ring Det Mode Normal

001 Alarm Status Timer 051 ----------
002 Stop Comm. JRNL On 052 Pulse Rate 10pps
003 Continuous Poll Off 053 ----------
004 Numeric ID Set On 054 ----------
005 Destination Code 999 055 Busy Tone Check On
006 ID Display Chara 056 Dial Tone Check Off
007 JRNL Column Station 057 DC Loop Check Off
008 Monitor Off 058 Comm. JRNL + Image On
009 DC Loop Off 059 Conf. RCV Report On
010 TX Level -9dBm 060 Version ..... AcV........

011 RX Level -43dBm 061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY 000080/000168/000003/000000
012 DTMF Level -5dBm 062 Print Counter Off
013 G3 RX EQL 0dB 063 ----------
014 G3 TX EQL 0dB 064 ----------
015 --------- 065 ----------
016 --------- 066 ----------
017 TX Start 14400bps 067 ----------
018 RX Start 14400bps 068 ----------
019 ITU-T V.34 On 069 ----------
020 ITU-T ECM On 070 Line Error 128

021 EP Tone Off 071 Total Error 10
022 Sig. Interval 500ms 072 Conti. Error Off
023 TCF Check Normal 073 Error Detect Rate
024 CED Freq. 2100Hz 074 RTN Receive Discon
025 Comm. Start-Up First 075 Coding JBIG
026 Non-Standard On 076 ----------
027 Short Protocol B On 077 RX JAM Length 2 m
028 Short Protocol D On 078 ----------
029 Remote Diag. On 079 ----------
030 CED & 300bps 75ms 080 Doc Top Feed 0

031 RTC = EQL x 12 Off 081 Doc End Feed 0
032 V34 TX Start 33600bps 082 JAM Length 2 m
033 V34 RX Start 33600bps 083 ----------
034 V34 TX SR 3429sr 084 Line As NoPaper Ring
035 V34 RX SR 3429sr 085 ----------
036 --------- 086 Reduction Fine On
037 Protocol Display Off 087 Darker Level 2
038 --------- 088 Normal Level 8
039 Flash Time 500ms 089 Lighter Level 4
040 --------- 090 ----------

041 Pause Time 3sec 091 ----------
042 --------- 092 Smoothing On
043 Redial Interval 3min 093 ----------
044 Redial Count 5 094 ----------
045 Ring Det. Count 2 095 Reducton Ratio 100%
046 On-Hook Time 5sec 096 ----------
047 Response Wait 55sec 097 ----------
048 --------- 098 ----------
049 --------- 099 ----------
-PANASONIC -
***** ******************* -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- *********
Note:
1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the country’s regulations.
2. “ * ” mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.
216
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.4.2. Page Memory Test
A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory and printer mechanism using the following
procedure.
↓
↓
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "3: Page Memory Test".
↓
↓
************* TEST PATTERN PRINT **************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01
SC : TX/RX/PRT/CPY : 000123/000456/000789/000666
SC BOOT : MEMORY SIZE : (2 MB)
PNL : MAC ADDRESS : 08002300E078
SPC : SHIPMENT SET
FAX MODEM :
SC2 :
-PANASONIC -
***** ****************** -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********
217
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.4.3. Printer Report
All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure.
↓
↓
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "4: Printer Report".
↓
↓
**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02********
LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016
SERIAL NUMBER :
CUSTOMER ID : 1234567890123456
FIRMWARE VERSION
SC :
PNL :
SPC :
TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000475

RECEIVE COUNTER : 000398
COPY COUNTER : 000083
PRINT COUNTER : 000016
NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT | NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016 |
02.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 J02 00-00000016 |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-PANASONIC -
***** *******************-PANASONIC -*******-12345678901234567890-**************
218
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.4.4. All Document Files
Print the document files from the Flash Memory.
↓
↓
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "5: All Document Files".
↓
↓
219
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.4.5. Protocol Trace
Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication.
↓
↓
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys select the "6: Protocol Trace".
↓
↓
*************** PROTOCOL LOG. REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 *******
STATUS : OK
MODE : ECM-TX (STANDARD)
SPEED : 9600bps 0MS/L
REMOTE CAPA. : DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12
LOCAL CAPA. : TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B
39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30
DCS 00 C6 F8 44
COMMAND LOG.
REMOTE : NSF CSI DIS CFR
LOCAL : TSI DCS PIX PPS-EOP
------------------------------------------------------------------
REMOTE : MCF
LOCAL : DCN
-PANASONIC -
****************************-PANASONIC -*************-12345678901234567890-***************
220
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.4.6. Toner Order Form
The Toner Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure.
↓
↓
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "7: Toner Order Form".
↓
↓
221
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
*************************************
> TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM <
*************************************
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer
Panasonic Corp. (2)
by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3)

by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)
Thank you for your order.
Customer Name and Address

=========================
Ship to: Bill to:
Attention: Attention:
Phone No.: Phone No.:
Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required):
Toner Bottle No.: (6) Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/ /
Print your name and title Signature & Date
Explanation of Contents
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low”
(2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits
(3) Toner Order Tel # Up to 36 digits
(4) Toner Order Fax # Up to 36 digits
(5) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
(6) Toner Bottle No. DQ-TU10J (For DP-1520P/1820P/1820E)
222
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.5. Fax Service Mode 4 (Modem Test)
5.2.5.1. Binary Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "4: MODEM Test" on the display.
↓
Press the “SET” key to select the "1: Signal Test".
↓
↓
Press the desired number.
↓
↓
Binary Signal Table

Number Signals
1 V21 300bps
2 V27ter 2400bps
3 V27ter 4800bps
4 V29 7200bps
5 V29 9600bps
6 V17 TC7200bps
7 V17 TC9600bps
8 V17 12000bps
9 V17 14400bps
223
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.5.2. Tonal Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.
↓
Press the “SET” key to select the "2: Tonal Testl".
↓
↓
Press the desired number and press the "START" key.
↓
Tonal Signal Table

Number Signals
1 462 Hz
2 1080 Hz
3 1100 Hz
4 1300 Hz
5 1650 Hz
6 1850 Hz
7 2100 Hz
224
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.5.3. DTMF Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output.
The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure.
• DTMF Single Tone

↓
Press the “SET” key to select the "3: DTMF Test".
↓
↓
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "1. Single".
↓
↓
• DTMF Dual Tone

↓
Press the “SET” key to select the "3: DTMF Test".
↓
↓
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "2. Dual".
↓
↓
DTMF Single Tone Table DTMF Dual Tone Table

Number DTMF Signal Tones Number DTMF Dual Tones
1 697 Hz 0 941 Hz + 1336 Hz
2 770 Hz 1 697 Hz + 1209 Hz
3 852 Hz 2 697 Hz + 1336 Hz
4 941 Hz 3 697 Hz + 1477 Hz
5 1209 Hz 4 770 Hz + 1209 Hz
6 1336 Hz 5 770 Hz + 1336 Hz
7 1477 Hz 6 770 Hz + 1477 Hz
8 1633 Hz 7 852 Hz + 1209 Hz
8 852 Hz + 1336 Hz
9 852 Hz + 1477 Hz
* 941 Hz + 1209 Hz
# 941 Hz + 1477 Hz
225
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.5.4. Binary Signal (V.34)
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure. (V.34)
↓
Press the “SET” key to select the "4: V34 MODEM".
↓
↓
↓
Binary Signal Table

Number Signals Number Signals Number Signals
01 V34 2400 sr 2400 bps 22 V34 3000 sr 9600 bps 43 V34 3429 sr 4800 bps
14 V34 2800 sr 14400 bps 35 V34 3200 sr 14400 bps 56 ANSam
15 V34 2800 sr 16800 bps 36 V34 3200 sr 16800 bps 57 CM
16 V34 2800 sr 19200 bps 37 V34 3200 sr 19200 bps 58 JM
17 V34 2800 sr 21600 bps 38 V34 3200 sr 21600 bps 59 INFO0c & TONEB
18 V34 2800 sr 24000 bps 39 V34 3200 sr 24000 bps 60 INFO0c & TONEA
19 V34 2800 sr 26400 bps 40 V34 3200 sr 26400 bps 61 PPh & AC & ALT
20 V34 3000 sr 4800 bps 41 V34 3200 sr 28800 bps
21 V34 3000 sr 7200 bps 42 V34 3200 sr 31200 bps
226
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.6. Fax Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization)
Initializes RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values.
Note:
This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed.
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "6: RAM initialize" on the display.
↓
Press the “SET” key to select the desired Mode number.
↓
Press the "SET" key to initialize RAM.
↓
RAM Initialization Table

No. Initialize Mode Description
01 PARAMETER INITIALIZE Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default
values.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the
ON position to enable the parameter settings.
02 JOURNAL CLEAR Clears the Journal contents.
03 AUTO DIAL CLEAR Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books.
04 PROGRAM DIAL CLEAR Clears the Program keys.
05 LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password.
06 LBP ERROR LOG CLEAR Clears the Printer Error Log.
07 SHIPMENT SET Deletes all setting information, except parameter number
80 and 81, then set default values.
08 FLASH MEMORY CLEAR Deletes all information in the Flash Memory.
09 ALL JOB CLEAR Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
227
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.7. FAX Service Mode 8 (Check & Call)
5.2.7.1. Overview
This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the machine maintenance to
their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by
alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows:
1. The machine’s printer error information is stored in the Printer Report.
2. The printer report can be manually printed when required.
3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-
registered telephone number or email address.
4. When the unit detects Low Toner or PM counter reached the maintenance timing, it can automatically
transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "8: Check & Call" on the display.
↓
Press the “SET” key to select the desired code number.
(i.e. 01 Service Alert Fax #, input the telephone No. or for an email address, press the "FAX/EMAIL"
Mode key and input the email address.)
↓
↓
5.2.7.2. Printer Reports

• Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted
1. Manual print
The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See Sect. 5.2.4.3.)
2. Automatic transmission/printout
a. Service Alert Report
When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service
Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. However, the unit will not
transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log.
b. Maintenance Alert Report
When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report
to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Refer to the Error Code Table.
c. Toner Order Form
When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically print the Toner Order Form with the pre-
registered order information.
d. Call Counter Report
When the printer counter reaches the pre-set number, the unit can automatically transmit the Call
Counter Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.
Note:
The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory
transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal).
228
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Error Tx
Log Remarks
Code Report
Ex-xx O S Refer to the Mechanical Error Code (E Code) Table. (Sect. 4.6.3.)
E13 Out of Toner.
Jxx Refer to the Jam Error Code (J Code) Table. (Sect. 4.6.2.)
Uxx Refer to the User Error Code (U Code) Table. (Sect. 4.6.1.)
U13 M Low Toner.
Note:
TX (Transmission) Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report
229
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.7.3. SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT
*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ********
****************************
> SERVICE ALERT REPORT <
****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013
SERIAL NUMBER :
(1) CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC :
PNL :
SPC :
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:
CURRENT PM CYCLE
F7-02 Total Count : 13 (------)
F7-03 PM COUNT : 13 120000
F7-04 Scanner PM Count : 9 (------)
F7-05 . . . . . :
F7-06 OPC Drum Count : 13 (------)
F7-07 Process Unit Count : 13 (------)
F7-08 ADF PM Count : 1
F7-11 Sheet Bypass Count : 0 F7-23 PC Print Count : 0
F7-12 1st Paper Tray Count : 3 F7-24 PC Scan Count : 6
F7-13 2nd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-25 FAX Transmit Count : 0
F7-14 3rd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-26 FAX Receive Count : 0
F7-15 4th Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-27 FAX Print Count : 0
F7-16 2-Sided Count : 0 F7-28 OPC Drum Rotate : 0
F7-17 ADF/iADF Count : 0 F7-29 A4/LT Count : 0
F7-18 ADF/iADF Read Count : 0 F7-30 A4R/LTR Count : 0
F7-19 Scanner Count : 0 F7-31 A3/LD Count : 0
F7-20 Scanner Read Count : 0 F7-32 B4/LG Count : 0
F7-21 Copy Print Count : 0
F7-21 Copy Scan Count : 0
Call Counter Pri-set Value : 999999
(4) PRINT ERROR:
NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-LOGO PANASONIC -
***** *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
(1) Customer ID
(2) Firmware Version
(3) Counter Information
(4) Print Error Last 30 records (Latest on top)
230
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.7.4. MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT
****************************
> MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT <
****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1)
SERIAL NUMBER :
CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY (2)
FIRMWARE VERSION (3)

SC :
PNL :
SPC :
TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000244 (4)

RECEIVE COUNTER : 000082
COPY COUNTER : 000000
PRINT COUNTER : 000000
NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-LOGO PANASONIC -
************************************ -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-***********
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER”

(4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters
231
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.7.5. Toner Order Form
*************************************
> TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM <
*************************************
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer
Panasonic Corp. (2)
by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3)

by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)
Thank you for your order.
Customer Name and Address

=========================
Ship to: Bill to:
Attention: Attention:
Phone No.: Phone No.:
Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required):
Toner Bottle No.: (6) Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/ /
Print your name and title Signature & Date
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low”
(2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits
(3) Toner Order Tel # Up to 36 digits
(4) Toner Order Fax # Up to 36 digits
(6) Toner Bottle No. DQ-TU10J (For DP-1520P/1820P/1820E)
232
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.7.6. CALL COUNTER REPORT
*****************************************************************
> SCHEDULED REPORT - CALL COUNTER HAS REACHED PRE-SET VALUE <
*****************************************************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013
SERIAL NUMBER :
(1) CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC :
PNL :
SPC :
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:
CURRENT PM CYCLE
F7-02 Total Count : 13 (------)
F7-03 PM COUNT : 13 120000
F7-04 Scanner PM Count : 9 (------)
F7-05 . . . . . :
F7-06 OPC Drum Count : 13 (------)
F7-07 Process Unit Count : 13 (------)
F7-08 ADF PM Count : 1
F7-11 Sheet Bypass Count : 0 F7-23 PC Print Count : 0
F7-12 1st Paper Tray Count : 3 F7-24 PC Scan Count : 6
F7-13 2nd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-25 FAX Transmit Count : 0
F7-14 3rd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-26 FAX Receive Count : 0
F7-15 4th Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-27 FAX Print Count : 0
F7-16 2-Sided Count : 0 F7-28 OPC Drum Rotate : 0
F7-17 ADF/iADF Count : 0 F7-29 A4/LT Count : 0
F7-18 ADF/iADF Read Count : 0 F7-30 A4R/LTR Count : 0
F7-19 Scanner Count : 0 F7-31 A3/LD Count : 0
F7-20 Scanner Read Count : 0 F7-32 B4/LG Count : 0
F7-21 Copy Print Count : 0
F7-21 Copy Scan Count : 0
Call Counter Pri-set Value : 1
(4) PRINT ERROR:
NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-LOGO PANASONIC -
***** *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
(1) Customer ID
(3) Counter Information
(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value
233
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
5.2.8. Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance)
5.2.8.1. Overview
This Service Mode is used to maintain the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance.
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "9: System Maintenance" on the display.
↓
Press the “SET” key to select the "1: Send RCV’D File". The display changes to the Fax Mode.
↓
Select the desired Fax number.
↓
Press "START" to send the Fax.
After the transmission, the machine returns to the Stand-by Mode.
Note:
If there is NO File in the machine, this operation will not function.
System Maintenance Table

No. Maintenance Mode Description
01 Send RCV'D File Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine
during a fatal printer error.
234
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6 System Description
6.1. Mechanical Operation
6.1.1. Scanning Mechanism (Flatbed)
1. Scanning Mechanism
The Scanning Mechanism consisting of Lens, CCD PCB Assembly, Mirrors, Scanner Lamp, Lamp
Base Bracket and Mirror 2 Bracket, is used to scan originals.
• The Mirror 1 and Mirrors 2 reflect image information, in the form of light, through the Lens.
• The Lens focuses the image information and passes it to the CCD.
• The CCD, mounted on the CCD PC Board, converts the image information into an electrical signal.
• The Timing Belt driven by the Stepping Motor, move the Scanner Assembly.
Scanning (S) Glass
Scanner Lamp
Reflection Plate Platen (L) Glass
Size Sensor 1 Scanning Motor
Driving Wire
Lamp Base Bracket Timing Belt
Mirror 2
Scanning Lens
Mirror 2 Mirror 1
CCD PC Board Assembly
2. Transmit Mechanism
a. When ADF is used, originals are scanned on the Scanning (S) Glass. The Platen (L) Glass is used
when scanning on the Platen.
b. The Scanning point is established by the setting on the Panel.
c. Document size is manually set when the Platen is used.
d. The Transmit Mechanism starts feeding and scanning originals based on the above Document Size
Setting.
e. When scanning is completed, the Stepping Motor stops rotating and the Lamp Base and Mirror 2
Brackets return to the standby position.
During scanning, the Lamp Base Bracket and Mirror 2 Bracket move in the direction of the Black arrow
and while returning to standby position, it moves in the direction of the White arrow as shown in the
illustration. The location of these two brackets and the scanning length are established by the setting
on the Panel. The following illustration shows the Drive system.
235
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
When scanning originals

When returning to Standby position
Scanning Motor
Drive Shaft Assembly
Lamp Base Bracket
Mirror 2 Bracket
236
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.2. Automatic Document Feeder

The ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds paper into the unit, one original at a time.
Its main features are:
1. Place originals Face-Up
2. Correct Order Stacking (Collation Mode)
3. Paper Feed Mechanism with Pre Feed Roller
The following is the ADF Mechanical operation description.

6.2.1. Automatic Document Feeder
1. Initialization
The ADF begins its operation with the Eject phase in order to feed and eject any originals stuck inside
the ADF. The ADF Motor starts rotating Feed Roller (2010), Exit 1 Roller (1812) and Ejecting the
Original, after a few seconds the Clutch (2324) reverses the rotation direction raising the Original
Stopper to its standby position.
2. Original Setting and Size Sensors

Place the original(s) face up on the ADF until the leading edge stops against the Original Stopper.
Adjust the Original Front and Rear Guides (1711 & 1714) to center the original on the ADF. The
Original Stopper prevents originals from skewing and multiple feeding. The Photo Sensor (131) for
Original Detection detects the presence of Originals on the ADF when the original(s) actuate NP
Actuator (2008) on the Lower Paper Feed Guide (2002). The two Sensors mounted on the SNS PC
Board (2832) which is installed in the Original Upper and Lower Trays (1712, 1706) are actuated by the
Original Front/Rear Guides, their position determines the original's width and 2 Photo Sensors (131) for
Original Length detect the length of the original.
3. Feeding and Separation

When the Start button is pressed, the Clutch (2324) starts to rotate and uppers the Original Stopper,
causing the Pre Feed Roller (2018) to apply a downwards pressure against the originals. After a few
seconds, the Clutch (2324) reverses the direction of rotation and the Pre Feed Roller is raised upwards
along with the Original Stopper. The upper original is fed to the Paper Feed Roller (2001), and the
Separation Rubber (2024) prevents multiple feeding.
4. Transmission and Ejection

The original is fed into the Feed Roller (2010) and when the original actuates the Photo Sensor (131)
for Read Point and Eject, the Paper Feed Roller (2001) stops rotating. The Photo Sensor (131) for
Read Point and Eject detects the scanning position and the Feed Roller (2010) transports the original
while scanning. The Exit 1 Roller (1812) feeds and ejects the original out of the ADF. If there are
additional originals on the ADF, the next one is fed into the feeder.
5. Final Operation
After ejecting the last original on the ADF, the Clutch reverses the direction of rotation raising the
Original Stopper to its standby position.
237
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Automatic Document Feeder
Photo Sensor (131) for Original Length

Paper Feed Roller (2001)
Pre Feed Roller (2018) Original Upper and Lower
Trays (1706, 1712)
Original Front and Rear Guide (1711, 1714)
Lower Paper Feed
Guide (2002)
Feed Roller (2010)
SNS PC Board (2832)

Exit 1 Roller (1812)
NP Actuator (2008)
Original Stopper (2016)
Photo Sensor (131) for Original Detection
Separation Rubber (2024)
Photo Sensor (131) for Read Point and Eject
238
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.3. Inverting Automatic Document Feeder

The i-ADF automatically inverts two-sided original(s) for faxing or copying of the second side. This feature
enables machines with a duplexer mounted to perform duplex copying.
An i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) functions in a similar manner as the ADF (Automatic
Document Feeder), with the main exception being the document eject path after scanning. The following is
the description of the main differences.
For DP-1820E only.
1. Switching from the ADF Mode to the i-ADF Mode

After passing through the Read Point Sensor (131), the path of the original is switched over by the
Duplex 2 Guide (2431), to the Exit Roller or to the Inverting Feed Roller (2428).For single-side
scanning, the Duplex 2 Guide is rotated clockwise by the Solenoid guiding the original to the Exit
Roller. For double-side scanning, the Duplex 2 Guide is rotated counter-clockwise by the Solenoid
guiding the original to the Inverting Feed Roller (2428).The Duplex 2 Guide moves only once, in the
direction according to whether a single or double-side scanning is selected (Copier or Fax) before the
Start button is pressed. It will remain in this position until a different operation is performed (i.e. if the
last operation was 2-sided scanning, a single-side scanning is performed).
2. Scanning the Front and the Back Side of an Original

The scanning of the Front and Back side of a 2-sided original is accomplished by means of the Duplex
2 Guide (2431) and Inverting 1 Guide (2432).
After the Front side of the original is scanned, the original is transported through the Duplex 2 Guide,
through the Inverting 1 Guide (2432) that was rotated counter-clockwise by the Solenoid and is carried
beyond the Inverting Feed Roller (2428) and upper Pinch Roller 1 (2130) into the Sub Tray (2209).
The original is carried for a specified period of time after the trailing edge of the original triggers the
Duplex Eject Sensor (131) and stops within 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers.
Then, the Inverting 1 Guide is rotated clockwise by the Solenoid and the reverse rotation of the ADF
Motor pulls the original back around the Feed 2 Roller (2517) and proceeds to scan the Back side of
the original.
After the Back side is scanned, the original is transported through the Duplex 2 Guide, through the
Inverting 1 Guide and is carried beyond the Inverting Feed Roller and lower Pinch Roller 1 (2130) this
time, into the Sub Tray, again stopping 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers.
3. Eject by Reverse Rotation

For the originals to stack properly, the above process repeats one more time. The Inverting 1 Guide is
rotated clockwise by the Solenoid and the reverse rotation of the ADF Motor pulls the original back
around the Feed 2 Roller, however, this time the original is routed to the Exit 3 Roller (2515) and exits
into the ADF Base.
4. Sub Tray
The Inverting ADF system includes a Sub Tray (2209), which supports the originals during the ejection
mode of the double-side scanning operation.
The Release Lever Plate grasps the originals and prevents them from being ejected into the Sub Tray.
239
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
edger)
Inverting Automatic Document Feeder
LS1.2)
Pre Feed Roller
431.8 (L
)
420 (A3
(2018)
210 (A5 VOICE)

Separation
)
-R)
364 (B4
Roller Original Detection Sensor (131)
330.2 (F
-R)
(2509) Original
297 (A4
Pinch Roller 1 (2130)
257 (B5
Pinch Roller 2 ADF Roller Stopper
N
)
(I
(2624) (2314) (2506)
Release Lever
.9
(Feed Skew Adjustment) 38
5
Plate (2504)
2 1
Drive Roller
(2706)
Read Point
Sensor (131)
Eject Sensor Sub Tray (2209)

Inverting Feed Roller (2428)
(131)
Pinch Roller 1 (2130)
Duplex Eject Inverting 1 Guide (2432)
Sensor (131) Duplex 2 Guide (2431)
Exit 3 Roller (2515)
Feed 2 Roller
(2517) Read Point Stamp Head (1827)
Reversing 1 Guide (2516)
Pinch Roller 2 Pinch Roller 2 (2624)
(2624) (Reverse Registration or Feed Skew Adjustment)
(Registration Adjustment)
240
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.4. Receive Mechanism

6.4.1. Paper Tray
1. Paper Tray (1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th)
< NP Sensor Operation >
NP Actuator
NP Sensor
a. The NP Actuators attached to the Paper Feed Blocks No.1, 2, 3 and 4 determine if there is paper in
the paper tray.
b. The paper in the paper tray lifts up the NP Actuator, allowing the light from the LED to actuate the
NP Sensor.
241
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
< Paper Tray Operation >
Clutch
Registration Roller
Registration Sensor
Registration Actuator
Pickup Roller
Feed Roller
Separation Roller
a. When the printing operation begins, the Main Motor starts driving the Gears.
b. The Clutch is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Feed Roller.
The paper is separated into individual sheets by the Separation Roller and is transported.
c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller, activating the Registration Sensor. After a
specified period of time, the Clutch is turned ON and the Registration Roller and the Registration
Pinch Roller start rotating. The paper is transported to the OPC drum area.
d. The paper passes through the Read Point Sensor and after a specified period of time, the Clutch is
turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop rotating.
242
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
< Paper Tray (Optional) Operation >
Intermediate Roller
Clutch
Actuator
Sensor
Pickup Roller
FeedRoller
Drive Motor
Separation Roller
a. When the printing operation begins, the Main Motor and the Drive Motor start driving the Gears.
b. The Clutch is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Feed Roller.
The paper is separated into individual sheets by the Separation Roller and transported by the
Intermediate Roller.
c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller, activating the Registration Sensor. After a
specified period of time, the Clutch is turned ON and the Registration Roller starts rotating. The
paper is transported to the OPC drum area.
d. The paper passes through the Read Point Sensor and after a specified period of time, the Clutch is
turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop rotating.
243
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
< Paper Tray Lift up Mechanism >
Pickup Roller
Feed Roller
Lift Plate
Bottom Plate
a. When inserting the Paper Tray into the machine, the NP Sensor activates. At the same time, the Lift
Plate is combined with the coupling which drives the Lift Plate of the machine. The Lift Plate rotates,
lifting the Bottom Plate and the Recording Paper.
b. Once the Bottom Plate and the Recording Paper are raised, the NP Sensor is turned ON. The Lift
DC Motor stops rotating, maintaining the recording paper at the certain level.
244
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
< Paper Tray Recording Paper Size Setting >
NP Sensor
Lift DC Motor
Coupling
a. The Recording Paper size in the Paper Feed Module is set on the Touch Panel.
245
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
2. Sheet Bypass
< NP Sensor Operation >
a. The NP Actuator attached to the Paper Feed Unit determines if there is paper in the paper tray.
b. The paper in the paper tray lowers the NP Actuator and the NP Sensor actuates.
< Sheet Bypass Operation >
Feed Roller
Pressure Plate
Sparate Roller
NP Actuator
NP Sensor
a. When the printing operation begins, the PRINT (Print Request Signal) turns On and the Main Motor
starts driving the Gears.
b. The Clutch is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Paper Feed
Roller. The paper is raised by the Pressure Plate and transported to the Separate Roller. The paper
is separated into individual sheets by the Separate Roller.
c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller, activating the Registration Sensor.
d. After a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned ON and the Registration Roller and the
Registration Pinch Roller start rotating. The paper is transported to the OPC drum area.
After lowering the Pressure Plate during the specified period of time, the Clutch is turned OFF and
the Paper Feed Roller stops rotating.
e. After the trailing edge of the paper passes the Registration Sensor and after a specified period of
time, the Clutch is turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop
rotating.
246
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.4.2. Laser Unit
LSU Chassis
Laser
Beam Detection
Sensor Collimator Lens
Beam Detection
Lens
Aperture
Cylindrical Lens
Polygon Mirror/
Polygon Motor
F Lens
Cover Glass Beam Detection
Reflection Mirror
1. Laser
This Laser uses the semiconductor laser. The beam power on the drum surface is approximately 0.4
mW.
2. Collimator Lens and Cylindrical Lens
These lenses converge and focuse the laser beam, converting it to parallel light.
3. Aperture
This controls the size of the laser beam.
4. Polygon Mirror and Polygon Motor
The polygon scanner consists of a 6-sided mirror, directly driven by a DC motor, revolving at 42,000
rpm. The laser beam is reflected against these mirrors and swept over the recorded width in the
scanning direction.
5. Beam Detection (BD) Lens and Beam Detection (BD) Sensor
The BD Lens receives the reflected light from the Polygon Mirror and redirects it into the BD Sensor,
which converts the laser beam into electrical signals and sets the start timing for the scanning line.
6. F-θ Lens
This amorphous plastic, molded lens is designed to provide parallel laser light across the surface of the
drum, providing a constant scanning speed.
7. Cover Glass
This prevents a particle of dust invading into the LSU.
247
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.4.3. Fuser Operation
The paper passes through the Fuser Roller and is subjected to heat and pressure in the Fuser Unit.
Pressure between the Fuser Roller and Pressure Roller fuses or bonds the toner into the paper.
Separators Recording Paper
Pressure Roller
Exit Roller
Fuser Roller
Thermistor Assembly
Thermostat
Thermal Fuse
Fuser Lamp
Fuser Roller
A Teflon coated roller supplies heat for bonding the toner to the paper. The temperature of the surface is
kept constant at approximately 180°C (± 10°C) (or 356°F).
Fuser Lamp
Located in the Fuser Roller is the Fuser Lamp that serve as the heat source for the Fuser Roller.
Thermistor Assembly
A heat sensitive resistor, in contact with the Fuser Roller, monitors the surface temperature and keeps
the temperature at the specified level by controlling the Fuser .
Thermostat and Thermal Fuse

The Thermostat and the Thermal Fuse are installed in the Fuser Roller, providing an extra overheat
protection.
Printer Motor
The Main Motor provides the driving force to the Fuser Roller through the Fuser Roller Gears.
Pressure Roller
This converted PFA tube Silicon Sponge Roller applies pressure to the Fuser Roller, assisting in bonding
the toner to the paper.
When the Fuser Unit does not reach the specified temperature within a certain period of time, an Error code
is shown on the display, stopping the operation.
When the Thermistor Assembly is disconnected or the surface temperature of the Fuser Roller is out of
limit, an Error code is shown on the display, stopping the operation.
248
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.4.4. Printing Process Operation
The Process Unit consists of Developer Unit, OPC Drum unit and Toner Bottle with Toner supplied. Toner is
supplied to the Process Unit.
The Process Unit includes the Toner Paddle and Mag Roller that supplies Toner to the OPC Drum.
The Cleaning Blade is attached to the OPC Unit. The Cleaning Blade scrapes the OPC Drum surface to
remove the excess toner on the surface of the OPC Drum into the Toner Waste Chamber. The removed
toner is moved into the Toner Waste Container by means of Toner Waste Paddle and Toner Waste Screw.
Toner Bottle
Toner Waste Paddle
Cleaning Blade
Toner Waste Screw
Bias Charge Unit

Doctor Blade
Recording Paper
Star Wheel
OPC Drum
Magnet Roller
Toner Screw 1
Toner Screw 2
Process Unit
Developer Unit
1. Construction of the Developer
a. The developer unit consists of the Magnet Roller, Sleeve and Toner Screws.
b. The developer is mixed and charged by the Toner Screws where it is transferred to the developer
sleeve. The developer on the sleeve forms a brush by the magnetic force of the Magnetic Roller,
and makes contact with the electrostatic latent image on the drum. Toner is attracted to the areas of
the drum which have been discharged by the laser.
c. The Doctor Blade regulates the height of the magnetic brush which is formed by the developer
which is attracted to the sleeve of the Magnetic Roller.
d. The TDC sensor is an inductance type sensor used to measure the ratio of toner to developer.
e. A dust collector vacuum duct is provided over the developer unit to prevent toner dusting. The dust
collector is duct connected to the dust collector fan mounted on the machine frame which vacuums
the scattered toner to prevent toner dusting over the developer unit.
2. Developing
a. The developer mixing unit contains developer which is a mixture of fine powder (non-magnetic
toner) and fine ferrite carrier.
249
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
b. The developer is mixed by the Toner Screws. The toner becomes negatively charged ( ñ ) and the
carrier becomes positively charged ( + ). The developer is magnetically attracted to the aluminum
sleeve of the Magnetic Roller, and the magnetic brush is formed.
c. The Magnetic Roller sleeve rotates in a counterclockwise direction. The height of magnetic brush is
controlled by the gap between the doctor blade and the sleeve surface.
d. The drum, with an electrostatic latent image, is rotated clockwise and makes contact with the
magnetic brush.
e. The negatively charged toner is attracted to the electrostatic latent image on the drum.
f. Charge (developer bias) is applied to the Magnetic Roller sleeve, which prevents toner from moving
to the non-image area of the drum. The distance between the drum and the sleeve is controlled by
the drum spacers.
250
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.5. Signal Waveforme

6.5.1. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations

Signal Name Function
+12V +12 VDC Power Supply
+24V +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VD1 +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VFL +20 / +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VM +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VOPC +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VOPF +24 VDC Power Supply
+3.3V +3.3 VDC Power Supply
+5v +5 VDC Power Supply
+5VD +5 VDC Power Supply
+5VP +5 VDC Power Supply
+ACT ACTIVE Lamp LED Power Supply
+ALM ALARM Lamp LED Power Supply
+DAT DATA Lamp LED Power Supply
+SLP Energy Saver Lamp LED Power Supply
AC(L) AC Power Supply
AC(N) AC Power Supply
ACSW Fuser Relay
ADF2 2nd Paper Tray Feed Roller Drive Signal
ADF3 3rd Paper Tray Feed Roller Drive Signal
ADF4 4th Paper Tray Feed Roller Drive Signal
AGND Ground
BAT+ Lithium Battery
BMCNT Toner Bottle Motor Control Signal
BTHP Toner Bottle Position Sensor Signal
BZ- Buzzer Signal
BZ+ Buzzer Signal (+)
C1- Capacitor 1 Negative Connection Pin for Converter
C1+ Capacitor 1 Positive Connection Pin for Converter
C2- Capacitor 2 Negative Connection Pin for Converter
CASET Paper Tray Detection Signal (1st Feeder)
CCRMT Charge Leak Detection Signal
CPWM Charge Control DC ON/OFF PWM
CSB1 Chip Select Signal
CST2 2nd Paper Tray Detection Signal
CST3 3rd Paper Tray Detection Signal
CST4 4th Paper Tray Detection Signal
CSTOP 2nd Paper Feed Module Detection Signal
CSTOP4 4th Paper Feed Module Detection Signal
251
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

DAA1 ADF Motor Current Control Signal
DB0 Data Signal
DB1 Data Signal
DB2 Data Signal
DB3 Data Signal
DB4 Data Signal
DB5 Data Signal
DB6 Data Signal
DB7 Data Signal
DDCPWM Development Control DC ON/OFF PWM
E_RDB Read/Write Execution Control Signal
ELPCNT Discharge Lamp
F/R Direction of Rotation Signal
FDPCHK2 2nd Paper Tray Paper Registration Detection Signal
FDPCHK3 3rd Paper Tray Paper Registration Detection Signal
FDPCHK4 4th Paper Tray Paper Registration Detection Signal
FSH Transfer Gate Clock
GND Ground
GPWM Grid Control ON/OFF PWM
HFSOL Temp Humidity Sensor Signal
HPMB LCD driver Power Control Signal
HSYNC Horizontal Synchronous Signal
HUMISN Temp Humidity Sensor Signal
HVAC1 INV PC Board/Lamp Signal
HVAC2 INV PC Board/Lamp Signal
IICSCL IIC Transmission Clock
IICSDA IIC Transmission Signal
IOUTA Motor Control Signal
IOUTB Motor Control Signal
JAMDOR2 2nd Paper Tray Jam Access Cover Open Detection Signal
JAMDOR3 3rd Paper Tray Jam Access Cover Open Detection Signal
JAMDOR4 4th Paper Tray Jam Access Cover Open Detection Signal
KCDET Key Counter Option Detection
KCNT Key Counter Option
KIN0 PNL Key Signal (Key Line)
L1 Line Signal
L2 Line Signal
L5V Laser Circuit +5VDC Power Supply
LD Motor Lock Detection Signal
252
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

LDBTHP Toner Bottle HP Sensor Signal
LDCST2 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDCST3 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDCSTSEN Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDDUX Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDEN Laser Control
LDFPCHK2 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDHEX Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDHFPE Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDI- Laser Diode Control -
LDI+ Laser Diode Control +
LDJAM2 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDORI Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDPED Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDPHK2 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDPSEN Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDRRSEN Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDSSN Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDTF Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDUPL2 Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDUPLSEN Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LDWTB Photo Sensor DC Drive Voltage
LED0 PNL LED Control Signal
LEDCT0 PNL LED Control Signal
LIFT1 1st Paper Tray Lift Motor Signal
253
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

LIFT2 2nd Paper Tray Lift Motor Signal
LIFT4 4th Paper Tray Lift Motor Signal
LIFTM2 2nd Paper Tray Lift Motor Drive Signal
LIFTM4 4th Paper Tray Lift Motor Drive Signal
MGND Ground
MRCLH2 2nd Paper Tray Intermediate Roller Clutch Drive Signal
MRCLH3 3rd Paper Tray Intermediate Roller Clutch Drive Signal
MRCLH4 4th Paper Tray Intermediate Roller Clutch Drive Signal
N.C. No Connection
nA3SEN Sheet Bypass Paper Size Detection Signal
nA5SEN Sheet Bypass Paper Size Detection Signal
nAA3S Original Width Detection Signal
nAA3SN Original Width Detection Signal
nAADL1 Original Length Detection Signal
nAADL2 Original Length Detection Signal
nAAPNT Original Detection Signal
nAB1SN Read Point Detection Signal
nAB2SN Duplex Eject Detection Signal
nAB4S Original Width Detection Signal
nAB4SN Original Width Detection Signal
nACLH1 Feed 2 Roller Clutch Control Signal
nACLH2 Paper Feed Roller Clutch Control Signal
nACLH3 Inverting Roller Clutch Control Signal
nACLOCKAD1 ADF Motor Control Clock Signal
nAEJC Original Eject Detection Signal
nAKEEP1 Reversing 1 Guide Solenoid Control Signal
nAKEEP2 Reversing 1 Guide Solenoid Control Signal
nANG Platen Cover Angle
nAOAC ADF Cover Open Detection Signal
nAPACHG Release Lever Plate Solenoid Control Signal
nAPICR Release Lever Plate Solenoid Control Signal
nAREV ADF Exit Cover Open Detection Signal
nASTAMP Stamp Control Signal
nASTROAD1 ADF Motor Control Strobe Signal
nATT Attention Signal
nB4SEN Sheet Bypass B4 Paper Detection Signal
nBDOOR Platen Cover Open Detection Signal
nCCLH1 Feed 2 Roller Clutch Control Signal
nCCLH2 ADF Roller Clutch Control Signal
nCCLH3 Inverting Roller Clutch Control Signal
nCST2 2nd Paper Tray Detection Signal
nCTCNT Counter Drive Signal
nCTON Ring Detection Signal
nDADFON ADF Option Detection Signal
nDUPACK Duplex Print Acknowledge Signal
nDUPSEN ADU Sensor Signal
254
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

nDUREQ Duplex Print Request
nDUXSOL ADU Solenoid Control Signal
nFLON Inverter Ground
nFNRDT Fan Ready Signal
nFNRDTP PS Fan Ready Signal
nHEXSEN Paper Exit Sensor Signal
nHFPESEN Bypass Feed Sensor Signal
nHKOF External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal
nLEDACT ACTIVE Lamp LED Control Signal
nLEDALM ALARM Lamp LED Control Signal
nLEDDAT DATA Lamp LED Control Signal
nLEDSLP Energy Saver Lamp LED Control Signal
nLIFTM3 3rd Paper Tray Lift Motor Drive Signal
nLPOW1 Power Control
nLPOW2 Power Control
nMMCK Main Motor Clock
nMMON Main Motor Rotation Control Signal
nMMRDY Main Motor Ready Signal
nOPDUP Duplex Unit Detection Signal
nOPT PNL4 Detection
nORI Home Position Detection Signal
nOUTA Motor Control Signal
nOUTB Motor Control Signal
nPACK Printer ACK Signal
nPCHK4 4th Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal
nPEDSEN Sheet Bypass Paper Detection Signal
nPHY1 CCD CLOCK
nPHY2 CCD CLOCK
nPHYCP CCD CLOCK
nPHYR CCD CLOCK
nPNLRST Panel Reset Signal
nPRDY Printer Ready Signal
nPRGDWN F-ROM Rewrite
nPVSYNC Print Registration
nSACK Scan ACK Signal
nSADFON ADF Detection Signal
nSCNWUP Energy Saver Signal
nSLPKY Energy Saver Key Signal
nSREQ Scanner Request Signal
nSTAMP Stamp Control Signal
nTFSEN Toner Waste Sensor
nVCNT +24 VDC Power Supply Control Signal
nVRDY VSYNC Reset Signal
nWAKE FAX Wake Up Signal
nWTBSEN Toner Waste Container Detection Sensor Signal
OP3CLK 3rd Paper Tray Motor Clock
255
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

OP3ENB Option Feed FIFO Enable
OP3FCK Option Feed FIFO Clock
OP3FDIN Option Feed FIFO Input
OP3FLD Option Feed FIFO Load
OP3FLT Option Feed FIFO Latch
OP3FOT Option Feed FIFO Output
OP3RST Option Feed FIFO Reset
OUTA Motor Control Signal
OUTB Motor Control Signal
P/S Motor Start/Stop
pADATA1A ADF Motor Control Signal
pADATA1B ADF Motor Control Signal
pBDA Print BDA Signal
PCHK1 1st Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal
PCHK2 2nd Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal
PCHK3 3rd Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal
PCHK4 4th Paper Tray Paper Detection Signal
pCMLD Line Switching Relay Drive Signal
PFCLCNT Paper Feed Clutch Drive Signal
PMCK Polygon Motor Clock
PMON Polygon Motor Rotation Signal
PMRDY Polygon Motor Ready Signal
PNLRXD PNL Reception Data Signal
PNLTXD PNL Transmission Data Signal
POWCNTV Laser Power Control Signal
pPHY1 CCD CLOCK
pPHY2 CCD CLOCK
pPHYCP CCD CLOCK
pPHYR CCD CLOCK
PS Parallel / Serial Data Input Select Signal
pSENTIM Scanner LSYNC Signal
pSPCRST SPC Reset Signal
pSPKOT Line Dial Tone Signal
pVREQ Print ACK Request Signal
RESETB LCD Driver Reset Signal
RETRACE Laser Control
RRCLCNT Registration Roller Drive Signal
RS Register Selection Control Signal
RSEN Registration Sensor Signal
RW_WRB LCD Control Signal
S/H Sample Hold Signal
SCN0 PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)
256
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

SMCNT Toner Motor Control Signal
SPCRXD SPC Reception Data Signal
SPCTXD SPC Transmission Data Signal
SSR Heater Control Signal
TC Transfer Control Cleaning Output
TDREF Toner Density Reference Sensor
TDSEN Toner Density Sensor Signal
TEMPSN Temp Humidity Sensor Signal
THERM1 Thermistor Output Signal
THERM2 Ground
TPWM Transfer Control Transfer Output
UPLIMIT 1st Paper Tray Paper Level Signal
UPLIMIT2 2nd Paper Tray Paper Level Signal
UPLIMIT3 3rd Paper Tray Paper Level Signal
UPLIMIT4 4th Paper Tray Paper Level Signal
UPLMT2 2nd Paper Tray Paper Level Signal
UPLMT4 4th Paper Tray Paper Level Signal
V0 LCD Driver Supply Voltages
VCL LCD Power Supply
VDD +3.3 VDC Power Supply
VOUT Voltage Converter Input / Output
VOUT1 Graphic Data Output
VOUT2 Graphic Data Output
VSS Ground
ZCRS Heater Control Signal
257
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.5.2. SC PC Board
CN51
SC PCB
Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function
Pin No.
CN51-1 +24V PS PCB +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
CN11-1
CN51-2 GND PS PCB Ground

CN11-2
0V
CN51-3 +5VP PS PCB +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

CN11-3
CN51-4 +5VD PS PCB +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

CN11-4
CN51-5 +5v PS PCB +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

CN11-5

CN11-6
0V

CN11-7
0V

CN11-8
0V

CN11-9
0V

CN11-10
0V
CN51-11 +3.3V PS PCB +3.3V +3.3 VDC Power Supply

CN11-11
CN51-12 +3.3V PS PCB +3.3V +3.3 VDC Power Supply

CN11-12
258
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN51-13 nLPOW1 PS PCB Power Control
CN11-13 +24V
0V
CN51-14 nLPOW2 PS PCB Power Control

CN11-14 +3.3V
0V
CN51-15 nVCNT PS PCB +24 VDC Power Supply

CN11-15 +24V Control Signal
0V
CN52
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN52-1 +24V PNL1 PCB +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
CN220-1
CN52-2 GND PNL1 PCB Ground

CN220-2
0V

CN220-3
0V

CN220-4
0V
CN52-5 +5VP PNL1 PCB +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

CN220-5
CN52-6 +5v PNL1 PCB +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

CN220-6
CN52-7 PNLRXD PNL1 PCB PNL Reception Data Signal

CN220-7 +5V
0V
CN52-8 PNLTXD PNL1 PCB PNL Transmission Data

CN220-8 +5V Signal
0V
259
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN52-9 nPNLRST PNL1 PCB Panel Reset Signal
CN220-9 +3.3V
RESET
0V
CN52-10 nLPOW2 PNL1 PCB Power Control

CN220-10 +3.3V
0V
CN52-11 nLPOW1 PNL1 PCB Power Control

CN220-11 +24V
0V
CN52-12 nSLPKY PNL1 PCB Energy Saver Key Signal

CN220-12 +3.3V
PRESSED
0V
CN52-13 nWAKE PNL1 PCB FAX Wake Up Signal

CN220-13 +3.3V
0V
CN52-16 nVCNT PNL1 PCB +24 VDC Power Supply

CN220-16 +24V Control Signal
0V
CN53
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN53-1 nPRDY ADF PCB Printer Ready Signal
CN717-1 +5V
READY
0V
CN53-2 nVRDY ADF PCB VSYNC Reset Signal

CN717-2 +5V
0V
CN53-3 nPACK ADF PCB Printer ACK Signal

CN717-3 +5V
0V
CN53-4 nATT ADF PCB Attention Signal

CN717-4 +5V
0V
260
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN53-5 nDUPACK ADF PCB Duplex Print Acknowledge
CN717-5 +5V Signal
0V
CN53-6 pBDA ADF PCB Print BDA Signal

CN717-6 +3.3V
0V
CN53-7 pVREQ ADF PCB Print ACK Request Signal

CN717-7 +5V
0V
CN53-8 nSACK ADF PCB Scan ACK Signal

CN717-8 +5V
0V
CN53-9 nPVSYNC ADF PCB Print Registration

CN717-9 +5V
0V
CN53-10 nDUREQ ADF PCB Duplex Print Request

CN717-10 +5V
0V
CN53-11 pSENTIM ADF PCB Scanner LSYNC Signal

CN717-11 +5V
0V
CN53-12 nSREQ ADF PCB Scanner Request Signal

CN717-12 +5V
0V
CN53-13 pSPCRST ADF PCB SPC Reset Signal

CN717-13 +5V
0V
CN53-14 nPRGDWN ADF PCB F-ROM Rewrite

CN717-14 +5V
0V
CN53-15 GND ADF PCB Ground

CN717-15
0V

CN717-16
0V
261
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN53-17 IICSCL ADF PCB IIC Transmission Clock
CN717-17 +5V
0V
CN53-18 IICSDA ADF PCB IIC Transmission Signal

CN717-18 +5V
0V

CN717-19
0V
CN53-20 nSCNWUP ADF PCB Energy Saver Signal

CN717-20 +5V
0V
CN53-21 SPCRXD ADF PCB SPC Reception Data Signal

CN717-21 +5V
0V
CN53-22 SPCTXD ADF PCB SPC Transmission Data

CN717-22 +5V Signal
0V
CN55
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN55-1 VOUT2 CCD 4 6V Graphic Data Output
CN850-1
1V
0V
CN55-2 AGND CCD Ground

CN850-2
0V
CN55-3 VOUT1 CCD 4 6V Graphic Data Output

CN850-3
1V
0V

CN850-4
0V

CN850-5
0V
262
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN850-6
0V
CN55-7 +12V CCD +12V +12 VDC Power Supply

CN850-7

CN850-8
0V
CN55-9 GND CCD Ground

CN850-9
0V
CN55-10 GND CCD Ground

CN850-10
0V
CN55-11 pPHYCP CCD +3.3V CCD CLOCK

CN850-11
0V
CN55-12 nPHYCP CCD +3.3V CCD CLOCK
CN850-12
0V
CN55-13 pPHYR CCD +3.3V CCD CLOCK
CN850-13
0V
CN55-14 nPHYR CCD +3.3V CCD CLOCK
CN850-14
0V
CN55-15 pPHY2 CCD +3.3V CCD CLOCK
CN850-15
0V
CN55-16 nPHY2 CCD +3.3V CCD CLOCK
CN850-16
0V
CN55-17 pPHY1 CCD +3.3V CCD CLOCK
CN850-17
0V
263
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN55-18 nPHY1 CCD +3.3V CCD CLOCK
CN850-18
0V
CN55-19 FSH CCD +3.3V Transfer Gate Clock
CN850-19
0V
CN55-20 +5v CCD +5V +5 VDC Power Supply
CN850-20
CN57
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN57-1 LDI- LSU +3.3V Laser Diode Control -
CN1-1
0V
CN57-2 LDI+ LSU Laser Diode Control +

+3.3V
CN1-2
0V
CN57-3 GND LSU Ground

CN1-3
0V
CN57-4 +3.3V LSU +3.3V +3.3 VDC Power Supply

CN1-4
264
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.5.3. SPC PC Board
CN650
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN650-1 +5VP ADF PCB +5V +5 VDC Power Supply
CN21-1
CN650-2 MGND ADF PCB Ground

CN21-2
0V

CN21-3
0V
CN650-4 +24V ADF PCB +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

CN21-4
CN650-5 nAAPNT ADF PCB +5V Original Detection Signal

CN21-5
DETECT 0V
CN650-6 N.C. ADF PCB No Connection

CN21-6
CN650-7 nAB4SN ADF PCB +5V Original Width Detection

CN21-7 Signal
0V
CN650-8 nAA3SN ADF PCB +5V Original Width Detection

CN21-8 Signal
0V
CN650-9 nAADL1 ADF PCB +5V Original Length Detection

CN21-9 Signal
0V
CN650-10 nAADL2 ADF PCB +5V Original Length Detection

CN21-10 Signal
0V
CN650-11 nAB2SN ADF PCB +5V Duplex Eject Detection

CN21-11 Signal
0V
265
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN650-12 nAB1SN ADF PCB +5V Read Point Detection Signal
CN21-12
0V
CN650-13 nAEJC ADF PCB +5V Original Eject Detection

CN21-13 Signal
0V
CN650-14 nAREV ADF PCB +5V ADF Exit Cover Open

CN21-14 Detection Signal
OPEN 0V
CN650-15 nAOAC ADF PCB +5V ADF Cover Open Detection

CN21-15 Signal
OPEN 0V
CN650-16 nAKEEP1 ADF PCB +5V Reversing 1 Guide Solenoid

CN21-16 Control Signal
0V
CN650-17 nAKEEP2 ADF PCB +5V Reversing 1 Guide Solenoid

0V
CN650-18 nAPACHG ADF PCB +5V Release Lever Plate

CN21-18 Solenoid Control Signal
0V
CN650-19 nAPICR ADF PCB +5V Release Lever Plate

CN21-19 Solenoid Control Signal
0V
CN650-20 nSTAMP ADF PCB +5V Stamp Control Signal

CN21-20
0V
CN650-21 nACLH1 ADF PCB +5V Feed 2 Roller Clutch

0V
CN650-22 nACLH2 ADF PCB +5V Paper Feed Roller Clutch

0V
266
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN650-23 nACLH3 ADF PCB +5V Inverting Roller Clutch
0V
CN650-24 nACLOCKA ADF PCB ADF Motor Control Clock

D1 CN21-24 +5V Signal
0V
CN650-25 nASTROAD1 ADF PCB +5V ADF Motor Control Strobe
CN21-25 Signal
0V
CN650-26 pADATA1A ADF PCB ADF Motor Control Signal

CN21-26 +5V
0V
CN650-27 pADATA1B ADF PCB ADF Motor Control Signal

CN21-27 +5V
0V

CN21-28

CN21-29
0V

CN21-30

CN21-31
0V
CN650-32 DAA1 ADF PCB ADF Motor Current Control

+5V
CN21-32 Signal
0V

CN21-33
0V

CN21-34
0V
267
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN650-35 nSADFON ADF PCB +5V ADF Detection Signal
CN21-35 (For i-ADF)
+0V
(For ADF)
CN650-36 nDADFON ADF PCB +5V ADF Option Detection
CN21-36 Signal
0V

CN21-37

CN21-38
0V
CN650-39 +5v ADF PCB +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

CN21-39
CN650-40 +5v ADF PCB +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

CN21-40
CN655
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN655-1 OUTA Scanning Motor Motor Control Signal
-1 +18V
0V
CN655-2 nOUTA Scanning Motor Motor Control Signal

-2 +18V
0V
CN655-3 +24V Scanning Motor +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

-3
CN655-4 OUTB Scanning Motor Motor Control Signal

-4 +18V
0V
CN655-5 +24V Scanning Motor +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

-5
268
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN655-6 nOUTB Scanning Motor Motor Control Signal
-6 +18V
0V
CN656
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN656-1 +24V INV PCB +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
CN1-1
CN656-2 +24V INV PCB +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

CN1-2
CN656-3 nFLON INV PCB Inverter Ground

CN1-3
+24V
0V
CN656-4 MGND INV PCB Ground

CN1-4
0V
CN656-5 MGND INV PCB Ground

CN1-5
0V
CN657
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN657-1 +5VP SNS PCB +5V +5 VDC Power Supply
-1
CN657-2 nANG SNS PCB +5V Platen Cover Angle

-2
ON 0V
CN657-3 GND SNS PCB Ground

-3
0V
CN657-4 nBDOOR SNS PCB +5V Platen Cover Open

-4 Detection Signal
ON 0V
269
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN657-5 nORI Home Position +5V Home Position Detection
Sensor Signal
-1
HOME 0V
CN657-6 GND Home Position Ground

Sensor
-2 0V
CN657-7 LDORI Home Position Photo Sensor DC Drive

Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.2V
CN701
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN701-1 L5V LSU +5V Laser Circuit +5VDC Power
CN2-1 Supply

CN2-2
0V
CN701-3 S/H LSU Sample Hold Signal

+5V(H)
CN2-3
0V(L)
CN701-4 HSYNC LSU Horizontal Synchronous
CN2-4 +5V Signal
0V
CN701-5 LDEN LSU +5V(H) Laser Control

CN2-5
0V(L)
CN701-6 RETRACE LSU Laser Control

+5V
CN2-6
0V
CN2-7
0V
CN701-8 POWCNTV LSU Laser Power Control Signal

CN2-8
+1.1V
270
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN701-9 PMCK LSU +5V(H) Polygon Motor Clock
CN3-1
0V(L)
CN701-10 PMRDY LSU Polygon Motor Ready
+5V
CN3-2 Signal
Ready 0V
CN701-11 PMON LSU +5V Polygon Motor Rotation

CN3-3 Signal
ON 0V
CN701-12 MGND LSU Ground

CN3-4
0V
CN701-13 +24VM LSU +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

CN3-5
CN702
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN702-1 +24VM PS PCB +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
CN500-1
CN702-2 CPWM PS PCB Charge Control DC ON/OFF

CN500-2 +5V PWM
0V
CN702-3 GPWM PS PCB Grid Control ON/OFF PWM
CN500-3 +5V
0V
CN702-4 N.C. PS PCB No Connection
CN500-4
CN702-5 DDCPWM PS PCB Development Control DC

CN500-5 +5V ON/OFF PWM
0V
CN702-6 TPWM PS PCB Transfer Control Transfer
CN500-6 +5V Output
0V
271
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN702-7 TC PS PCB Transfer Control Cleaning
CN500-7 +5V Output
0V
CN702-8 CCRMT PS PCB Charge Leak Detection

CN500-8 +5V Signal
0V
CN702-9 MGND PS PCB Ground

CN500-9
0V
CN702-10 +24V PS/LSU Fan +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

-1
CN702-11 nFNRDTP PS/LSU Fan PS Fan Ready Signal

-2 +5V
0V
CN702-12 MGND PS/LSU Fan Ground

-3
0V
CN702-13 +5VP PS PCB +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

CN12-1

CN12-2

CN12-3

CN12-4
0V

CN12-5
0V

CN12-6
0V
272
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN702-19 ZCRS PS PCB Heater Control Signal
+5V
CN12-7
0V
CN702-20 SSR PS PCB Heater Control Signal
+5V(H)
CN12-8
0V(L)
CN702-21 ACSW PS PCB Fuser Relay
CN12-9 +24V
ON
0V
CN702-22 +24VD1 PS PCB +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

CN12-10
CN703
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN10-1
0V

CN10-2
0V

CN10-3

CN10-4
CN706
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN706-1 +24VM 1st Tray Lift +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Motor
CN706-2 LIFT1 1st Tray Lift 1st Paper Tray Lift Motor
+24V
Motor Signal
ON 0V
273
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CN707
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN707-1 +24VM CST2 PCB +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
CN770-3
CN707-2 MGND CST2 PCB Ground

CN770-4
0V
CN707-3 +5v CST2 PCB +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

CN770-5
CN707-4 GND CST2 PCB Ground

CN770-6
0V
CN707-5 OP3FLT CST2 PCB Option Feed FIFO Latch

CN770-7 +5V
0V
CN707-6 OP3RST CST2 PCB Option Feed FIFO Reset

+5V
CN770-8
Reset 0V
CN707-7 OP3FOT CST2 PCB Option Feed FIFO Output
CN770-9 +5V
0V
CN707-8 OP3FCK CST2 PCB Option Feed FIFO Clock

CN770-10 +5V
0V
CN707-9 OP3FLD CST2 PCB +5V Option Feed FIFO Load
CN770-11
0V
CN707-10 OP3ENB CST2 PCB Option Feed FIFO Enable
CN770-12
+5V (H)
0V (L)
CN707-11 OP3CLK CST2 PCB 3rd Paper Tray Motor Clock

CN770-13 +5V
0V
274
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN707-12 OP3FDIN CST2 PCB Option Feed FIFO Input
CN770-14 +5V
0V
CN707-13 ADF2 CST2 PCB 2nd Paper Tray Feed Roller

+5V ON
CN771-1 Drive Signal
0V
CN707-14 MRCLH2 CST2 PCB 2nd Paper Tray
+5V ON
CN771-2 Intermediate Roller Clutch
Drive Signal
0V
CN707-15 LIFT2 CST2 PCB 2nd Paper Tray Lift Motor
+5V ON
CN771-3 Signal
0V
CN707-16 PCHK2 CST2 PCB 2nd Paper Tray Paper
+5V
0V
CN707-17 CST2 CST2 PCB 2nd Paper Tray Detection

+5V
CN771-5 Signal
0V
CN707-18 UPLIMIT2 CST2 PCB 2nd Paper Tray Paper Level

+5V
CN771-6 Signal
0V
CN707-19 FDPCHK2 CST2 PCB 2nd Paper Tray Paper

+5V(H)
CN771-7 Registration Detection
Signal
0V(L)
CN707-20 JAMDOR2 CST2 PCB 2nd Paper Tray Jam Access

CN771-8 +5V Cover Open Detection
Signal
0V
CN707-21 CSTOP CST2 PCB 2nd Paper Feed Module

0V

CN771-11
275
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN771-12
0V

CN770-15

CN770-16
0V
CN709
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN709-1 PCHK1 No Paper Sensor 1st Paper Tray Paper
+5V
-1 Detection Signal
0V
CN709-2 GND No Paper Sensor Ground

-2
0V
CN709-3 LDPSEN No Paper Sensor Photo Sensor DC Drive

-3 Voltage
+1.2V
CN709-4 UPLIMIT Upper Limit 1st Paper Tray Paper Level

+5V
Sensor Signal
-1
0V
CN709-5 GND Upper Limit Ground

Sensor
-2 0V
CN709-6 LDUPLSEN Upper Limit Photo Sensor DC Drive

Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.2V
CN709-7 CASET 1st Tray Paper Tray Detection Signal

+5V
Detection Sensor (1st Feeder)
-1
0V
CN709-8 GND 1st Tray Ground

Detection Sensor
-2 0V
276
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN709-9 LDCSTSEN 1st Tray Photo Sensor DC Drive
Detection Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.2V
CN709-10 RSEN Registration +5V Registration Sensor Signal

Roller Sensor
-1
0V
CN709-11 GND Registration Ground

Roller Sensor
-2 0V
CN709-12 LDRRSEN Registration Photo Sensor DC Drive

Roller Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.2V
CN712
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN712-1 LDSSN SSN PCB Photo Sensor DC Drive
CN42-1 Voltage
+1.2V
CN712-2 nA3SEN SSN PCB Sheet Bypass Paper Size

+5V
0V
CN712-3 GND SSN PCB Ground

CN42-3
0V
CN712-4 nB4SEN SSN PCB Sheet Bypass B4 Paper

+5V
0V
CN712-5 nA5SEN SSN PCB Sheet Bypass Paper Size

+5V
0V
CN712-6 nPEDSEN Bypass Feed No Sheet Bypass Paper

+5V
Paper Sensor Detection Signal
-1
0V
CN712-7 GND Bypass Feed No Ground

Paper Sensor
-2 0V
277
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN712-8 LDPED Bypass Feed No Photo Sensor DC Drive
Paper Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.2V
CN712-9 nDUPSEN Duplex Sensor ADU Sensor Signal

+5V
-1
0V
CN712-10 GND Duplex Sensor Ground

-2
0V
CN712-11 LDDUX Duplex Sensor Photo Sensor DC Drive

-3 Voltage
+1.2V
CN712-14 nHFPESEN Bypass Feed Bypass Feed Sensor Signal

+5V
Sensor
-1
0V
CN712-15 GND Bypass Feed Ground

Sensor
-2 0V
CN712-16 LDHFPE Bypass Feed Photo Sensor DC Drive

Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.2V
CN715
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN715-1 +24VM Registration +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Roller Clutch
-1
CN715-2 RRCLCNT Registration +24V Registration Roller Drive

Roller Clutch Signal
-2
ON 0V
CN715-3 +24VM Paper Feed +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Clutch
-1
CN715-4 PFCLCNT Paper Feed +24V Paper Feed Clutch Drive

Clutch Signal
-2
ON 0V
278
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN715-5 +24VM Bypass Feed +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Solenoid
-1
CN715-6 HFSOL Bypass Feed +24V Temp Humidity Sensor

Solenoid Signal
-2
ON 0V
CN717
Refer to SC PC Board CN53.
CN719
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN719-1 +24VM Duplex Solenoid +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
CN719-2 nDUXSOL Duplex Solenoid ADU Solenoid Control

+24V
Signal
ON 0V
CN720
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN720-3 +24VM PCL PCB +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
-1
CN720-4 ELPCNT PCL PCB Discharge Lamp

-2 +24V
ON
0V
CN720-5 +24VM Toner Density +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

Sensor
-2
CN720-6 TDREF Toner Density Toner Density Reference

Sensor 9V Sensor
-1
4V
CN720-7 TDSEN Toner Density Toner Density Sensor

Sensor 5V Signal
-3
0V
279
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN720-8 GND Toner Density Ground
Sensor
-4 0V
CN720-12 GND Waste Toner Ground

Sensor
-1 0V
CN720-13 nWTBSEN Waste Toner Toner Waste Container

Sensor +5V Detection Sensor Signal
-2
0V
CN720-14 nTFSEN Waste Toner Toner Waste Sensor

Sensor +5V
-3
0V
CN720-15 LDWTB Waste Toner Photo Sensor DC Drive

Sensor Voltage
-4 +1.2V
CN720-16 LDTF Waste Toner Photo Sensor DC Drive

+1.5V
Sensor Voltage
-5
0V
CN720-17 +5v Humidity Sensor +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

-1
CN720-18 HUMISN Humidity Sensor Temp Humidity Sensor

-2 5V Signal
0V
CN720-19 GND Humidity Sensor Ground

-3
0V
CN720-20 TEMPSN Humidity Sensor Temp Humidity Sensor

-4 5V Signal
0V
CN720-21 +24VM Total Counter +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

-1
CN720-22 nCTCNT Total Counter Counter Drive Signal

-2 +24V
0V
280
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CN721
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN721-1 THERM1 Thermistor Thermistor Output Signal
-1 5V
0V
CN721-2 THERM2 Thermistor Ground

-2
0V
CN721-3 nHEXSEN Paper Exit Paper Exit Sensor Signal

Sensor +5V
-1
0V
CN721-4 GND Paper Exit Ground

Sensor
-2 0V
CN721-5 LDHEX Paper Exit Photo Sensor DC Drive

Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.2V
CN721-10 +24VFL Exit Fan +24V +20 / +24 VDC Power

-1 Supply
CN721-11 nFNRDT Exit Fan Fan Ready Signal

-2 +5V
0V
CN721-12 MGND Exit Fan Ground

-3
0V
CN722
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN722-1 +24VM Toner Bottle +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Motor
-1
CN722-2 BMCNT Toner Bottle Toner Bottle Motor Control

Motor +24V Signal
-2 ON
0V
CN722-3 +24VM Toner Motor +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

-1
281
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN722-4 SMCNT Toner Motor Toner Motor Control Signal
-2 +24V
ON
0V
CN722-5 BTHP Toner Bottle +5V Toner Bottle Position

Home Position Sensor Signal
Sensor
-1 0V
CN722-6 GND Toner Bottle Ground

Home Position
Sensor 0V
-2
CN722-7 LDBTHP Toner Bottle Toner Bottle HP Sensor
Home Position +5V Signal
Sensor
-3 0V
CN723
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN723-1 +24VM Main Motor +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
-1
CN723-2 +24VM Main Motor +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

-2
CN723-3 MGND Main Motor Ground

-3
0V
CN723-4 MGND Main Motor Ground

-4
0V
CN723-5 GND Main Motor Ground

-5
0V
CN723-6 +5v Main Motor +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

-6
CN723-7 nMMON Main Motor +6.5V Main Motor Rotation Control

-7 Signal
0V
282
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN723-8 nMMCK Main Motor Main Motor Clock
-8 +6.5V
0V
CN723-9 F/R Main Motor Direction of Rotation Signal
-9
0V
CN723-10 nMMRDY Main Motor +5V Main Motor Ready Signal

-10
0V
CN726
SPC PCB
Pin No.
CN726-1 +24VM Key Counter +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
CN726-2 KCNT Key Counter Key Counter Option

+24V
0V
CN726-3 GND Key Counter Ground
0V
CN726-4 KCDET Key Counter Key Counter Option

+5V Detection
DETECT
0V
CN726-5 N.C. No Connection
CN726-6 N.C. No Connection
283
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.5.4. PNL1 PC Board
CN220
CN223
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
CN223-1 CSB1 LCD +3.3V Chip Select Signal
0V
CN223-2 RESETB LCD LCD Driver Reset Signal

+3.3V
RESET
0V
CN223-3 RS LCD Register Selection Control

+3.3V Signal
0V
CN223-4 RW_WRB LCD +3.3V LCD Control Signal
0V
CN223-5 E_RDB LCD +3.3V Read/Write Execution

Control Signal
0V
CN223-6 DB0 LCD Data Signal

+3.3V
0V

+3.3V
0V

+3.3V
0V

+3.3V
0V

+3.3V
0V
284
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
+3.3V
0V

+3.3V
0V

+3.3V
0V
CN223-14 VDD LCD +3.3V +3.3 VDC Power Supply
CN223-15 VCL LCD +3.3V LCD Power Supply
CN223-16 VSS LCD Ground
0V
CN223-17 VOUT LCD +12.5V Voltage Converter Input /

Output
CN223-18 C4+ LCD +12.5V Capacitor 4 Positive

Connection Pin for
Converter
CN223-19 C3+ LCD Capacitor 3 Positive

+12.5V Connection Pin for
Converter
+9.5V
CN223-20 C1- LCD Capacitor 1 Negative

Converter
0V

Converter
+3.3V

Converter
+6.3V
285
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
CN223-23 C2- LCD Capacitor 2 Negative
Converter
0V
CN223-24 V1 LCD +6.7V LCD Driver Supply Voltages
CN223-28 V0 LCD +8V LCD Driver Supply Voltages
CN223-29 PS LCD +3.3V Parallel / Serial Data Input

Select Signal
CN223-30 HPMB LCD +3.3V LCD driver Power Control

Signal
CN230
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
CN230-1 LED0 PNL2 PCB PNL LED Control Signal
CN250-1
0V
CN230-2 KIN7 PNL2 PCB PNL Key Signal (Key Line)

+3.3V
CN250-2 Key
Push
0V
CN250-3
0V
286
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
+3.3V
CN250-4 Key
Push
0V
CN250-5
0V
CN230-6 SCN0 PNL2 PCB PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)

+3.3V
CN250-6 Key
Scan
0V
CN250-7
0V

+3.3V
CN250-8 Key
Scan
0V
CN250-9
0V

+3.3V
CN250-10 Key
Push
0V
CN250-11
0V

+3.3V
CN250-12 Key
Push
0V
CN230-13 LEDCT2 PNL2 PCB +5V PNL LED Control Signal
CN250-13
LED ON

+3.3V
CN250-14 Key
Push
0V
CN250-15
LED ON
287
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
+3.3V
CN250-16 Key
Push
0V
CN250-17
LED ON
CN230-18 BAT+ PNL2 PCB +3V Lithium Battery

CN250-18
CN231
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
CN231-1 +SLP PNL2 PCB +5VP Energy Saver Lamp LED
CN251-1 Power Supply
CN231-2 nLEDSLP PNL2 PCB Energy Saver Lamp LED

CN251-2 +5VP Control Signal
0V
CN231-3 nSLPKY PNL2 PCB Energy Saver Key Signal

CN251-3 +3.3V
PUSH
0V

CN251-4
0V

CN251-5
LED ON
CN231-6 BZ+ PNL2 PCB +12V Buzzer Signal (+)

CN251-6 (+24V) +24V: Loud

CN251-7
LED ON
CN231-8 BZ- PNL2 PCB Buzzer Signal

CN251-8 +12V +24V: Loud
(+24V)
288
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
CN251-9
0V

+3.3V
CN251-10 Key
Scan
0V
+3.3V
CN251-11 Key
Push
0V
+3.3V
CN251-12 Key
Push
0V
CN232
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
+3.3V
CN252-1 Key
Scan
0V
+3.3V
CN252-2 Key
Scan
0V
+3.3V
CN252-3 Key
Scan
0V
+3.3V
CN252-4 Key
Scan
0V
+3.3V
CN252-5 Key
Push
0V
CN232-6 N.C. PNL3 PCB No Connection
CN252-6

+3.3V
CN252-7 Key
Push
0V
289
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
+3.3V
CN252-8 Key
Push
0V
+3.3V
CN252-9 Key
Push
0V
+3.3V
CN252-10 Key
Push
0V
CN233
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
CN233-1 +DAT PNL3 PCB DATA Lamp LED Power
CN253-1 +24V Supply
0V
CN233-2 N.C. PNL3 PCB No Connection

CN253-2
CN233-3 +ALM PNL3 PCB ALARM Lamp LED Power

CN253-3 +24V Supply
0V

+3.3V
CN253-4 Key
Push
0V
CN233-5 +ACT PNL3 PCB ACTIVE Lamp LED Power
CN253-5 +24V Supply
0V

+3.3V
CN253-6 Key
Push
0V
CN233-7 nLEDACT PNL3 PCB ACTIVE Lamp LED Control
CN253-7 +3.3V Signal
0V

+3.3V
CN253-8 Key
Push
0V
290
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
CN233-9 nLEDALM PNL3 PCB ALARM Lamp LED Control
0V

CN253-10
LED ON
CN233-11 nLEDDAT PNL3 PCB DATA Lamp LED Control

0V

CN253-12
0V

CN253-13
LED ON

CN253-14
0V

CN253-15
LED ON

CN253-16
0V

CN253-17
LED ON

CN253-18
LED ON
CN234
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
+3.3V
CN280-1 Key
Push
0V
291
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
+3.3V
CN280-2 Key
Push
0V
+3.3V
CN280-3 Key
Push
0V
+3.3V
CN280-4 Key
Push
0V
+3.3V
CN280-5 Key
Push
0V
+3.3V
CN280-6 Key
Push
0V
+3.3V
CN280-7 Key
Push
0V
+3.3V
CN280-8 Key
Scan
0V
+3.3V
CN280-9 Key
Push
0V
+3.3V
CN280-10 Key
Scan
0V
+3.3V
CN280-11 Key
Scan
0V
+3.3V
CN280-12 Key
Scan
0V
CN234-13 nOPT PNL4 PCB PNL4 Detection
CN280-13 +3.3V 0V: Detection
0V
292
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
PNL1 PCB
Pin No.
CN280-14
0V
293
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.5.5. PS PC Board
CN10
Refer to SPC PC Board CN703.
CN11
CN12
CN500
294
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.5.6. ADF PC Board
CN21
CN22
ADF PCB
Pin No.
CN22-1 OUTA ADF Motor +24V Motor Control Signal
-1
0V
CN22-2 +24V ADF Motor +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
-2
CN22-3 IOUTA ADF Motor +24V Motor Control Signal

-3
0V
CN22-4 OUTB ADF Motor +24V Motor Control Signal
-4
0V
CN22-5 +24V ADF Motor +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
-5
CN22-6 IOUTB ADF Motor +24V Motor Control Signal

-6
0V
CN22-7 +24VOPF ADF Roller +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Clutch
-1
CN22-8 nCCLH2 ADF Roller ADF Roller Clutch Control

Clutch +24V Signal
-4
ON
0V
CN22-9 +24VOPF Feed 2 Roller +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Clutch
-1
CN22-10 nCCLH1 Feed 2 Roller Feed 2 Roller Clutch

Clutch +24V Control Signal
-4
ON
0V
295
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CN24
ADF PCB
Pin No.
CN24-1 +24VOPF Inverting Roller +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Clutch
-1
CN24-2 nCCLH3 Inverting Roller +24V Inverting Roller Clutch

Clutch Control Signal
-4
ON 0V
CN25
ADF PCB
Pin No.
CN25-1 +24VOPF Stamp Solenoid +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
CN25-2 nASTAMP Stamp Solenoid +24V Stamp Control Signal
ON 0V
CN26
ADF PCB
Pin No.
CN26-1 +24VOPC Release Lever +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Plate Solenoid
-1
CN26-2 nAPACHG Release Lever +24V Release Lever Plate

Plate Solenoid Solenoid Control Signal
-2
ON 0V
CN26-3 nAKEEP1 Reversing Guide +24V Reversing 1 Guide Solenoid
1 Solenoid Control Signal
-1
ON 0V
CN26-4 +24VOPC Reversing Guide +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
1 Solenoid
-2
CN26-5 nAKEEP2 Reversing Guide +24V Reversing 1 Guide Solenoid

1 Solenoid Control Signal
-3
ON 0V
CN26-6 +24VOPF Duplex 2 Guide +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Solenoid
-1
296
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
ADF PCB
Pin No.
CN26-7 nAPICR Duplex 2 Guide +24V Release Lever Plate
Solenoid Solenoid Control Signal
-2
ON 0V
CN27
ADF PCB
Pin No.
CN27-1 nAAPNT Original +5V Original Detection Signal
Detection Sensor
-1
ON 0V
CN27-2 GND Original Ground

Detection Sensor
-2 0V
CN27-3 +5v Original +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

Detection Sensor
-3
CN28
ADF PCB
Pin No.
CN28-1 nAADL1 Original Lengh +5V Original Length Detection
Sensor 1 Signal
-1
ON 0V
CN28-2 GND Original Lengh Ground

Sensor 1
-2 0V
CN28-3 +5v Original Lengh +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

Sensor 1
-3
CN28-4 nAADL2 Original Lengh +5V Original Length Detection

Sensor 2 Signal
-1
ON 0V
CN28-5 GND Original Lengh Ground

Sensor 2
-2 0V
CN28-6 +5v Original Lengh +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

Sensor 2
-3
297
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
ADF PCB
Pin No.
CN28-7 nAB4S SNS PCB Original Width Detection
CN41-4 +5V(H) Signal
0V
CN28-8 nAA3S SNS PCB +5V Original Width Detection

CN41-2 Signal
0V
CN28-9 GND SNS PCB Ground

CN41-3
0V
CN28-10 +5v SNS PCB +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

CN41-1
CN29
ADF PCB
Pin No.
CN29-1 nAB1SN Read Point Read Point Detection Signal
Sensor +5V
-1
ON
0V
CN29-2 GND Read Point Ground
Sensor
-2 0V
CN29-3 +5v Read Point +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

Sensor
-3
CN29-4 nAOAC ADF Cover Open ADF Cover Open Detection

Detection Sensor +5V Signal
-1
OPEN 0V
CN29-5 GND ADF Cover Open Ground

Detection Sensor
-2 0V
CN29-6 +5v ADF Cover Open +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

Detection Sensor
-3
298
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CN30
ADF PCB
Pin No.
CN30-1 nAEJC Eject Sensor Original Eject Detection
+5V
-1 ON Signal
0V
CN30-2 GND Eject Sensor Ground

-2
0V
CN30-3 +5v Eject Sensor +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

-3
CN30-4 nAB2SN Duplex Eject Duplex Eject Detection

Sensor +5V Signal
-1
ON
0V
CN30-5 GND Duplex Eject Ground
Sensor
-2 0V
CN30-6 +5v Duplex Eject +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

Sensor
-3
CN30-7 nAREV ADF Exit Cover ADF Exit Cover Open

Sensor +5V Detection Signal
-1
OPEN 0V
CN30-8 GND ADF Exit Cover Ground

Sensor
-2 0V
CN30-9 +5v ADF Exit Cover +5V +5 VDC Power Supply

Sensor
-3
299
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.5.7. CST2 PC Board
CN770
CN771
CN772
CST2 PCB
Pin No.
CN807-1

CN807-2
0V

CN807-3

CN807-4
0V
CN772-5 OP3RST CST3 PCB Option Feed FIFO Reset

+5V
CN807-5
Reset 0V
CN772-6 OP3FLT CST3 PCB Option Feed FIFO Latch
CN807-6 +5V
0V
CN772-7 OP3FCK CST3 PCB Option Feed FIFO Clock

+5V
CN807-7
Reset 0V
CN772-8 CST3 PCB
CN807-8 +5V
0V
CN772-9 OP3ENB CST3 PCB Option Feed FIFO Enable

CN807-9
+5V (H)
0V (L)
CN772-10 OP3FLD CST3 PCB +5V Option Feed FIFO Load

CN807-10
0V
300
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CST2 PCB
Pin No.
CN772-11 OP3FDIN CST3 PCB Option Feed FIFO Input
CN807-11 +5V
0V

CN807-13

CN807-14
0V
CN773
CST2 PCB
Pin No.
Clutch
-1
CN773-2 ADF2 Paper Feed +24V 2nd Paper Tray Feed Roller
Clutch Drive Signal
-2
ON 0V
CN773-3 +24VM Intermediate +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Roller Clutch
-1
CN773-4 MRCLH2 Intermediate +24V 2nd Paper Tray

Roller Clutch Intermediate Roller Clutch
-2 Drive Signal
ON 0V
CN774
CST2 PCB
Pin No.
CN774-1 +24VM 2nd Tray Lift +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Motor
CN774-2 LIFTM2 2nd Tray Lift +24V 2nd Paper Tray Lift Motor
Motor Drive Signal
ON 0V
301
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CN775
CST2 PCB
Pin No.
CN775-1 PCHK2 No Paper Sensor 2nd Paper Tray Paper
-1 +5V Detection Signal
0V

-2
0V
CN775-3 LDPHK2 No Paper Sensor Photo Sensor DC Drive

-3 Voltage
+1.2V
CN775-4 UPLMT2 Upper Limit 2nd Paper Tray Paper Level

+5V
Sensor Signal
-1
0V

Sensor
-2 0V
CN775-6 LDUPL2 Upper Limit Photo Sensor DC Drive

Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.2V
CN776
CST2 PCB
Pin No.
CN776-1 FDPCHK2 Registration 2nd Paper Tray Paper
Sensor +5V Registration Detection
-1 Signal
0V

Sensor
-2 0V
CN776-3 LDFPCHK2 Registration Photo Sensor DC Drive

Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.2V
302
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CN777
CST2 PCB
Pin No.
CN777-1 nCST2 2nd Tray 2nd Paper Tray Detection
-1
0V
CN777-2 GND 2nd Tray Ground

Detection Sensor
-2 0V
CN777-3 LDCST2 2nd Tray Photo Sensor DC Drive

-3 +1.2V
CN778
CST2 PCB
Pin No.
CN778-1 JAMDOR2 Jam Cover 2nd Paper Tray Jam Access
Sensor +5V Cover Open Detection
-1 Signal
OPEN 0V
CN778-2 GND Jam Cover Ground

Sensor
-2 0V
CN778-3 LDJAM2 Jam Cover Photo Sensor DC Drive

Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.2V
303
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.5.8. CST3 PC Board
CN800
CST3 PCB
Pin No.
CN800-1 PCHK3 No Paper Sensor 3rd Paper Tray Paper
+5V
-1 Detection Signal
0V

-2
0V
CN800-3 LDPHK3 No Paper Sensor Photo Sensor DC Drive

-3 Voltage
+1.2V
CN800-4 UPLIMIT3 Upper Limit 3rd Paper Tray Paper Level

+5V
Sensor Signal
-1
0V

Sensor
-2 0V
CN800-6 LDUPL3 Upper Limit Photo Sensor DC Drive

Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.2V
CN801
CST3 PCB
Pin No.
CN801-1 CST3 3rd Tray 3rd Paper Tray Detection
-1
0V
CN801-2 GND 3rd Tray Ground

Detection Sensor
-2 0V
CN801-3 LDCST3 3rd Tray Photo Sensor DC Drive

-3 +1.2V
304
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CN802
CST3 PCB
Pin No.
CN802-1 JAMDOR3 Jam Cover 3rd Paper Tray Jam Access
Sensor +5V Cover Open Detection
-1 Signal
0V
CN802-2 GND Jam Cover Ground

Sensor
-2 0V
CN802-3 LDJAM3 Jam Cover Photo Sensor DC Drive

Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.2V
CN803
CST3 PCB
Pin No.
CN803-1 FDPCHK3 Registration +5V 3rd Paper Tray Paper
Sensor Registration Detection
-1 Signal
0V

Sensor
-2 0V
CN803-3 LDFPCHK3 Registration Photo Sensor DC Drive

Sensor Voltage
-3 +1.5V
CN804
CST3 PCB
Pin No.
CN804-1 +24VM 3rd Tray Lift +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Motor
CN804-2 nLIFTM3 3rd Tray Lift +24V 3rd Paper Tray Lift Motor
Motor Drive Signal
0V
CN805
CST3 PCB
Pin No.
CN805-1 +24VM 3rd Tray Drive +24V +24 VDC Power Supply
Motor
-1
305
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CST3 PCB
Pin No.
CN805-2 MGND 3rd Tray Drive Ground
Motor
-2 0V
CN805-3 N.C. 3rd Tray Drive No Connection

Motor
-3
CN805-4 P/S 3rd Tray Drive Motor Start/Stop

Motor +5V
-4
0V
CN805-5 LD 3rd Tray Drive Motor Lock Detection Signal

Motor +5V
-5
0V
CN806
CST3 PCB
Pin No.
Clutch
-1
CN806-2 ADF3 Paper Feed +24V 3rd Paper Tray Feed Roller
Clutch Drive Signal
-2
0V
CN806-3 +24VM Intermediate +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

Roller Clutch
-1
CN806-4 MRCLH3 Intermediate +24V 3rd Paper Tray Intermediate

Roller Clutch Roller Clutch Drive Signal
-2
0V
CN808
CST3 PCB
Pin No.
CN770-3

CN770-4
0V
306
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CST3 PCB
Pin No.
CN770-5

CN770-6
0V
CN808-5 N.C. CST2 PCB No Connection

CN770-7

CN770-8

CN770-9

CN770-10

CN770-11

CN770-12

CN770-14
CN808-13 ADF4 CST2 PCB +24V 4th Paper Tray Feed Roller
CN771-1 Drive Signal
ON 0V
CN808-14 MRCLH4 CST2 PCB +24V 4th Paper Tray Intermediate
CN771-2 Roller Clutch Drive Signal
ON 0V
CN808-15 LIFT4 CST2 PCB 4th Paper Tray Lift Motor
CN771-3
+5V Signal
0V
307
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CST3 PCB
Pin No.
CN808-16 PCHK4 CST2 PCB 4th Paper Tray Paper
+5V
0V
CN808-17 CST4 CST2 PCB 4th Paper Tray Detection

CN771-5 +5V Signal
0V
CN808-18 UPLIMIT4 CST2 PCB 4th Paper Tray Paper Level

+5V
CN771-6 Signal
0V
CN808-19 FDPCHK4 CST2 PCB 4th Paper Tray Paper

CN771-7 +5V Registration Detection
Signal
0V
CN808-20 JAMDOR4 CST2 PCB 4th Paper Tray Jam Access

CN771-8 +5V Cover Open Detection
Signal
0V
CN808-21 CSTOP4 CST2 PCB 4th Paper Feed Module

0V

CN771-11

CN771-12
0V

CN770-15

CN770-16
308
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.5.9. FXB PC Board
CN391
FXB PCB
Pin No.
CN391-1 +5VP MJR PC Board +5V +5 VDC Power Supply
CN25-1
CN391-2 GND MJR PC Board Ground

CN25-2
0V
CN391-3 +24V MJR PC Board +24V +24 VDC Power Supply

CN25-3
CN391-4 pCMLD MJR PC Board Line Switching Relay Drive

CN25-4 +5V(H) ON Signal
H : CML On
OFF 0V(L) L : CML Off
CN391-5 nHKOF MJR PC Board External Phone Off-Hook
+5V(H)
H : On Hook
0V(L) L : Off Hook
CN391-6 nCTON MJR PC Board Ring Detection Signal

CN25-6 H: Standby Mode
L: Ringing
CN391-7 AGND MJR PC Board Ground

CN25-7
0V
CN392
FXB PCB
Pin No.
CN392-1 L2 MJR PC Board Line Signal
CN22-1
CN392-3 L1 MJR PC Board Line Signal

CN22-2
309
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CN393
FXB PCB
Pin No.
CN393-1 pSPKOT Speaker +1V Line Dial Tone Signal
-1 (Max)
-1V
(Min)
CN393-2 GND Speaker Ground
-2
0V
310
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
6.5.10. MJR PC Board
CN22
Refer to FXB PC Board CN392.
CN25
Refer to FXB PC Board CN391.
311
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
7 Installation
7.1. Set Up Precautions
Before you begin the installation, read these entire instructions. You must locate an appropriate site (firm
and leveled surface) for the installation. Reading this section assists you with the decision making process.
Machine performance and copy quality is subject to and dependant on environmental conditions.
To maintain good performance, quality, and safe operation, observe the following precautions:
1. For safe operation and to avoid trouble, do not install the system under the following conditions:
• Extremely high or low temperature and humidity.

Ambient conditions Temperature: 50 - 86 °F (10 - 30 °C)
Relative humidity: 30 - 80 %
• Sudden changes in temperature or humidity
• Exposed to direct sunlight
• Dusty environment
• Poorly ventilated location
• Exposed to chemical gases (such as ammonia gas)
• Exposed to strong vibration
• Exposed to direct air current (ex: Air conditioner vent)
2. The weight of the machine (options not included) is as follows:

DP-1520P/1820P/1820E: Approx. 93.26 - 98.33 lb (42.3 - 44.6 kg)
3. The maximum power consumption is 1.3 kW. Depending on the product destination, the wall outlet
must be rated for 120 VAC / 15 Amps or 220-240 VAC / 10 Amps accordingly. If you have doubts
regarding a power source, ensure that a qualified electrician checks the outlet. Do not connect any
other devices to the wall outlet designated for this machine. (Do not use an extension cord)
4. Make sure the outlet is properly grounded. (Do not ground to gas or water pipe)
5. The machine should be installed in a well-ventilated area to minimize the ozone density in the air.
6. This machine has ventilation openings on the side and rear, which must remain unobstructed for safe
operation. The machine should be located at least 3.94 inches (100 mm) from the wall. Obstructing the
ventilation openings could present a fire hazard.
Using the space requirements shown the following page, ensures that the machine has the ventilation
it requires and that you have the space needed for replacing the supplies.
312
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Space Requirements
Main Unit
3.94 in (100 mm)
10.83 in
(275 mm)
21.97 in (558 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)

21.93 in (557 mm)
45.67 in (1160 mm)
16.14 in (410 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
40.67 in (1033 mm)
Main Unit + ADF

3.94 in (100 mm)
10.83 in
(275 mm)
21.97 in (558 mm)
23.54 in (598 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)

47.28 in (1201 mm)
16.14 in (410 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
40.67 in (1033 mm)
Main Unit + i-ADF

3.94 in (100 mm)
10.83 in
(275 mm)
21.97 in (558 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)

24.57 in (624 mm)
48.31 in (1227 mm)
16.14 in (410 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
40.67 in (1033 mm)
313
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
7.2. Unpacking
Visually check the condition and contents of the box for completeness or any shipping damage before
installation.
Remove all filament tapes and the packing materials used to secure the Unit during shipment.
Caution:
Depending on your machine's model, it may weight approximately 93.26 - 98.33 lb (42.3 - 44.6 kg)
without any options. To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper
equipment to lift or move the machine.
No. Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

Platen Cover is Optional for USA and
1 1 Main Unit -----
Canada
2 1 Process Unit -----
3 1 Paper Size Label See Note
4 1 AC Power Cord See Note
5 1 Quick Guide See Note
For Copy & Network Scan Functions
6 1 Operating Instructions CD See Note
Panasonic-DMS and Print Driver
7 1 See Note Includes Operating Instructions
CD
8 1 License Agreement -----
9 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000810 This document
Note:
1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
3. Supplies (Developer, Toner Bottle, and Toner Waste Container) are not included and are sold
separately.
7, 8
3
5, 6
4
9
314
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
7.3. Installation Procedure

Note:
1. Refer to each individual Installation Instructions when installing other Options.
2. The following machine illustrations, depict a DP-1820E with a standard configuration.
3. The scanner is held in place by a Shipping Blue Screw to prevent damage during transit.
Do Not turn the Power Switch ON before unlocking the scanner.
4. The machine is shipped from the factory with the Pressure Roller locked in the opened position to
avoid the possibility of damaging the Pressure Roller.
Do Not turn the Power Switch ON before unlocking the Pressure Roller.
7.3.1. Installation Procedure
<Unlocking the Scanner>
(1) Remove the Protection Strip from the Battery.

(2) Remove the Tape.
(3) Remove 1 Blue Screw.
(4) Store the Blue Screw into the space provided in

the 1st Paper Tray.
<Unlocking the Pressure Roller>

(6) Remove 2 Tapes.
(7) Remove 2 Blue Screws.
315
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(8) Store the Blue Screws into the space provided

in the 1st Paper Tray.
<Preparing the Process Unit>

(9) Remove the Tape.
(10) Unhook 2 Springs as illustrated.
Note:
Do not remove the Protective Sheet and Tape
from the OPC Drum Assembly at this time.

Caution:
hands.
Caution:
(1000 lx).
316
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(13) Release 3 Latch Hooks and remove the

Developer Cover.
(14) Shake the Developer Bottle thoroughly (approx.

30 seconds).
(15) Pour the developer evenly into the developer unit
by turning the Black Gear as illustrated. Make
sure to empty the bottle.
(16) Close the Developer Cover and ensure that 5

Latch Hooks are hooked firmly.
Note:
When closing the Developer Cover, ensure that
the Developer Dispersion Prevention Sheet is on
the outside.
(17) Reinstall the OPC Drum Assembly.

(18) Reattach 2 Springs.
(19) Reconnect the Harness.
317
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(20) Route the Harness under the Harness Shield as

illustrated.
Note:
To prevent damage to the Harness, ensure it is
under the Harness Shield.
<Installing the Process Unit>

(22) Remove 1 Screw.

(23) Remove the Connector Cover.
(24) Carefully remove the Protective Sheet and

Tapes from the OPC Drum Assembly.
Note:
Do not tilt the Process Unit or the Developer will
spill.
318
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(25) Install the Process Unit.
Caution:
that the Left Cover is still open before inserting the
Process Unit into the machine.
Caution:
hands.
(26) Fasten the Process Unit with 1 Screw.

(27) Connect the Harness and reinstall the Connector
Cover and Screw.
<Installing the Toner Bottle>

(28) Shake the Toner Bottle 10 to 15 times to loosen
the contents.
(29) Remove the Tape as illustrated, however, do not
open the Shutter or Toner will spill.
(30) Insert the Toner Bottle into the Hopper Unit.

Align the Toner Bottle Key with the Key
Alignment Channel of the hopper unit. Insert the
Bottle as far as it will go and turn the Toner Bottle
clockwise until it locks in place. (Bottle's Green
Knob is lined up with the "Locked" symbol on the
label)
Caution:
machine.
319
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(31) Install the Toner Waste Container.

(32) Close the Front and the Left Covers.
(33) Load paper into the Paper Tray.
Caution:
Ensure that all filament tapes and packing
materials are removed.
(34) Plug the AC Power Cord and turn the Power

Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the
ON position.
Note:
Perform the following adjustments after the
machine has warmed up and displays:
<For USA and Canada> (Skip to Sect. 7.3.3.)
READY TO COPY
COPIES:001
<For Europe and Other Destinations only>
DP-1820E (**) ***
7.3.2. Setting the Default Destination (For Europe and Other Destinations only)
1. Press “V” or ”/\” arrow keys to select the desired destination.
2. Press the "SET" key.
3. Press the "1" key for YES.
After the machine has warmed up, it displays:
READY TO COPY
COPIES:001
320
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
7.3.3. Toner Density Control (TDC) Adjustment
2. Press the "8" key to enter the F8 Mode (Service Adjustment).
3. Press the "START" key.
4. Press the "0", "9" and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F8 Mode, setting "09" (Toner Density
Adj).
5. Press the "START" key to begin the automatic TDC sensor gain adjustment.
Note:
Do not touch any keys or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle is finished
(approximately 3 minutes). Refer to the Sequence Chart below.
F8-09 (Performed after Developer Installation & Replacement)
TDC Adjust
3 min
7.3.4. OPC Counter Reset

1. Press the "1", "4" and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F8 Mode (Service Adjustment), setting
"14" (OPC Counter Reset).
F8-14 (Performed after OPC Installation & Replacement)
OPC Counter Reset
1-2 sec
3. Press the "STOP" key.

4. Press the "6" and the "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).
5. Write down the contents of F6-21 and 26 onto the memory sheet (included inside the 1st Paper Tray).
F6-21 : TDC Gain Voltage

F6-26 : TDC Judgement Level
6. Press the "STOP" key.

7.3.5. Paper Size setting (Paper Tray) for your customer

1. Press the "FUNCTION" key.
2. Select the "1: GENERAL SETTINGS" and press the "SET" key.
3. Select the "09 KEY OPERATOR MODE", input the 3 Digit Code (default is 000) to enter the Key
Operator Mode and press the "SET" key.
4. Select the "01 PAPER SIZE" and press the "SET" key.
5. Press “V” or ”/\” arrow keys to select a New Paper Size and press the "SET" key.
6. Press the "RESET" key, to exit the General Settings Mode.
321
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
7.3.6. Serial Number Setting for the Maintenance Report
2. Press the "9" key to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).
4. Press the "5" and the "SET" keys.
5. Input the Machine’s Serial Number and press the "SET" key.
6. Press the "STOP" key twice.
7.3.7. Exposure (Standard Adjustment)

Caution:
Before making any adjustments, confirm that the following contents (F6-17, 18 and 19) are set to "0".
DO NOT adjust these settings in the field.
F6-17 : Grid Voltage compensation

F6-18 : Standard Laser Power compensation
F6-19 : Std Bias DC Voltage compensation
Note:
If an exposure adjustment is required during a routine service call, ensure the developer unit is
properly toned before making any adjustments.
2. Press the "2" and the "START" keys to enter the F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).
3. Set the exposure to the center position.
4. Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode.
5. Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N: FQ-SJ1011) and compare the density to the
chart shown below. If it is within specification, skip to step (14).
a. Gray scale “A” should not be visible.
b. Gray scale “2” should be clearly visible.
A Not visible
. . . . . .
. . . . .. . . . . . 1 . (Not visible or hardly visible)
. .
2 Clearly visible
6. Press the "STOP" key to exit the F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).
7. Press the “6” and the "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).
8. Enter F6-50 Mode (T/P Mode Image Density).
9. Press the "SET" key to highlight the current value.
10. Enter a new value (up to 3-digits).
Note:
The “RESET” key is used to change to a Negative or Positive (+/-) value.
(+) : Lighter
(-) : Darker
11. Press the “SET” and “STOP” keys.
12. Enter F2 Mode (Single Copy Test).
13. Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.
Note:
Repeat Steps (3) to (10) until desired density is attained.
F6-49 : T Mode Image Density (Text)
F6-51 : P Mode Image Density (Photo)
322
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8 Options and Supplies

8.1. Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PCL or PS Option Installation
To use PCL (DA-PC180) or PS (DA-MC180) option individually, changing to Type B or Type D SC firmware
is required. The required firmware is on the CD included with the options.
Note:
The DA-EM600 must be installed for the printer controllers above to function. The only time a DA-EM600
is needed is if you are installing the PostScript (PS) or PCL option. There will never be a need for 2 of
these, even if there are other options, such as Fax, added.
Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly
identify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read and follow the Installation Instructions for
the appropriate option.
The firmware for SC and SPC must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update the firmware with
the latest version as a set by referring to the following table.
Firmware Version Table

Standard Firmware PCL Firmware PostScript Firmware
(SC = Type A) (SC = Type B) (SC = Type D)
SC DP-LLNewAxVxxxxx-xx DP-LLNewBxVxxxxx-xx DP-LLNewDxVxxxxx-xx
SPC LLNewSPCAxVxxxxx ← ←
Slot 1 FROM PCB Not Required Required Required
323
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Main Unit Firmware Code Updating Instructions
1. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.
1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the Network Firmware Update Tool OI on the
CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe

Example:
From:
To:

Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).

Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the
Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Transferring Order
\ DP-1520_1820_PU_xxxxxx \ SC_STD \ DP-LLNewAxVxxxxx-xx 1
\ SC_PCL \ DP-LLNewBxVxxxxx-xx 1
\ SC_PS \ DP-LLNewDxVxxxxx-xx 1
\ SPC \ DP-LLNewSPCAxVxxxxxx 2
When you select the Parent Folder, the following
Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders
are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware
Type.
324
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating
through the USB Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.
location.
2. Updating through the USB Port (Alternate Method)

If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.

Setup:

Example:
From:
To:

Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port.
325
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Start the Local Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in
the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the
display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
You must process each firmware file separately in this manner and sequence.
Transferring
Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File
Order
\ DP-1520_1820_PU_xxxxxx \ SC_STD \ DP-LLNewAxVxxxxx-xx DP-LLNewAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1
\ SC_PCL \ DP-LLNewBxVxxxxx-xx DP-LLNewBxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1
DP-LLNewCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2
DP-LLNewCxVxxxxxb.bin 1-3
\ SC_PS \ DP-LLNewDxVxxxxx-xx DP-LLNewDxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1
DP-LLNewExVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2
DP-LLNewExVxxxxxb.bin 1-3
\ SPC \ DP-LLNewSPCAxVxxxxxx LLNewSPCAxVxxxxxx.bin 2
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type
window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by
selecting the Firmware Type.
Note:
2. Please refer to the Firmware Update Tool OI for additional details.
location.
3. Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card (Alternate method)
1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).
3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine.
6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Master Card).
7. The firmware is copied into the machine.
8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.
10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine.
12. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are
other than factory default.
Note:
After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby mode.
Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9
Parameters F9-02-xx.
326
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Caution:
If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to 3.7.8. (Firmware Emergency Recovery)
3.1. Creating a Master Firmware Card

A. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit

Setup:

Example:
From:
To:
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Firmware Card
2. Insert/Remove the Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into/from the machine.
5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port.
(Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.
327
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB)
2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine.
5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup).
6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card.
7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys
simultaneously to return to standby.
9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.
11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.
3.2. Erasing the Master Firmware Card

2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine.
5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts “READY TO PROGRAM PRESS SET TO
START”. Press “STOP”.
standby.
9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.
10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.
328
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.2. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6 (DA-PC180)

8.2.1. Contents
Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Hardware Key ----- PCL KEY
1 Software CD See Note Includes Operating Instructions
1 License Agreement -----
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000816 This document
Note:
8.2.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program
Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then
unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to
prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the
AC Power Cord, if the Fax Option is installed.)
(1) Remove 10 Screws.

(2) Remove the Rear Cover.
(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three

available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on
the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connector is keyed, to prevent damage to
the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as
illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into
the connector if facing the wrong way.
329
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(4) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, reinstall all Harnesses and Covers.
ON position.
(6) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was
disconnected.
(7) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL
Option firmware. Refer to section 8.1 Service
Notes of this manual.
(8) Install the PCL6 Software into the PC with the
Operating Instructions by following the prompts
of the Installation Wizard.
330
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.3. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC180)

8.3.1. Contents

1 Hardware Key ----- PS KEY
1 Software CD See Note Includes Operating Instructions
1 Adobe PostScript 3 Label -----
1 License Agreement ----- For Adobe PostScript Driver
Note:
8.3.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program
Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!


the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connector is keyed, to prevent damage to the
SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as
illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the
connector if facing the wrong way.
331
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

ON position.
disconnected.
(7) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS/PCL
Option firmware. Refer to the attached "Service
Notes".
(8) Install the PS/PCL6 Software into the PC with
the Operating Instructions by following the
prompts of the Installation Wizard.
(9) Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 Label to the Front
Cover as illustrated.
332
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.4. Installing the Network Scanner Module (DA-NS180) for DP1820P/1820E

8.4.1. Contents

1 Hardware Key ----- NWS KEY
1 Key Assembly See Note
Note:
8.4.2. Installation
CAUTION!

(2) Remove 2 Silver Screws.
(3) Remove the Left Scanner Cover.
(4) Remove 2 Shoulder Silver Screws.
(5) Remove the Right Scanner Cover.
(7) Slightly lift the Control Panel Assembly.

(CN220).
333
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(11) Remove the Panel Sub Cover.
(12) Install the Key Assembly into the Control Panel

Assembly.


the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to

ON position.
disconnected.
(19) Install the Panasonic-DMS Software into the PC
with the Operating Instructions by following the
334
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.5. Installing the Internet Fax / E-Mail Module (DA-NF180)

for DP-1820P/1820E
8.5.1. Contents

1 Hardware Key ----- IFX KEY
1 Quick Guide See Note
For Facsimile and Internet FAX/Email
1 Operating Instructions CD See Note
Note:
8.5.2. Installation
CAUTION!


(CN220).
335
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

Assembly.

336
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to

ON position.
disconnected.
(19) Execute Parameter Initialize by following the
steps below.
a) Press “FAX/EMAIL” key.
b) Press "FUNCTION" and then "7" keys.
c) Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”
to enter the “SERVICE MODE”.
d) Press “6“ key or “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to enter “6
RAM INITIALIZE“.
e) Press “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to enter
"PARAMETER INITIALIZE".
f) Press “START” key. Wait approximately 10-20
seconds unit displays "COMPLETED", then
the unit will return to Service Mode.
g) Turn the Power Switch on the Right side of
the machine to the OFF and back to the ON
position to enable the parameter settings.
(20) Install the Internet Fax/Email Software into the
PC with the Operating Instructions by following
the prompts of the Installation Wizard.
Important Note!
The Default setting of Fax Parameter No. 177 “XMT FILE TYPE” for this machine is “2: PDF”, as PDF
has become the industry standard for exchanging documents from computer to computer (Scan-to-Email
feature).
However, this PDF format cannot be used for Internet Faxing (i.e. from an Internet Fax machine to an
Internet Fax machine) as current Internet Fax Specifications do not support PDF file format. Internet
Faxing requires TIFF-F file format. If your customer’s requirements are mainly Internet Faxing, please
change the Fax Parameter No. 177 “XMT FILE TYPE” to “1: TIFF/JPEG”.
If your customer uses both Internet Fax and Scan-to-Email and needs to switch file formats on the fly,
please explain to them how to use the Select Mode (F8-6) “XMT FILE TYPE/NAME” for individual
transmissions. After the transmission is completed, the machine returns to its Default setting.
Refer to the Operating Instructions (For Facsimile and Internet Fax/Email) included on the CD.
337
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
<Change from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>

An additional 800 Stations, 1,000 in total is available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD18) is
installed. When installing the HDD unit, the machine automatically changes the address book configuration
from 200 to 1,000 Stations and the addresses that have been already registered will be copied into the HDD
automatically.
Note:
1) As a precaution, before installing the HDD unit, it is recommended to printout the Address Book
information, copy the data using the Network Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software or
RDS as backup.
2) The address book data in the machine is initialized (erased) when the HDD is removed (except for the
200 addresses that were registered on F-ROM of the SC PC Board prior to HDD installation, they will
be preserved).
3) When the HDD is removed, the registered address book data remains in the HDD. When reinstalling
the HDD again, the registered address book data is still usable in the machine. However, the address
book data will be initialized (erased) if the proper shut-down (Step sequence of turning OFF the Power
Switch) procedure was not followed.
<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data>
The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (using copy and
paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).
Note:
The size and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address
Book.
When installing the Panasonic-DMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the DP-1820P/
1820E.
1) The "DP-1820P/1820E" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.
2) The "DP-1820P/1820E (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.
a) An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of
Fax Address Book is activated on the DP-1820P/1820E.
b) Retrieve the 200 Station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:
1) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management
System\Network MFP Utilities.
2) Click on Network Device Locator.
3) In the Network Device Locator window, select your desired device.
4) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
5) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-1820P/1820E" window appears, under the Address
Book Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.
6) When the 200 Station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on
File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).
7) Then click the OK button.
c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 Stations, using the Service Mode
described above.
d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as
above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-1820P/1820E
(Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).
e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b) and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data
and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again.
(Refer to Help.)
f) Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu
bar. Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully
completed.
338
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.6. Installing the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG180)

for DP-1820P/1820E
8.6.1. Contents

1 FXB PC Board Assembly See Note
1 MJR PC Board Assembly See Note
1 MJR Harness DZFP001630
1 Speaker DZHP010070
1 Speaker Spring DZKP000365
1 Telephone Line Cable See Note
1 TEL Label DZNK005454
1 Line Label DZNK005455
1 Type Approval Label See Note
DZHP000237 For USA/Canadian models
1 Stamp Assembly
DZHP000240 Other Destinations
1 Stamp Unit See Note For ADF
4 Screw XTW3+6LFJR
2 Screw XTB3+8GFJ
1 Quick Guide See Note
For Facsimile and Internet FAX/Email
1 Operating Instructions CD See Note
Note:
1. If also installing the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600), it must be installed first.
8.6.2. Installation
Install the Hardware by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation.
339
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(CN220).

Assembly.
340
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(13) Install the Speaker as illustrated.

(14) Connect the Speaker Harness.
(15) Install the Speaker Spring.

(16) Secure the Speaker Spring with 2 Screws
(XTW3+8GFJ).

(19) Secure the MJR Harness with the Harness

Clamps.
341
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(20) Connect the MJR Harness to the FXB PC Board

(CN22 and CN25).
(21) Install the MJR PC Board Assembly from the

rear of the machine by inserting the Hooks into
the slots on the frame.
(22) Secure the MJR PC Board Assembly with 2
Screws (XTW3+6LFJR).
(23) Connect the MJR Harness.
(24) Install 2 Clamps.

(25) Plug the FXB PC Board into the SC PC Board
with on Board Connector (CN80).
(26) Secure the FXB PC Board with 2 Screws
(XTW3+6LFJR).
(27) Secure the MJR Harness with the Harness

Clamps.
(28) Connect the MJR Harnesses to the DX PC
Board (CN391, CN392 and CN393).
342
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(29) Remove the Lower Protective Tab on the Right

Cover for the LINE connection.
If installing an External Telephone, remove the
upper protective tab as well.
(30) Attach the Line Label and TEL Label to the
Right Cover as illustrated.
(31) Attach the Type Approval Label (specified

destination) to the Rear Cover as illustrated.

ON position.
(34) Connect one end of the Telephone Line Cable
to the LINE Jack on the right side of the
machine, and the other end to the Telephone
Jack on the wall.
<Installing the Stamp Assembly for i-ADF>
(35) Lift the Original Tray Assembly.

(36) Lower the Inverting Guide 2 Assembly.
(37) Install the Stamp Assembly.
(38) Perform Service Mode F6 (No. 69) to adjust the
Stamp Position.
343
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
<Installing the Stamp Assembly for ADF>

(40) Detach the Hook and Loop Fastener on the left
side of the Scanning Pad.
(41) Install the Stamp Unit as illustrated.
(42) Install the Stamp Assembly.
(43) Remove the edge of the Protective Sheet.

(44) Connect the Harness of Stamp Unit.
(45) Place the Harness into the Latch as illustrated.
(46) Reattach the Hook and Loop Fastener on the left
side of the Scanning Pad.
(47) Close the ADF Unit.
(48) Perform Service Mode F6 (No. 69) to adjust the
Stamp Position.
344
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(49) It is not necessary to set the parameter for the Note:

following suffix (Destinations). The Fax Firmware For other destinations, set the Function Parameter
is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware. #005 (Destination Code).
PB : UK 000 : Austria
PF : France 001 : U.K.
PG : Switzerland 002 : Canada
PK : China 003 : Denmark
PM: Germany 004 : Taiwan
PT : Taiwan 005 : Finland
006 : Germany
PU : USA
007 : Netherlands
008 : Italy
009 : Spanish
010 : Hong Kong
011 : Australia
012 : Switzerland
013 : Norway
015 : Portuguese
016 : Ireland
017 : Belgium
018 : Sweden
019 : Turkey
020 : U.S.A.
021 : France
022 : New Zealand
025 : Japan
029 : Poland
030 : Czech
031 : Russia
032 : Greece
033 : Hungary
034 : Indonesia
035 : South Korea
038 : Malaysia
039 : China
045 : Thailand
048 : South Africa
049 : Singapore
050 : Universal
051 : East Euro
345
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(50) Execute Parameter Initialize by following the steps below.
a. Press “FAX/EMAIL” key.
b. Press "FUNCTION" and then "7" keys.
c. Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*” to enter the “SERVICE MODE”.
d. Press “6“ key or “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to enter “6 RAM INITIALIZE“.
e. Press “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to enter "PARAMETER INITIALIZE".
f. Press “START” key. Wait approximately 10-20 seconds. unit displays "COMPLETED", then the unit
will return to Service Mode.
g. Turn the Power Switch on the Right side of the machine to the OFF and back to the ON position to
enable the parameter settings.
(51) Verify the position of the stamp on the document. If it is not within the desired location at the bottom
of the document, you can adjust its position by following the steps below.
a. Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE”, and “3” keys sequentially to enter the Service Mode.
b. Press the "6" and "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters)
c. Press "69” to enter “STAMP POSITION ADJ".
d. Press "START" and enter a number (-50 to 50).
Note:
A positive number moves the stamp position closer to the trail edge of the document, conversely,
a negative number moves it in the opposite direction.
To change the current sign to either +/-, press the "RESET" key. (Default setting = 0; 0.3 mm/step)
e. Press "OK" key twice.
f. Press “FUNCTION” and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
346
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

automatically.
Note:
RDS as backup.
be preserved).
Note:
Book.
1820E.
described above.
(Refer to Help.)
completed.
347
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.7. Installing the Keyboard Option (DA-KB180) for DP-1820P/1820E

8.7.1. Contents

1 Keyboard Unit See Note
1 Keyboard Sheet (English) DZNA001055 Preinstalled
1 Keyboard Sheet (French) DZNA001058
1 Keyboard Sheet (German) DZNA001059
4 Screw DZPA000086
Note:
8.7.2. Installation
Install the Hardware by following the steps below.
CAUTION!

(CN220).
348
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(11) Remove the Control Panel Sub Base Cover.
(13) Replace the preinstalled Keyboard Sheet to the

desired language.
Note:
Alphabet arrangement is dependent on the
destination, and may differ.
349
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(14) Route the Keyboard Harness through the

access hole on the machine.
(15) Install the Keyboard Unit as illustrated.
(16) Secure the Keyboard Unit with 4 Screws.
(17) Connect the Keyboard Harness to CN234 and

Panel Harness to CN220 on the PNL1 PC
Board.
ON position.
disconnected.
350
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(21) Set the parameter for the Keyboard Sheet by following the steps below.
Note:
The parameter can be set whether SCANNER or FAX Mode depends on which Option is installed.
<SCANNER MODE>
a. Press "SCAN/FILE".
b. Press the "FUNCTION", "1" and "SET" keys to enter the SET Mode.
c. Press "2" and "SET" keys.
d. Press "6" key.
e. Press "1", "2" or "3" key to select desired Alphabet arrangement and press "SET" key.
"1" : QWERTY (English)
"2" : QWERTZ (German)
"3" : AZERTY (French)
f. Press "STOP" key.
<FAX MODE>
a. Press "FAX/EMAIL".
b. Press the "FUNCTION" and "7" keys to enter the SET Mode.
c. Press "4" and "SET" keys.
d. Press "64" and "SET" keys.
e. Press "1", "2" or "3" key to select desired Alphabet arrangement and press "SET" key.
"1" : QWERTY (English)
"2" : QWERTZ (German)
"3" : AZERTY (French)
f. Press "STOP" key.
351
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.8. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD18)

8.8.1. Contents

1 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) DZHL000002
1 DC PCB DZEC102176
1 HDD Cover DZJE001207
1 HD Harness DZFP001651
1 HDD2 Harness DZFP001633
1 DC12 Harness DZFP001632
2 Harness Clamp (Small) DZJK000004 Black
4 Harness Clamp (Medium) DZJK000068 White
4 Silver Screw DZPA000093
6 Screw XTW3+6LFJ

Note:
8.8.2. Installation
1. Before installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit, make sure the optional Sorting Image Memory is
installed in the memory socket on the SC PC Board first. At least an additional 16 MB
(DA-SM16B) of Sorting Image Memory is required.
Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Sorting Image Memory (DA-SM16B/64B/28B).
2. Install the Hard Disk Drive Unit by following the steps below.
CAUTION!

352
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(5) Remove the Toner Waste Container.

Caution:
machine.
(7) Remove 1 Screw.

353
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(9) Loosen 1 Screw.


Caution:
Caution:
hands.
Caution:
(1000 lx).

(14) Remove the Front Cover 1.

(16) Remove the Right Cover.
354
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(18) Remove the Right Bracket.
(19) Install the HDD into the Right Bracket as

illustrated.
(20) Secure the HDD with 4 Screws (DZPA000093).

Note:
When securing the HDD, place it at the edge of a
table as illustrated (cover the table to protect it
from scratches).
(21) Install the DC PC Board.

(22) Secure the DC PC Board with 2 Screws
(XTW3+6LFJ).
355
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(23) Install 2 Harness Clamps (Small) and 3

Harness Clamps (Medium).
(24) Connect the HDD2 Harness to the HDD.

(25) Connect the HDD2 Harness to CN143 and
DC12 Harness to CN141 & CN142.
(26) Secure the HDD2 Harness with the 2 Harness
Clamps.
(27) Connect one end of the HD Harness to the HDD.

See Note below.
(28) Secure the HD Harness and DC12 Harness
with the Harness Clamps.
Note:
Correct Incorrect Make sure that the HD Harness is connected to
the HDD correctly as illustrated.
1) The Key on the connector must be facing
Key Key
Upwards.
2) Either connector of the HD Harness will fit into
the HDD. However, the correct one is shown
HDD HDD in the illustration (Harness comes out from the
top of the connector).
356
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(29) Install the HDD Cover.

(30) Secure the HDD Cover with 4 Screws
(XTW3+6LFJ).
(31) Reinstall the Right Bracket Assembly.

(32) Install 1 Harness Clamp (Medium).
(33) Connect the HD Harness to CN59 and DC12

Harness to CN 145 on the SC PC Board.
(34) Secure the HD Harness and DC12 Harness
with the Harness Clamp.
ON position.
disconnected.
357
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CAUTION!
<Step sequence of turning OFF the Power Switch>
After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed
(similar to Windows OS when the power is abruptly interrupted), it is important to follow the step
sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switch on the machine.
1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch
on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER
(Shutdown Mode)", continue to step 2 below.
3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard
Disk Drive Unit and advances into “ENERGY SAVER MODE”.
4. Turn the Power Switch on the Right Side of the machine to the OFF position.
5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect
the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord, if the Fax option
installed.)
6. After finishing the installation of the Hard Disk Drive, please go over the above Power Down
procedure with the customer to avoid the Scan Disk Function from being performed
(indicated by SCANNING HARD DISK message on the display), and customer inquiries
related to abrupt Power Off.
7. Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.

automatically.
Note:
RDS as backup.
be preserved).
Note:
Book.
1820E.
358
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
described above.
(Refer to Help.)
completed.
359
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.9. Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board (DA-EM600)

8.9.1. Contents

1 Expansion F-ROM Board DZEC102137
2 PC Board Support DZJH000084
Note:
8.9.2. Installation
CAUTION!

(3) Remove the Black Pin Protector from Slot 1

(CN62), if it was preinstalled.
(4) Install 2 PC Board Supporters for the Slot 1 on
the SC PC Board.
(5) Install the Program Expansion Board into Slot
1 (CN62) on the SC PC Board and secure with
the Supporters.
Note:
The Program Extension F-ROM Board must
always be installed into Slot 1 (CN62) for the PCL
or PCL/PS Printer Option to function.

ON position.
disconnected.
360
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.10. Installing the Sorting Image Memory 16 / 64 / 128 MB

(DA-SM16B / 64B / 28B)
8.10.1. Contents

DZEC102306 16 MB
1 Image Memory DZEC101919 64 MB
DZEC102307 128 MB
Note:
8.10.2. Installation
CAUTION!

(3) Insert the SDRM PC Board into the Socket on

the SC PC Board as illustrated.
Note:
Make sure to align the notch first and insert the
SDRM PC Board at a 20 - 30° angle into the
memory socket, and then lock it down.

ON position.
disconnected.
361
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.11. Installing the Expansion Flash Memory Card 4/8 MB (UE-410047/410048)

for DP-1820P/1820E
8.11.1. Contents

UE-410047 4 MB
1 Image Memory
UE-410048 8 MB
Note:
CAUTION!
(1) Remove 1 Silver Screw.

(2) Remove the Flash Memory Cover.
(3) Gently insert the Expansion Flash Memory

Card as illustrated.
Caution:
Forcing the card into the slot may cause damage
to the card or machine.
(4) Reinstall the Cover.

Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON
position.
disconnected.
362
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.12. Installing the Accounting Software (DA-WA10) For DP-1820P/1820E

8.12.1. Contents

1 Accounting Software CD See Note Includes Operating Instructions
Note:
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD18) is installed into
the machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions for the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD18).
2. Install the Accounting Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the
3. Set the Key/Dept. Counter function by following the steps below.
1) Press “FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE”, and “3” keys sequentially to enter the Service
Mode.
2) Press the "5" key to enter the F5 Mode (Function Parameters).
4) Press the "4", "2" and "SET" keys sequentially to enter the F5-42 "KEY/DEPT. COUNTER".
5) Press the "2" and "SET" keys to activate the Key/Dept. Counter function.
6) Press the "STOP" key.
Note:
The factory default setting for the Key Operator ID Code is "000", to ensure security it is
recommended to change this code.
To change it:
• While in the Service Mode, press "7" to enter the F7 Mode (Electronic Counter).
• Press the "START" key to select "01 KEY OPERATOR ID CODE".
• Press the "SET" key, and input a 3-digit code.
• Press the "SET" key, and press "STOP" key to exit F7 Mode (Electronic Counter).
7) Press “FUNCTION” and “CLEAR” keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
4. Set the Key/Dept. Code by following the steps below.

1) Press the "FUNCTION" key, press "V" or "/\" arrow keys to select "GENERAL SETTINGS"
and press "SET" key.
2) Press "V" or "/\" arrow keys to select "09 KEY OPERATOR MODE" and input the 3 Digit
Code and press "SET" key to enter the Key Operator Mode.
3) Press "V" or "/\" arrow keys to select "13 DEPT. COUNTER MODE".
4) Press "2" and "SET" keys.
5) Press "V" or "/\" arrow keys to set the Dept. Counter Codes (up to 300).
6) Press the "STOP" key to return to the standby mode.
363
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.13. Installing the Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (DA-AR202)

for DP-1820E
8.13.1. Contents
Inverting Automatic Document Feeder
1 See Note For DP-1820E
(i-ADF)
1 Scanning Pad DZJM000428
2 Hinge Stopper DZJA000726
2 Hinge Cover DZMC000713
2 Hinge Cover 2 DZMA004372 From July 2004 Production
2 ADF Mounting Bracket DZJA000730
1 i-ADF OPS Actuator DZJM001007
1 i-ADF Rear Support Bracket DZJD000035 Not Used
9 Screw XTB3+8J
4 Screws will not be used
8 Screw XTB3+12J
2 Silver Screw XSN4+W10FN
2 Thumb Screw DZPA000064
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000551 This Document

Note:
CAUTION!
(1) Using a Slotted Blade Screwdriver, remove the

OPS Actuator as illustrated.
Note:
Release the latch on the left side of the actuator
with the Slotted Blade Screwdriver.
364
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(2) Install the i-ADF OPS Actuator.
(3) Install 2 ADF Mounting Brackets.

(4) Secure 2 ADF Mounting Brackets with 8 Screws.
(XTB3+12J)
(5) Install 2 Thumb Screws (DZPA000064).

(One for each ADF Mounting Bracket)
Note:
When installing the Thumb Screws, do NOT
tighten them. Leave a clearance of approx. 6-8
mm, as illustrated.
(6) Install the i-ADF onto the ADF Mounting

Brackets.
Note:
a. Set the i-ADF in the direction of the arrow.
b. Align the hallmark on the Right Side of the
Hinge Base and the ADF Mounting Bracket as
illustrated.
(7) Tighten 2 Thumb Screws (DZPA000064).
(8) Install 2 Hinge Cover 2. (From July 2004
Production)
(9) Secure the Automatic Document Feeder with 2
Silver Screws (XSN4+W10FN).
(10) Install 1 Screw (XTB3+8J) on the back of the left
ADF Mounting Bracket from the bottom as
illustrated.
365
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(13) Remove the Protective Sheet.

(14) Bend the Protective Tab on the Rear Cover
approx. 180° towards the inside of the machine
as illustrated.
(15) Connect the i-ADF Harness to CN650 on the

SPC PC Board.
(16) Insert the Harness Clamp into the pre-drilled
hole in the frame (from underneath).
Note:
Do not cut the Harness Clamp (Tie-Wrap) when
servicing. Push the release clip on the side of the
clamp to remove it.
(17) Before proceeding, install the other options first.

If finished, close the i-ADF.
(18) Reinstall the Rear Cover.
(19) Secure the Rear Cover with 10 Screws.
ON position.
disconnected.
366
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(22) Using a 20 lb (80 g/m2) lined original, make a

< Example of Printed Image > copy from the ADF to check the feed alignment.
Copy Image Leading Edge
Skewed to
the right
(23) Check the alignment of the Copy Image. If the

Copy Image is skewed either to the Right or Left,
adjust the ADF's alignment as follows:
a. Loosen 5 Screws securing the ADF.
b. Using the Hallmark on the Right Hinge Base
and the ADF Mounting Bracket as a guide,
shift the ADF position by following the
procedure below:
• When the Copy Image is skewed to the
right, shift the ADF slightly toward the
front of the machine.
• When the Copy Image is skewed to the
left, shift the ADF slightly toward the rear
of the machine.
c. Tighten the 5 Screws loosened in step (a).
d. Repeat step (22) to recheck the feed
alignment and readjust the ADF position as
needed.
(24) Install 2 Hinge Stoppers.
(25) Secure 2 Hinge Stoppers with 4 Screws
(XTB3+8J).
(26) Install 2 Hinge Covers.

Note:
When installing the Hinge Covers, make sure that
a Hinge Film is placed inside of each Hinge Cover.
367
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(27) Peel off 6 adhesive strip protectors from the

Scanning Pad.
(28) Place the Scanning Pad on the glass aligning it
on the upper left corner, keeping 1mm space as
illustrated.
Note:
Failure to install the Scanning Pad correctly may
cause a Black vertical, horizontal (or both) line(s)
to appear on the copies in the Double Exposure
Copy Mode. Upon completing the i-ADF
installation, verify that the Double Exposure
operation.
(29) Close the i-ADF.

Note:
Reopen the i-ADF Unit and push the Scanning
Pad gently to glue it properly.
(30) Perform Service Mode F6 (No. 71, 72, 73, 90,

91, 92, 93 and 94) to adjust the i-ADF Scanning
Position.
368
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Printed Adjustment Adjustment

Document Image Amount Remarks
No. 90 / 71 0.05mm
A
1-Side / 2-Side 1 Point
ADF Detection
Timing
(ADF Image Read
Start Position
Paper
Travel
A 0.05mm
Adjustment) A 1 Point
No. 91 / 72 0.3mm
1-Side / 2-Side
ADF Original 1 Point
Leading Edge
Shadow of
Registration Document
0.3mm
(Original Lead Paper Leading Edge
Edge Detection Travel Rebooting is

Timing Adjustment) Void 1 Point not necessary
to enable the
No. 92 / 73 Parameter
0.3mm
Setting.
1-Side / 2-Side
ADF Original 1 Point
Trailing Edge
Shadow of
Registration Document
Paper Leading Edge
0.3mm
(Original Trail
Edge Detection Travel
Timing Adjustment) 1 Point
Void
No. 93 / 94 0.1%
1-Side / 2-Side Reduced
Magnification 1 Point
Ratio (Top Feed)
(Ratio Adjustment 0.1%
when the scan Enlarged
is made) 1 Point
< When Adjusting the ADF Unit >

Adjust the ADF Unit to scan the lined part
(inside of the margin 1.5 - 2.5mm)
on the document as shown on the right.
Image
Data
369
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Caution:
any adjustments.
License
Driver's
Platen
Driver's Driver's
License License
Adjust with F6-63
Driver's Driver's
License License
Adjust with F6-64
Note:
standby.
370
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.14. Installing the Automatic Document Feeder (DA-AS181)

8.14.1. Contents

1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) See Note
2 Angle Plate DZJA000858
1 Scanning Pad DZHP006374
2 Screw DZPB000007
4 Screw XTB3+12J
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000523 This Document
Note:
CAUTION!
(1) Install the Automatic Document Feeder into

the 2 Mounting Holes.
(2) Secure the ADF with 4 Screws (XTB3+12J).

371
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(5) Remove the Protective Sheet.

(6) Bend the Protective Tab on the Rear Cover
approx. 180° towards the inside of the machine
as illustrated.
(7) Connect the ADF Harness to CN650 on the

SPC PC Board.
(8) Insert the Harness Clamp into a pre-drilled hole
in the frame (from underside).
Note:
Do not cut the Harness Clamp (Tie-Wrap) when
servicing. Push the release clip on the side to
remove it.
(9) Reinstall the Rear Cover.

(10) Secure the Rear Cover with 10 Screws.
Note:
Align the ADF if required by following the steps
below.
(A) Release 4 Screws.
(B) Adjust the right side of the ADF and the ADF
Mounting Bracket as illustrated.
(C) Secure the ADF with 4 Screws.
372
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

Scanning Pad.
(12) Place the Scanning Pad on the glass,
aligning with the upper left corner, keeping 1mm
space as illustrated. (Hook and Loop Fastening
Tape positioned to the Left Side of machine)
Note:
Failure to install the Scanning Pad correctly may
cause a Black vertical, horizontal (or both) line(s)
to appear on the copies in the Double Exposure
Copy Mode. Upon completing the ADF installation,
verify that the Double Exposure operation.
(13) Close the ADF.

Note:
Reopen the ADF Unit and push the Scanning Pad
gently to glue it properly.
(14) Install 2 Angle Plates.

(15) Secure 2 Angle Plates with 2 Screws
(DZPB000007).
ON position.
disconnected.
Note:
When installing the ADF Unit, set the Default
Value of Sort Copy Mode to “OFF”.
(18) Copy an Original using the ADF.
<Check the alignment of the Original's copy.

If the Copy Image is skewed, adjust the ADF's
alignment as follows>
(19) Open the ADF Cover and release the Stopper.
(20) Open the ADF and release 2 Latch Hooks under

the feeder.
373
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(21) Remove the ADF Front Cover.

(22) Remove 1 Screw and turn the Adjusting
Bracket counter-clockwise.
(23) If the Copy Image is Skewed to the right, set the

<Example of Printed Image> Adjusting Bracket to the right and secure it with 1
Copy Image
Screw.
Leading Edge
Right
Skewed to
the right
(24) If the Copy Image is Skewed to the left, set the

<Example of Printed Image> Adjusting Bracket to the left and secure it with 1
Copy Image Screw.
Leading Edge
(25) Perform Service Mode F6 (No. 90, 91, 92 and
Left
93) to adjust the ADF Scanning Position.
Skewed to
the left
374
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Printed Adjustment Adjustment

Document Image Amount Remarks
No. 90 0.05mm
A
ADF Detection 1 Point
Timing
(ADF Image Read
Start Position Paper
Travel
A 0.05mm
Adjustment)
A 1 Point
No. 91 0.3mm
ADF Original
Leading Edge 1 Point
Registration
Shadow of
(Original Lead Document
0.3mm
Edge Detection Paper Leading Edge
Timing Adjustment) Travel Rebooting is

Void 1 Point not necessary
to enable the
No. 92 Parameter
0.3mm
Setting.
ADF Original
Trailing Edge 1 Point
Registration
Shadow of
Document
(Original Trail Paper Leading Edge
0.3mm
Edge Detection Travel
Timing Adjustment) 1 Point
Void
No. 93 0.1%
ADF Magnification Reduced
Ratio (Top Feed) 1 Point
(Ratio Adjustment
when the scan 0.1%
is made) Enlarged
1 Point
< When Adjusting the ADF Unit >

Adjust the ADF Unit to scan the lined part
(inside of the margin 1.5 - 2.5mm)
on the document as shown on the right.
Image
Data
375
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Caution:
any adjustments.
License
Driver's
Platen
Driver's Driver's
License License
Adjust with F6-63
Driver's Driver's
License License
Adjust with F6-64
Note:
standby.
376
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.15. Installing the 2nd/4th Paper Tray (DA-DS184), 3rd Paper Tray
(DA-DS185), and the Plain Stand
8.15.1. Contents
<DA-DS184> 2nd/4th Paper Tray (4th Paper Tray for DP-1820P/1820E only)

1 2nd/4th Paper Tray Unit -----
1 Paper Size Label DZNK005417
3 Screw XTB3+8GFJ
2 Screw XTW3+6LFJ
<DA-DS185> 3rd Paper Tray for DP-1820P/1820E only

1 3rd Paper Tray Unit -----
1 Paper Size Label DZNK005417
3 Screw XTB3+8GFJ
2 Screw XTW3+6LFJ
<DA1D18A / DA1D18B / DA1D18C> Plain Stand for USA and Canada only

For 1-Paper Tray
Plain Stand (DA1D18A) -----
Configuration
For 2-Paper Tray
1 Plain Stand (DA1D18B) -----
Configuration
For 3/4-Paper Tray
Plain Stand (DA1D18C) -----
Configuration
3 Joint Bracket A -----
1 Joint Bracket B (Front Left) -----
3 Screw -----
6 Screw -----
377
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
<DA-DA188-PE / DA-DA189-PE / DA-DA190-PE / DA-DA191-PE >
Plain Stand for Other Destinations

For 1-Paper Tray
Plain Stand (DA-DA188-PE) -----
Configuration
For 2-Paper Tray
Configuration
1
For 3-Paper Tray
Configuration
For 4-Paper Tray
Configuration
3 Joint Bracket A DZJA001451
1 Joint Bracket B (Front Left) DZJA001452
3 Screw XTB3+8GFJ
6 Screw XTW3+6LFJ

Note:
3. The following illustrations and instructions are for the DP-1820E with a 4-Paper Tray
configuration. For 2 or 3-Paper Tray configuration skip the indicated steps.
8.15.2. Installing the 2nd, 3rd and 4th Paper Trays
CAUTION!
(1) Install 4 Joint Brackets as illustrated.

(2) Secure each Joint Bracket with 1 Screw
(XTW3+6LFJ).
378
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
<Bottom Paper Tray Unit>

(4) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover.
(5) Place the Paper Tray Unit onto the Plain Stand.
(6) Slide the Paper Tray out of the unit.
(7) Secure the Paper Tray Unit with 5 Screws
(XTW3+6LFJ, XTB3+8GFJ).
For a 3-Paper Tray Configuration, skip to Step

(19).

(30).
<3rd Paper Tray Unit>


(11) Remove 2 Brackets.
379
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(12) Place the 3rd Paper Tray Unit onto the 4th
Paper Tray Unit.
(13) Slide the 3rd Paper Tray out of the unit.
(14) Secure the 3rd Paper Tray Unit with 5 Screws
(15) Remove the Harness from Clamps of the 4th

Paper Tray Unit.
Note:
Close the right clamp and leave the left clamp
open.
Caution:
Ensure that the Black Wire is on the Left Side,
and that it connects to Pin 1 of the female
connector as illustrated.
Inserting the connector upside-down, may damage
the machine's SPC or CST PC Board.
(16) Route the 4th Paper Tray Unit's Harness through

the access hole at the bottom of the 3rd Paper
Tray Unit as illustrated
(17) Connect the Harness of the 4th Paper Tray Unit
to CN808 on the CST3 PC Board of the 3rd
Paper Tray Unit.
(18) Secure the Harness with the Clamp and Edge
Saddle while adjusting the harness length.
380
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
<2nd Paper Tray Unit>


(23) Place the 2nd Paper Tray Unit onto the 3rd
Paper Tray Unit.
(25) Secure the 2nd Paper Tray Unit with 5 Screws
(26) Remove the Harness from Clamp of the 3rd

Paper Tray Unit.
Note:
Close the clamp.
381
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Caution:
(27) Route the 3rd Paper Tray Unit's Harness through

the access hole at the bottom of the 2nd Paper
Tray Unit as illustrated
(28) Connect the Harness of the 3rd Paper Tray Unit
to CN772 on the CST2 PC Board of the 2nd
Paper Tray Unit.
(29) Secure the Harness with the Edge Saddle.


382
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(34) Place the machine onto the 2nd Paper Tray

Unit.
Caution:
The machine weights approximately 93.26 - 98.33
lb (42.3 - 44.6 kg). To prevent injuries, use the
appropriate number of personnel and the proper

(36) Secure the machine with 5 Screws
(37) Remove the Harness from Clamps of the 2nd

Paper Tray Unit.
Note:
Close the clamps.
Caution:
(38) Route the 2nd Paper Tray Unit's Harness

through the access hole at the bottom of the
machine Unit as illustrated
(39) Connect the Harness of the 2nd Paper Tray Unit
to CN707 on the SPC PC Board.
(40) Secure the Harness with the Clamps and Edge
Saddle.
383
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(42) Attach the Paper Size Label(s) onto the 2nd/

3rd/4th Paper Tray(s) as illustrated.
ON position.
disconnected.
384
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.16. Installing the Platen Cover (DA-UC200) for PU

8.16.1. Contents

1 Platen Cover DZMA002394
1 Scanning Pad DZJM000428
2 Platen Hinge DZMH000013
4 Screw XTB3+12J
Note:
(1) Install 2 Platen Hinges.
(2) (1) (2) Secure the Platen Hinges with 2 Screws each.
(2)
(1)
(3) Install the Platen Cover.

(4) Place the Scanning Pad on the glass aligning it
(3)
with the upper left corner.
Scanning Pad.
(4)
(6) Close the Platen Cover.
(5) x6
Note:
Reopen the Platen Cover and push the
Scanning Pad gently to glue it properly.
385
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.17. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater Kit (DZTQ000074)

(Supplied as a Service Part)
8.17.1. Contents

1 1 RLB PC Board Assembly See Note
2 1 PTC-AC Harness 1 DZFP001639
5 1 RLB Harness DZFP001653
6 1 Heater FFPCP0034
7 2 Dehumidifier Heater See Note
8 1 Heater Bracket FFPKD07791
9 2 Dehumidifier Heater Bracket DZJA001439
10 1 Harness Bracket DZJA001438
11 1 Heater Switch Assembly See Note
12 1 Switch Label DZNK005284
13 1 Heater Main Label DZNK005283
14 4 Clamp DZJK000068
19 1 Screw B3X6TTS-RP
20 7 Screw XTW3+6LFC
- 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000818

Note:
14
6
1
7
15
2 8
16
9
3
17
10
4 18
11
19
12
5
20
13
386
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
CAUTION!



(CN220).

(13) Remove the Rear Platen Cover and Left Platen
Cover.
(14) Remove the Platen (L) Glass and Scanning (S)
Glass.
387
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E


Caution:
machine.

(20) Loosen 1 Screw.

388
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

Caution:
Caution:
hands.
Caution:
(1000 lx).



(29) Remove the Right Bracket.
389
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(31) Remove the Front Left Cover.
(32) Remove the Inner Cover.

(34) Remove the Bottle Holder.
(35) Remove the Toner Spill Tray as illustrated.

(37) Remove the Main Switch.
(38) Release the Harness from 3 Harness Clamps.
(39) Install the RLB PC Board Assembly.

(40) Secure the RLB PC Board Assembly with 2
Screws.
390
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(41) Install 3 Clamps (DZJK000068) and 1 Black

Clamp(DZJK000004).
(42) Connect one end of the RLB Harness to CN171

on the RLB PC Board.
(43) Connect other end of the RLB Harness to CN2
on the PS PC Board.
(44) Secure the RLB Harness with the Harness
Clamp.
(45) Mount the Heater onto the Heater Bracket.
(46) Install 3 Clamps (DZJK000023).
391
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(47) Install 8 Clamps (DZJK000023) and 1 Clamp

(DZJK000068).
(49) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 3 to CN173 on

the RLB PC Board.
(50) Route the PTC-AC Harness 3 through the holes
in the frame as illustrated.
(51) Secure the PTC-AC Harness 3 with 6 Harness
Clamps.
(52) Route the PTC-AC Harness 3 through the hole

Clamps.
392
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(54) Install the Heater Assembly.

(55) Secure the Heater Assembly with 1 Screw.
(56) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 3 to the Heater
Assembly.
Clamps.
(58) Secure the PTC-AC Harness 3 with the Harness

Clamp.
Caution:
Do not remove the Dummy Plug, if the
Dehumidifier Heater Kit is not installed in the
Paper Tray.
(59) Slide the Scanner Unit.
(60) Mount the Dehumidifier Heater onto the

Dehumidifier Heater Bracket.
393
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(61) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 1 to CN172 on

the RLB PC Board
Clamps.
(64) Route the PTC-AC Harness 1 as illustrated.

Clamps.

Clamp.

Clamps.
394
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(70) Install the Clamp (DZJK000046).

Bracket and Harness Clamp.
(72) Secure the Harness Bracket with 1 Screw.
Caution:
Trim the excess length of the PTC-AC Harness 1
on the Panel Side.

(74) Remove the CCD Cover.
(75) Install the Clamp (DZJK000045).

(76) Install the Dehumidifier Heater Assembly.
(77) Secure the Dehumidifier Heater Assembly with
1 Screw.
the Harness Clamp.
(79) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 1 to the
Dehumidifier Heater Assembly.

395
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(81) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 2 to PTC-AC

Harness 1.
Clamp.

Bracket.
(84) Install the Dehumidifier Heater Assembly.
1 Screw.
(86) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 2 to the
Dehumidifier Heater Assembly.
(87) Connect the Harness to Heater Switch Assembly

as illustrated.
(88) Install the Heater Switch Assembly.
(89) Secure the Heater Switch Assembly with 2
Screw.
(90) Cut the Protective Tab on the Right Cover.

(91) Attach the Heater Main Label and Switch Label
to the Right Cover as illustrated.
ON position.
disconnected.
396
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.18. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater Kit for Paper Tray (DZHP009959)
8.18.1. Contents

2 1 Heater FFPCP0034
3 1 Heater Bracket DZJE001205
4 1 Heater Cover DZJE001206
7 2 Edge Saddle DZJK000017
8 3 Screw B3X6TTS-RP
- 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000820
Note:
1
4
2
6
7
3
397
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Before installing the Dehumidifier Heater Kit for Paper Tray (DZHP009959), make sure the
Dehumidifier Heater Kit (DZTQ000074) is installed in the unit first.
CAUTION!


(5) Disconnect the Harness on the SPC PC Board

(CN707).
(6) Release the Harness from 2 Harness Clamps
and Edge Saddle.
(7) Route the Harness through a hole on the frame.
398
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(10) Separate the 2nd Paper Tray from the machine.
Caution:
(11) Mount the Heater onto the Heater Bracket.
(12) Install 3 Clamps (DZJK000023) and 1 Edge

Saddle.
(13) Secure the Heater Assembly with 1 Screw.

(14) Install the Heater Assembly.
399
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(15) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 4 to the Heater

Assembly.
(16) Insert 2 Harness Clamp of the PTC-AC Harness
4 into a pre-drilled hole in the frame.
Clamps and Edge Saddle.
(18) Install the Heater Cover.

(19) Secure the Heater Cover with 2 Screws.

Clamp.

(54).

400
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(CN772).
(25) Release the Harness from the Edge Saddle.

(29) Separate the 3rd Paper Tray from the 2nd
Paper Tray.
(30) Install the Heater, refer to Steps (11) - (21).

(47).


(CN808).
(34) Release the Harness from the Edge Saddle.
401
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(36) Slide the 3rd Paper Tray out of the unit.

(38) Separate the 4th Paper Tray from the 3rd Paper
Tray.
(39) Install the Heater, refer to Steps (11) - (21).
(40) Replace the 3rd Paper Tray Unit onto the 4th
Paper Tray Unit.
(41) Secure the 3rd Paper Tray Unit with 5 Screws
(42) Remove the Dummy Plug.

(43) Install 1 Edge Saddle.

(45) Connect the PTC-AC Harness 4.
Clamp and Edge Saddle.
(47) Place the 2nd Paper Tray Unit onto the 3rd
Paper Tray Unit.
(48) Secure the 2nd Paper Tray Unit with 5 Screws
402
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(50) Install 1 Edge Saddle.

(54) Place the machine onto the 2nd Paper Tray

Unit.
Caution:
(55) Secure the machine with 5 Screws


(57) Remove the Bracket.
403
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(59) Install 1 Clamp (DZJK000023) and 1 Edge
Saddle.

ON position.
disconnected.
404
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.19. Installing the Mechanical Counter (DZTK000002)

CAUTION!


Caution:
machine.
405
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(5) Remove 1 Screw.

(7) Loosen 1 Screw.


Caution:
Caution:
hands.
Caution:
(1000 lx).

406
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

(15) Remove the Inner Cover.

(17) Remove the PS Cover.
Note:
When reinstalling the PS Cover, ensure that the
PS Cover is installed into the Ground Plate as
illustrated.
(18) Install the Mechanical Counter to the machine.
(19) Connect the MC Harness to the Mechanical

Counter.
407
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(20) Cut the Protective Tab on the Front Cover 1.

ON position.
disconnected.
408
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.20. Installing the Key Counter Harness Kit (DA-KH180)

8.20.1. Contents
Note:
The Key Counter is sold separately.

1 KEY Harness DZFP001902
1 Counter Guide DZJB000463
1 Key Counter Base PJUIC0218Z
1 Key Counter Cover PJUIC0219Z
1 Key Counter Front Cover PJUIC0221Z
3 Clamp DZJK000070
6 Screw XTB3+6FFJ-RP
2 Screw XTW3+6LFJ
2 Screw XSB4+10FJ

Note:
CAUTION!


(9) Remove the Rear Scanner Cover.
409
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E


Caution:
machine.

(15) Loosen 1 Screw.

410
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E

Caution:
Caution:
hands.
Caution:
(1000 lx).


(23) Install the Counter Guide.

(24) Secure the Counter Guide with 2 Screws
(XTW3+6LFJ).
411
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(25) Connect the KEY Harness to CN726 on the

SPC PC Board.
(26) Install 3 Clamps.

(27) Secure the KEY Harness with 4 Harness
Clamps and 1 Edge Saddle.
(28) Cut the Protective Tab on the Right Cover.
(29) Reinstall the Right Cover.

Caution:
Route the KEY Harness through the hole on the
Right Cover.
412
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(30) Install the Protective Tab that was cut Step (28).
(31) Install the Key Counter Base.

Caution:
Route the KEY Harness through the hole on the
Key Counter Base.
(32) Secure the KEy Counter Base with 2 Screws

(XSB4+10FJ).
(33) Insert the Harness Clamp into the pre-drilled

hole in the Key Counter Base (from underneath).
(34) Install the Key Counter.

(35) Secure the Key Counter with 2 Screws
(XTB3+6FFJ-RP).
413
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(36) Connect the Key Counter Harness to the KEY

Harness.
(37) Install the Key Counter Cover.

(38) Secure the Key Counter Cover with 4 Screws
(XTB3+6FFJ-RP).
ON position.
disconnected.
Note:
If you are not installing the Key Counter at this
time, cover the opening with the Key Counter
Front Cover and secure it with 4 Screws
(XTB3+6FFJ-RP).
414
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
8.21. Replacing the OPC Drum

Note:
To avoid Toner spill in the machine, follow the steps below before removing the Process Unit.
1. Press "FUNCTION" and "1 SIDED COPY" keys simultaneously.
2. The LCD shows “Please wait...” for approx. 5 sec. Then it will be ready.


Caution:
machine.
(5) Remove 1 Screw.

415
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(7) Loosen 1 Screw.


Caution:
(10) Unhook 2 Springs.


Caution:
hands.
416
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(13) Remove the OPC Drum Shaft Holder

Assembly.
(14) Remove the Roller Spacer.

(15) Lift the OPC Drum, holding the left side where
the OPC Drum Shaft Holder Assembly was
installed.
(16) Ensure that the OPC Drum is fully coated with

the Drum Starting Powder. Apply additional
Drum Starting Powder onto the surface of the
OPC Drum if required.
Note:
Do not touch the surface of the OPC Drum with
bare hands when removing or reinstalling it.
Grease from fingerprints will affect copy quality.
Caution:
(1000 lx).
(17) Install the new OPC Drum onto the OPC Drum
Shaft Holder.
(18) Insert the OPC Drum Assembly into the Process
Unit.
(19) Reinstall the Process Unit, Toner Bottle and the
Toner Waste Container.
(20) Close the all Covers.
(21) Perform the Copy Service Mode F8-14 (OPC
Counter Starting Point Adjustment) to clear the
OPC Drum Counter.
417
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9 General Network Information

9.1. Network Protocol
9.1.1. OSI Reference Mode
Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most
commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first
released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining
and describing the various processes underlying networking communications.
The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware)
layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the
opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software)
in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and
Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that
describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.
Layer Name Function Protocol
7 Application SMB
SMTP
FTP
6 Presentation DNS
HTTP
Telnet
NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc... etc...
5 Session
TDI
4 Transport TCP/IP
TCP, UDP
IPX/SPX
Net BEUI
Apple Talk
3 Network IP, IPX, etc... IP Address etc...
etc...
ODI Driver, NDIS Driver
2 Datalink PPP... Router Ethernet

MAC Address Token Ring
NIC FDDI
SW Hub ATM
1 Physical Repeater
Hub RS-232C, X21... etc...
OSI Reference Model and Network Terms
418
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.1.2. Protocol
One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or
Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to
input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is
supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for
communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone.
TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX
operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an
RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the
Internet at http://www.ietf.org/.
The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol
suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.
Layer OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base Function
7 Application Application This layer embraces functions of the OSI
6 Presentation Session, Presentation and Application
layers. Protocols at this layer provide
5 Session network services.
4 Transport Transport Compares to OSI Transport layer.
Enables peer communication between
hosts on the internetwork.
3 Network Internet Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network
layer. Protocols move data between
devices on networks.
2 Data Link Network Corresponds to the bottom two layers of
Interface the OSI model. This correspondence
enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist
with existing Data Link and Physical layer
1 Physical standards. This layer is concerned with all
aspects of transmitting and receiving data
on the network.
Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model
9.1.3. Cable
For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several
cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used.
Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 Ω.
Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet.
Category Purpose
1 Voice grade telephone line
2 ISDN
3 10Base-T Token Ring (4M)
4 Token Ring (16M)
5 100Base-TX, ATM (155M)
419
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.2. Layer Functions and Technology

9.2.1. MAC (Media Access Control)
The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network.
These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the
left end identify the manufacturer’s code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner.
For Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from
each station should be unique.
XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
Unique value
Manufacturer ID
MGCS:080023
9.2.2. Network Control

CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) If a node is trying to make a link to the
network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and
the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection.
The General sequence is as follows:
Wait for the next available timing to send,

Send out a frame,
Perform collision sensing simultaneously,
Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary.
(Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident)
802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format

Most significant bit Least significant bit
Pre-amble Destination MAC address Source MAC address Data type Data FCS
8 byte 6 byte 6 byte 2 byte 46 1500 byte 4 byte
Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast)
If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node,
it must be passed to the upper layer.
Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node
immediately.
Token Passing
Token passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs
to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit.
When the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network.
The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor
station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor
station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station
announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active
upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the
beaconing process continues every seven seconds.
420
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data
frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended
recipient of the frame.
When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer,
updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring. When the computer
that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission,
takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring.
Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission.

Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission.
Token Frame Format

Start De-limiter (SFD) P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED)
1 byte 1 byte
P: priority
S: Status
0 = Token Frame
1 = Data Frame
R: Reserved
Data Frame Format
SFD Access Frame Destination Source Data FCS ED Frame
1 byte Control control MAC MAC 4 byte 1 byte Status
1 byte 1 byte 6 or 2 byte 6 or 2 byte 1 byte
Data: Max 4429 byte (4M)
Max 17779 (16M)
There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the
token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can
confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.
421
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.2.3. Ethernet
Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The
original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks
can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star
physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe
10Base-T)
Speed (bps) Topology Cable Type Max Length

10Base-5 10M Bus Yellow cable 500 m (1640 ft)
10Base-T 10M Star Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft)
100Base-TX 100M Star Twisted Pair (Cat. 5) 200 m (656 ft)
802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type
Max length (x 100m)

10 BASE 5
Logical speed BASE : baseband (digital)

(Mbps) BROAD: broadband (analog)
10 BASE - T
TP Twisted Pair
hyphen "-" means type of cable
no "-" means max length
Ethernet Configuration
422
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
TX (+) TX (+)
1 1 1 1
TX (-)
2 2 2 TX (-) 2
RX (+)
3 3 3 RX (+) 3
RX (-)
6 6 6 RX (-) 6
Straight Cable Crossed Cable
Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration

All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly.
The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration.
"1" "0"
0V
-2.05 V
Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from
further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables.
If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent.
The node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for
collision detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the
end of transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period.
There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion
due to the star topology.
9.2.4. Repeater
The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at
the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal,
passing all network traffic in all directions.
They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3
rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the
segments being populated.
Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are
called multiport repeaters.
9.2.5. NIC (Network Interface Card)

NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network
interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.
423
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.3. Network Layer

9.3.1. IP Address
An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is
separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need
a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember.
The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class
C addresses.
Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first
octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number.
Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that
make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID.
Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make
up the host ID.
There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than
223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes.
Class A : First octet reserved for the network address

Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address
Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address
Class A 0
Class B 1 0
Class C 1 1 0
Network address represented as
Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP
addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below:
Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255

Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255
Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255
424
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.3.2. Subnet Mask
A subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated.
IP
192.168.32.1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
192 168 32 1
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
255 255 255 0
IP
Subnet Mask
Network
Address 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
192.168.32.0
Network Address Configuration
Global IP
Address
190.0.0.0 Third
255.255.0.0 190.0.3.1 190.0.3.2 190.0.3.3 Floor
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router Second
190.0.2.1 190.0.2.2 190.0.2.3 Floor
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Ground
Floor
190.0.1.1 190.0.1.2 190.0.1.3
Note 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Upper: IP address
Lower: Subnet mask
Class B Subnet Outline
For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned.
1. Host address is set to all “0”

2. Host address is set to all “1”
Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations.
3. All 4 octets are set to all “1”
IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified.
Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network.
4. All 4 octets are set to all “0”
Reserved for default route for non-destination address
5. Most significant bit starting with “127”
Reserved for loop back address
425
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.3.3. Internet Protocol
The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides
datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams.
It performs the following typical functions:

1. Identifies the IP address
2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram
3. Routing of the IP address
4 byte
Version Internet Type Of Service Total Length

Header Length
ID Flags Fragment Offset
Time To Live Protocol Header Checksum
Source Address
Destination Address
Option + Padding (size varies)
Data
IP Datagram
Terms Detail
Version Currently version 4
Internet Header IP Header field length
Length
Type Of Service Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for
precedence)
ID Identification frame number for upper layer communication
Flags Packet disassembly information
Fragment Offset Offset from most significant bit
Time To Live Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router
Protocol Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h)
Header Checksum Checksum is used for error checking on the header data
Source Address Sender’s IP Address
Destination Address Destination’s IP Address
Option When implemented
Padding Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit
426
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.3.4. Router
Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network
segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination
network address and a destination device address.
Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they
also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by
identifying its header information.
These are the typical functions:
1. Routing
This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table.
2. Packet Filtering
This performs the access and security control for specified routing.
access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23
192.168.32/24 192.168.33/24
Router B
PC-A PC-B PC-C PC-D

192.168.32.1/24 192.168.32.2/24 192.168.33.1/24 192.168.33.2/24
OK OK
permission denied
permission denied
Packet Filtering Sample
3. Address Conversion
NAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to
single private IP Address.
4. IP Masquerade:
This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address.
At the same time the port number is automatically assigned.
Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX
(Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known
manufacturer.
5. Designated Reply
These are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically.
Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all well
known techniques to keep a live connection.
427
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.4. Transport Layer

9.4.1. TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds
to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end
communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for
the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer.
The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.

IP Datagram
TCP segment
IP Header TCP Header Application D ata
(20 byte) (20 byte) (vary)
TCP Segment in IP Datagram

Source Port (2 byte) Destination Port (2 byte)
Sequence Number (4 byte)
Acknowledgment Number (4 byte)
Header Length Reserved Control Flag
(4 bit) (6 bit) (6 bit) Window (6 byte)
Checksum (2 byte) Urgent Pointer (2 byte)
Option PAD
Data (Segment)
TCP Segment Outline
TCP Header Monitoring Sample
428
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Client SYN, Se
quential
No.=453 Increments No. sequentially
8970
8971
C K No.=453 00
AC K , A
l N o.= 1 9194240
quentia
SYN, Se
ACK, AC Server
K No.=191
9724001
Panasonic
Device
TCP 3 Handshake General Flowchart
The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial
sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec.
The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The
ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each
packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.
429
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.5. Upper Layer

9.5.1. DNS (Domain Name System)
The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to
client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain
name structure, to access network resources.
Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most
specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain
Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below:
Panasonic.com
Mail.panasonic.com
ifax.panasonic.com
can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device.
Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names
(i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be
connected to an actual device.
This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to
establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of
the listed Domain Name.
Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline.
• The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code.
• Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available.
• Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots.
• Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots.
• Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)
DNS Server (root)
DNS Server (jp)

3
5
2
4 DNS Server (co.jp)
6 7
1
10
8
DNS Server
(panasonic.com) 9
Panasonic DNS Server Mail Server
(panafax.co.jp) mlsv.panafax.co.jp
Device domain
DNS Name Resolution Sample
The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the
need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be
delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it.
There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world.
430
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below:
1. Query the local DNS Server.
2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company.
3. Com root DNS Server sends the query to the jp root DNS Server.
4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available.
5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name.
6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.
All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not
always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP
address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To
Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary
Name Server.
9.5.2. Primary Name Server

A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the
copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone,
it retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.
9.5.3. Secondary Name Server

A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the
original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then
the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers
in a domain improves performance.
431
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.5.4. SOA (Start of Authority) Record
Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone's
primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as
follows:
IN SOA <source host><contact email><serial No.><refresh time><retry time><expiration time><TTL>
An example of the syntax is shown below:

;
; File: db.127.0.0 file
; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS.
; SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the
; default parameters for information this DNS is
; authoritative for:
;
@ IN SOA nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
951213 ; serial number
43200 ; refresh every 12 hours
7200 ; retry after 2 hours
1209600 ; expire after 2 weeks
172800) ; default ttl is 2 days
;
IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
;
SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file
The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for
the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have
a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis
must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line.
The following list explains the other parameters:
* Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file.
* Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be
expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e.
hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp instead of [email protected]).
* Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone
file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file.
* Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for
changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone transfer.
* Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer fails.
* Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the
expiration time passes, the old zone information is deleted.
* TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is
sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual
resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value.
432
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.5.5. A (Address) Record
The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machine’s name
and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.
; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy
; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais
; zone ' rdmg.pcc.co.jp' last serial 720
; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy
$ORIGIN pcc.co.jp.
rdmg IN SOA nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
721 10800 3600 604800 86400 )
IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp.
IN MX 10 mlsv2.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
$ORIGIN rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
ifax-gz03 IN A 172.21.94.216
qmc-cco1 IN A 133.185.254.212
ifaxos01 IN A 172.21.97.26
ifpdyna IN A 202.244.202.29
A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file
9.5.6. PTR (Pointer) Record

Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names.
DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup.
They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and
then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in
reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below:
<ip reverse domain name> IN PTR <host name>
IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
;
PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file.
9.5.7. CNAME (Canonical Name) Record

The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one
name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below:
<alias name> CNAME <host name>
Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are
useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME
record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.
433
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.5.8. NS (Name Server) Record
The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server
record is shown below:
<domain> IN NS <nameserver host>
An example of a name server record follows below:
@ IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp
The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "pcc.co.jp" is the name
server.
9.5.9. MX (Mail Exchange) Record
The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you
list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail
server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed
to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first
preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on.
If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host's name, pointing at
your host's name. The syntax of this record is shown below:
<domain> IN MX <preference> <mailserver host>
For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.
9.5.10. Reverse Lookup

This is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall
within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA
domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four
octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the
domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the
natural grouping of hosts in a network.
9.5.11. Forwarding
A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of
forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries
to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are
tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not
wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would
involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The
workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the
appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the
timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the
query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central
machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage
of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile
commands.
There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary
zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server's cache or zones will be answered, and
anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list.
For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O' Reilly &
Associates, Inc.
434
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.6. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel.
The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request,
the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP
may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-
SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP
in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a
MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an
OK reply.
The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver
can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that
recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several
recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating
with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK
reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http://
www.imc.org/rfc821
Internet
SMTP Server
PC DNS Server POP Server PC

SMTP
POP 3
Internet Mail Sending and Receiving
9.6.1. Mail Header Sample

Received: from nwr35
by labo.pcc.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157 Delivery route
for <[email protected]>; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Message-Id: <[email protected]> Message ID
Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
From: "Panasonic" <[email protected]>
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: [email protected]
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+" Content-Type
X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572
435
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.7. ITU T.37 and RFC2305

9.7.1. Mode of Operation
The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses
approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet
standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations.
Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes.

Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to
this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended
that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be
capable of transmitting in Simple Mode.
Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not
required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this
recommendation.
9.7.2. Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table
Sender
Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S file
Provide notice in case of local transmission problem
Required
Provide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME
compliant
Strongly Include Message-ID
Recommended Use Base 64 encoding for image data
Use other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are
Optional supported by the receiver
Provide notice on receipt of DSN or other notifications
Receiver
Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place
MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than
display
Required
Be capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files
within a single message
Provide notice in case of reception or processing problems
Optional Use other TIFF Profiles
436
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Offramp Gateway (when implemented)
Be SMTP compliant
Provide delivery failure notification
Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address
Required Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile
transmission
Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile
terminals
Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification
Use DSN for delivery failure notification
Strongly
Recommended Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple
users
Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3
Optional facsimile terminal
Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient
9.7.3. Definitions and Abbreviations
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force

RFC Request For Comment
MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions
POP3 Post Office Protocol version 3
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
DSN Delivery Status Notification
MDN Message Disposition Notification
TIFF Tagged Image File Format
IFD TIFF Image File Directory
Offramp Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or more G3/
gateway G4 facsimile terminals
Mailstore Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by
receiver
Notice Provision of status information to the originator or recipient in a
manner to be determined by the device
RFC reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/

File Format for Internet Fax RFC2301
Tag Image File Format (TIFF) image/tiff MIME Sub-type RFC2302
Registration
Minimal PSTN address format in Internet Mail RFC2303
Minimal FAX address format in Internet Mail RFC2304
A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail RFC2305
Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for facsimile RFC2306
437
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.7.4. File Format for Internet Fax
Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also
compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax
devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding
methods.
S (MH)
B/W Color
C (JPEG)
J F
(JBIG) (MMR, MR)
L (JPEG) M (MRC)
MRC: Mixed Raster Content

A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods.
Class Color Coding Method Remarks

S B/W MH Internet Fax minimal set
F B/W MMR, MR Internet Fax full mode
J B/W JBIG Internet Fax mixed mode
C Color JPEG (lossy) Color minimal set
L Color JPEG (lossless, One bit per color,palletized color image, continuos tone
grayscale) color and grayscale images
M Color Mixed Raster Multiple coders and resolution within a page
Content
438
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.7.5. Minimal Set
The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to
assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged.
The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white
facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations.
Baseline Fields Values

Bits Per Sample 1
Compression 3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4
Fill Order Least significant bit first
Image Width 1728 (A-4)
Image Length N: total number of scan lines in image
New Sub File Type 2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document
Page Number N, m: page number n followed by total page count m
Photometric Interpretation 0: pixel value 1 means black
Resolution Unit 2: inch
Rows Per Strip Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip
Samples Per Pixel 1
Strip Byte Counts Number of byte in TIFF strip
Strip Offsets Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip
X Resolution 204, 200 (pixels/inch)
Y Resolution 98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch)
Extensions Fields
T4 Options 0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned4: MH coding, EOLs
byte aligned
9.7.6. Addressing
A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an
extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to
PSTN-based services.
(1) Offramp FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com
Global-phone
Domain
Service selector
(2) Sub address FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org

Sub address Domain
Selector
Global-phone
Service selector
(3) Others VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com
Global-phone Domain
Service selector
439
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Note:
For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words
“MUST”, “MUST NOT”, “REQUIRED”, “SHALL”, “SHALL NOT”, “SHOULD”, “SHOULD NOT”,
“RECOMMENDED”, “MAY”, and “OPTIONAL” in this document are to be interpreted as described in
RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119
1. MUST
This word, or the terms “REQUIRED” or “SHALL”, means that the definition is an absolute requirement
of the specification.
2. MUST NOT
This phrase, or the phrase “SHALL NOT”, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the
specification.
3. SHOULD
These words, or the adjective “RECOMMENDED”, means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and
carefully weighed before choosing a different course.
4. SHOULD NOT
This phrase, or the phrase “NOT RECOMMENDED” means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full
implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior
described with this label.
9.7.7. Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data
Header
First IFD Offset
Value Offset IFD (Page 0) Next IFD Offset
Long Values Strip Offset
Image Data
(Page 0)
Value Offset IFD (Page 1) Next IFD Offset

Long Values Strip Offset
Image Data
(Page 1)
IFD (Page 2)
File Structure
440
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Message Header Contents
9.7.8. Delivery Failure

In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the
format of a DSN.
9.7.9. Image File Format

The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with
the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306.
The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
441
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.8. Communication Protocols

The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport,
document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security.
Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:
SMTP Command & Reply Procedure
your Panasonic Device SMTP Server

(ef1.labo.pcc.com) (sv2.labo.pcc.com)
TCP 3 Way
Handshake &
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
Opening Session
[5 minutes] 220 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service ready
HELO sv2.labo.pcc.com
250 ef1.labo.pcc.com
SMTP Command
MAIL FROM: <[email protected]>
250 OK
[5 minutes]
RCPT TO: <[email protected]>
[5 minutes] 250 OK
DATA
250 Start mail out;end with <CR/LF> . <CR/LF>

[2 minutes]
DATA BLOCK 1
DATA BLOCK
[3 minutes] DATA BLOCK 2
[3 minutes]
DATA BLOCK n
CR/LF . CR/LF
250 OK
[10 minutes]
QUIT
Closing
221sv2.labo.pcc.com Service closing

transmission channel
Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP:
1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or
2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message.
A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily
reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code.
The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.
442
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.8.1. Opening and Closing
At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts
are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the
transmission channel for opening and closing:
HELO:<SP> <domain> <CRLF>

QUIT:<CRLF>
In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as
saying, “Hello, I am <domain>”.
9.8.2. Mail (MAIL)

This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
mailboxes.
9.8.3. RECIPIENT (RCPT)

This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by
multiple uses of this command.
9.8.4. Data (DATA)

The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes
the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of
the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the
character sequence “<CRLF>.<CRLF>”. This is the end of mail data indication.
9.8.5. Send
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.
9.8.6. Reset (RSET)

This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients,
and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK
reply.
9.8.7. Verify (VRFY)

This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full
name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.
9.8.8. Quit (QUIT)

This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.
9.8.9. Reply Codes from SMTP Server

SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a
user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The
receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated
by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the
sender-SMTP in response to the commands.
443
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.8.10. NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES
211 System status or system help reply

220 <domain> Service ready
221 <domain> Service closing transmission channel
250 Requested mail action okay# completed
251 User not local; will forward to <forward-path>
354 Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>
421 <domain> Service not available: closing transmission channel
[This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down]
450 Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox busy]
451 Requested action aborted: local error in processing
452 Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage
500 Syntax error# command unrecognized
[This may include errors such as command line too long]
501 Syntax error in parameters or arguments
502 Command not implemented
503 Bad sequence of commands
504 Command parameter not implemented
550 Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox not found# no access]
551 User not local; please try <forward-path>
552 Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation
553 Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed
[E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect]
554 Transaction failed
444
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.9. POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3)

9.9.1. Introduction
On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport
system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order
to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously
running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an
IP-style network for long amounts of time.
The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a
mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a
workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it.
For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939
9.9.2. Basic Operation
Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host
wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the
connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange
commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted.
Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more
arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable
ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords
are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long.
Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional
information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long,
including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("-
ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case.
Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after
sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF
pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet
(decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination
octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response.
Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line
response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than
CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately
follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing
".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response.
A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has
been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state.
In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the
server @acquires resources associated with the client’s mail drop, and the session enters the
TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the
client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server
releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP
connection is then closed.
A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by

responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the
session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method
for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server
which is unwilling or unable to process the command.
445
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes’
duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto
logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should
close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.
9.9.3. POP3 Command Summary
Minimal POP3 Commands:
USER name valid in AUTHORIZATION state

PASS string
QUIT
STAT valid in the TRANSACTION state

LIST [msg]
RETR msg
DELE msg
NOOP
RSET
QUIT
Optional POP3 Commands:
APOP name digest valid in AUTHORIZATION state
TOP msg n valid in the TRANSACTION state

UIDL [msg]
POP3 Replies:
+OK
-ERR
Note:
With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any
command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this
reply.
From: To:
Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log
446
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure

your Panasonic Device POP 3 Server
(ef1.labo.pcc.com) (sv2.labo.pcc.com)
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)

TCP 3 way
handshake & +OK POP Server ready
Opening Session <[email protected]>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
AUTHORIZATION PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
STAT
+OK 2 126040
TRANSACTION
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)
UPDATE
TCP 3 way Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)

handshake & +OK POP Server ready
Opening Session <[email protected]>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
AUTHORIZATION PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
TOP 1 1
+OK 69762 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 1
+OK 69752 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
DELE 1
+OK Message 1 has been deleted.
TRANSACTION TOP 2 1
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 2
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
DELE 2
+OK Message 2 has been deleted.
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
UPDATE Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)
447
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC

Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of
eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as
an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble.
One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC.
Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer's network
PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail.
Command Sample Purpose

Ping Ping 192. 168. 1. 30 Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.1.30)
Ipconfig /all Ipconfig /all Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS
server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address,
WINS etc)
For Windows 95/98/Me, please type “winipcfg” instead of
Ipconfig/all
Tracert Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.2.245)
Netstat Netstat Active connection list
Netstat -nr Active route for your subnet.
All special assigned IP addresses are also shown
Net view Net view Checking for the current file sharing Host Name
Nslookup Nslookup Checking for the DNS server IP address.
This command is available for Windows NT only.
Note:
Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.
448
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP)
START
Is the LAN connected Yes

to an ISP
No No Is this a Dialup
connection ?
No Is static IP address Yes
available ?
Not supported
Yes
DHCP Client? Is there a MX and A Record
Is G3 Gateway entry for your Panasonic
Yes Device in the DNS table ? No
function being used ?
Yes
No Yes Not supported
Is POP account Is POP account
Yes available ? available ?
No No
Is there a MX and A Record
entry for your Panasonic No Yes
Device in the DNS table ?
Not supported
Yes
Set network parameters Set network parameters Set network parameters for
for POP receiving for SMTP receiving POP receiving and set G3
Gateway parameters for
your Panasonic Device
If not ready If not ready If not ready
Ask the Network Check the host name by Ask the Network
Administrator to setup using the DOS Administrator to setup a
a new POP account. command-line "ping" new POP account.
and "nslookup". Check the host name by
using the DOS
command-line "ping"
and "nslookup".
Important Notice:
The customer who supposed to operate G3 Gateway function for Panasonic models,
the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware
how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may
ask Security Policy Manager to allow relay message by changing
configuration of Massage Transfer Agent like Sendmail. Otherwise the system
denied any relay operation.
449
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature

DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of
reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts.
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself
dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP
address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and
executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the
addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a
host using BOOTP.
DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters
from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts.
DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation.

In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client.
In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the
client explicitly relinquishes the address).
In "manual allocation", a client's IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used
simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these
mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator.
"DHCP client"
A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network
address.
"DHCP server"
A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients.
Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use.
Message Comments
DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers.
DHCPOFFER Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration
parameters.
DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server
and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of
previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease
on a particular network address.
DHCPACK Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network
address.
DHCPNAK Server to client indicating client's notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client
has moved to new subnet) or client's lease as expired
DHCPDECLINE Client to server indicating network address and in use.
DHCPRELEASE Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease.
DHCPINFORM Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has
externally configured network address.
Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use
450
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when allocating a new network address.
Server Client Server
(not selected) (selected)
Begins initialization
Determines DHCPDISCOVER DHCPDISCOVER Determines

configuration configuration
DHCPOFFER DHCPOFFER
Collects replies
Selects configuration
DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST Commits configuration
DHCPACK
Initialization complete
Graceful shutdown
DHCPRELEASE Discards lease
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers

when allocating a new network address
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when reusing a previously allocated network address.
Server Client Server
Begins initialization
Locates DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST Locates

configuration configuration
DHCPACK DHCPACK
Initialization complete
Subsequent
DHCPACKS ignored
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when
reusing a previously allocated network address
451
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must
be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message.
Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.
INITIALIZATION
INITIALIZE/
REBOOT DHCPNAK/
DHCPACK -/Send DHCPDISCOVER
(not accepted)/
Restart
Send DHCPDECLINE
DHCPNAK, Lease expired/
-/Send DHCPREQUES Halt network
DHCPNAK/
Discard offer SELECTING
DHCPOFFER/
REBOOTING Collect replies
Select offer/
send DHCPREQUEST
REQUESTING REBINDING DHCPNAK/

Halt network
DHCPOFFER/
Discard
DHCPACK/
DHCPACK/ Record lease, set
DHCPACK/ Record lease, set /timers T1,T2
Record lease, set /timers T1,T2
timers T1, T2
T2 expires/
Broadcast
DHCPREQUEST
BOUND
T1 expires/ DHCPACK/
Send DHCPREQUEST Record lease, set
to leasing server timers T1, T2
T1 expires/
Send RENEWING
DHCPREQUEST
to leasing server
The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its
network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server
that originally issued the client’s network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and
attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which
the client’s lease will expire.
To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.
State-transition diagram for DHCP clients
For more detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from the following URL:
http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.
452
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature

The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet
Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents
(MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality
such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined.
(1) Delivery confirmation (required)

(2) Additional document features (optional)
In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be
separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery
agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two
different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively.
Panasonic supports MDN.
Delivery Status Notification (DSN)

A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed
delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support
DSNs. Panasonic Internet FAX does not request DSN while sending.
fail
SMTP Server SMTP Server
DSN
DSN returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurred.
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN)

A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after
successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without
display) of the message, or the recipient's refusal to provide MDNs.
SMTP Server SMTP Server

MDN
Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed properly.
The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to
keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message
transmissions.
453
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from the Options menu of Outlook Express.
MDN request
MDN notify
Additional Document Capabilities

Section 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305] allows sending only the minimum
subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values
supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles
defined in RFC 2301, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF
profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities.
MDN Response
Read Receipt
Capabilities
(1) MDN Request
Internet FAX (3) SMTP Server SMTP Server (2) Internet FAX
Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging Process
(1) Request
If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message
Disposition Notification when sending the message itself.
Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address as following formula.
454
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
MDN Request Sample
Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500
Message-Id: <[email protected]>
From: "Panasonic Internet FAX" <[email protected]>
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
Disposition-Notification-To: <[email protected]>
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
(2) Recipient's MDN Response

Recipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the
Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response
after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as
convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with
address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent.
MDN Response Sample
Mime-Version: 1.0
MESSAGE X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
HEADER Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500
Message-Id: <[email protected]>
From: <[email protected]>
Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX
In-Reply-To: <[email protected]>
References: <[email protected]>
Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
********** Read Receipt **********

BODY
TEXT
This message was opened by
’[email protected]’
dd Mmm yyyy 15:42
******************************************
ATTACHED Final-Recipient: rfc822;[email protected]

FILE Original-Message-ID: <[email protected]>
Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched
Media-Accept-Features:
(& (type="image/tiff")
(color=Binary)
(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
(MRC-mode=0)
(ua-media=stationery)
(paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal])
(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
(| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
(& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) )
(& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )
455
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
(3) Processing Confirmation
The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected
several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue.
For more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.
456
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature

The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring
the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP).
This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide
read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is
intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP.
X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall
namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global
directory structure.
It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that http & html are used to define & implement the
global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they can
use a web browser to peruse the global Web.
From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at
directory services.
9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP)

- Extended Feature
The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called
APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires
that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. Challenge-
Response Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while
retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5.
Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific
password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a
sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to
check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the
risk of password capture is greatly enhanced.
An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay
protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP
command provides this functionality.
A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For
example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3
server, the syntax of the timestamp might be:
<process-ID.clock@hostname>
where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process's PID, clock is the decimal value of the system
clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is
running.
457
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
Client Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110)
Challenge Response
<[email protected]> +OK POP3 server ready <[email protected]>
Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD

<[email protected]>PASSWD APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb
Possible Responses:
+OK
+OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets) -ERR permission denied
Produces a 16 octet digest value of
c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb STAT
+OK 1
Continue to follow the POP3 procedure
APOP overview
The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name''
parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter
is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including angle-
brackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and
server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the
secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter
itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters.
When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct,
the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state.
Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state.
Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.
458
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth)

- Extended Feature
SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the
Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service
extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server,
perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent
protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To
use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for
optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.
Client Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25)
220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready
EHLO jgm.example.com
250-smtp.example.com
250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5
AUTH CRAM-MD5
334
PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA
ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
235 Authentication successful
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure
SMTP AUTH overview
The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the
requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and
identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the
requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504
reply.
Challenge Response
334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
Produces a Challenge BASE64 decoded string
<[email protected]>
Genrates Digest parameter

Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message
USER Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of:
Fred 9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e
BASE64 encoded string
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are
specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a
334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line
459
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a
line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a
501 reply.
If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the
server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more
specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully
complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply.
The service name specified by this protocol's profile of SASL is "smtp".
Error Codes
The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described.
432: A password transition is needed
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected
Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication
mechanism.
538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only
be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted.
454: Temporary authentication failure
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server
failure.
530: Authentication required
This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or
QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.
460
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
9.17. Direct SMTP Transfer - Extended Feature

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. An important feature of
SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as SMTP mail relaying by
employing SMTP server.
Direct SMTP transfer allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly employing no SMTP
server. To enables this feature, you must configure its static IP address, subnetmask, default gateway and
etc. accordingly. Domain Name System (DNS) must be required to run the system, so that hosts and some
additional records must be properly existed in DNS entries.
Please note that the system runs under DHCP dynamic updates with DNS meets its requirement also.
In other words, DHCP runs non-Dynamic Updates in the Domain Name System cannot be applied for
Internet Fax who whish to enables Direct SMTP transfer function.
Further more, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the
corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely reticent to open the firewall for
other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats.
So the Direct SMTP transfer can be operating throughout the organization's Intranet.
Capability exchanges and content negotiations are also available to take advantageous communication
between Internet Fax communications.
Several service extensions are newly assigned.

(1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG"
(2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command
Sender Recipient
Establish TCP connection
TCP Port No. 25
220
EHLO
Check for Capability
250 Response of CONNEG Capability contents sample
250-<[email protected]> recipient ok
MAIL FROM:<[email protected]> 250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
250- (MRC-mode=0)
250 250- (color=Binary)
250- (|(&(dpi=204)
250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) )
RCPT TO:<[email protected]> CONNEG 250- (&(dpi=200)
Request for Capability 250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
250 Capacity Exchange 250- (&(dpi=400)
250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) )
250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure 250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG)
250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85)
250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) )
250- (size-x<=2150/254)
250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) )
Direct SMTP Overview 250 (ua-media=stationery) )
461
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
memo
462
Ver. 1.0 JUN 2004
Ver. 1.0
Model Drawing Name
DP-1520P/ General Circuit
1820P/1820E Diagram
MRCLH4
2 INTERMEDIATE
14 +24VM
5 1 L1
13
ROLLER CLUTCH 3 3
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE 4 1 L2 1
12 LINE
CN22
3
CN392
11 2 ADF4 AGND
PARTS WITH A MARK ON THIS SCHEMATIC 2 PAPER FEED
CN773
+24VM 7 7
10 nCTON
CN20
1 1 CLUTCH 6
DIAGRAM INCORPORATE SPECIAL FEATURES 9 6 nHKOF 1 1
5
FAX (Option)
8 5 2 2
IMPORTANT FOR SAFETY. pCMLD
4 4
7 +24V
CN25
WHEN SERVICING, IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ONLY 3 3
CN772
6 EXT. TEL GND
CN391
2 2
MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFIED PARTS ARE USED FOR 5 +5VP
MJR
CN390
CN80
3 1 1
4
CN21
THE CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN THE PARTS
3
12 MGND
+24VM
24 2 FXB 79 79
IDENTIFIED WITH A MARK IN THE SCHEMATIC. 11 23 1 80 80
CN811
2
10 22
1 CSTOP4
9 21
JAMDOR4 GND
8
10 Schematic Diagram
20 2 2
*1: Japan Specification Only +24VM FDPCHK4 MRCLH3
pSPKOT
4th TRAY 1 7 19 1 1 CN394
UPLIMIT4 2 INTERMEDIATE
LIFTM4 +24VM
4
3
2
1
LIFT MOTOR 6 18
10.1. General Circuit Diagram
SPEAKER
CN393
M 2 1
5
CN774
CN771
*2: Europe Specification Only CST4 ROLLER CLUTCH
5 17
PCHK4 4
4 16
LIFT4 3
GND
LDJAM4 3 15 ADF3
2 2 PAPER FEED 4
CN806
3 3 MRCLH4 +24VM
pSPENB
2 14
pBZCLK5
JAM COVER 2 GND 1 1 CLUTCH 3

2 ADF4
nBZH1GH5
*1
SENSOR JAMDOR4 1 13 2
1 1 N.C.
CN778
16 26 1
to PNL1
N.C.
CN50 15 25
4 N.C. LD
CST2
LDCST4 14 12
CN808
3 5 5
4th TRAY 3 11 P/S
*1
GND 13 4 4
DETECTION 2 2 N.C.
12 10 N.C.
USB I/F CST4 3 3
SENSOR 1 N.C. MRCLH2
CN777
1 9 MGND 2
3rd TRAY
11 2 2 INTERMEDIATE
N.C. +24VM
CN805
10 8 +24VM 5 1 ROLLER CLUTCH
1 1
CST2
N.C. 7
LDFPCHK4 9 4
DRIVE MOTOR
12 3 3 N.C.
CN64
CN62
CN63
CN65
REGISTRATION GND 8 6 3
FRM
FRM
2
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
2 ADF2
SORT
CARD
FROM
11 FDPCHK4 N.C.
CN773
SENSOR 1 7 5 2 2 PAPER FEED
MEMORY
1 +24VM
CN776
10 GND 4 1
6 LDJAM2 1 CLUTCH
3
CN770
9 LDUPL4 +5V 3 3
5 GND
8 6 MGND
JAM COVER 2 2
UPPER LIMIT 32 GND 4 2 SENSOR JAMDOR2
5 1 1
7 UPLMT4 +24VM 1
CN778
SENSOR 1 4 3 LIFTM2
6 LDPHK4 2 2nd TRAY
2 +24VM
CN61
3 3
KEY I/F
1
LAN I/F
5 GND
4 M LIFT MOTOR
LDCST2
CN774
CN775
NO PAPER 2
2 1 nLIFTM3
CN67
CN68
CN69
4 SENSOR 2 3 3
PCHK4 17 +24VM 2nd TRAY GND
1 1 2
CN804
3 M 1 DETECTION 2
HARDWARE
18 MGND
CN777
nCST2 1 12
2 SENSOR 1 24
+24VM
1 3rd TRAY 11 23
LIFT MOTOR 3 LDFPCHK2 3 10 22
REGISTRATION 2 GND 9 CSTOP
8 2 21
SENSOR FDPCHK2 JAMDOR2
1 1 8 20
7
CN776
CST3 7 FDPCHK2
19
CN75
CN74
CN73
6 10 LDUPL2
LDUPL3 UPLIMIT2
6 3 6 6 18
5
CN771
9 UPPER LIMIT 3 GND GND CST2

2 5 UPPER LIMIT 2 5 5 17
4
CN66
8 SENSOR UPLIMIT3 SENSOR UPLMT2 PCHK2
LDBTHP 1 4 1 4 4 16
3 TONER BOTTLE 7 LDPHK2 LIFT2
3 LDPHK3
SC
GND 3 3 3 3 3 15
2 HOME POSITION 2 6 MRCLH2
CN800
GND NO PAPER GND

CN775
1 BTHP
NO PAPER 2 2 2 2 2 14
SENSOR 1 5 PCHK3 SENSOR PCHK2 ADF2
SENSOR 1 1 1 1 1 13
SMCNT
CN722
2 4
TONER MOTOR +24VM
M 1 3 18
3 17
2 MGND 26
BMCNT 16
2 2 +24VM
TONER BOTTLE 1 GND 15 25
CN707
CN810
+24VM 14 14 OP3FDIN
MOTOR M 1 1 14 12
+24VM
13 13 OP3CLK
13 11
LDJAM3
12 12 OP3ENB
3 3 OP3FDIN 12 10
GND 11 11 OP3FLD
MGND JAM COVER 2 2 11 9
3 12 10 OP3FLD
3 SENSOR 1 JAMDOR3 10 OP3FCK
nFNRDT 1 OP3ENB 10 8
CN802
REAR FAN 2 2 11 9 9 OP3FOT

CN770
+24VFL OP3FDT 9 7
1 1 10 8 8 OP3RST
4 OP3FCK
8 6
9 LDCST3 7 7 OP3FLT
3 7 5
CN807
8 8 3rd TRAY 3 GND OP3FLT

GND
2 6 6
CN772
DETECTION 2 OP3RST 6 4
7 7 CST3 5 5 +5V
1
CN801
SENSOR 1 GND 5 3
6 6 4 4 MGND
LDHEX +5V 4 2
CN721
3 5 5 LDFPCHK3 3 3 +24VM
PAPER EXIT GND 3 3 3 1
2 4 4 2 MGND
REGISTRATION GND 2
SENSOR nHEXSEN 2 2 +24VM 2
1 3 3 1 1
SENSOR 1 FDPCHK3 1
THERM2 1
2 2
CN803
THERMISTOR THERM1
(TMIS) 1 1
CST3HT
CST4HT
CST2HT
LSUHT
VOUT2
CCDHT
1 1
MCCDHT
AGND
2 2
VOUT1
BYPASS FEED 2 HFSOL 6 3 3
+24VM AGND
SOLENOID 1 5 4 4
AGND
2
1
2
1
2
1
4 5 5
AC SW
PAPER FEED PFCLCNT AGND

2 3 6 6
+24VM +12V
CLUTCH 1
CN715
2 7 7
AGND
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1 CN3 8 8
REGISTRATION RRCLCNT +24VM GND
2 13 5 5 9 9
ROLLER +24VM MGND GND
1 12 4 4 10 10
CLUTCH PMON pPHYCP
LSU
11 3 3
2
1
2
1
11 11
2
1
2
1
463
M
PMRDY
CN55
10 2 nPHYCP
LDHFPE 2 12 12
CN850
MOTOR
3 3 PMCK pPHYR
16 GND BYPASS FEED 9 1 1 13 13
CCD
15 2 2 POWCNTV nPHYR
nHFPESEN SENSOR 8 1 8 14 14
14 1 1 GND LDI-
7 pPHY2
GND 2 7 4 1 4 15 15
13 5 RETRACE LDI+
2
1
2
1
nOPDUP 6 6 2 nPHY2
4 3 3 3 16 16
12
CN701
LDEN GND pPHY1

CN173 CN172 LDDUX 3 5 4 5 2 3 2 17 17
11 3 3 HSYNC +3.3V
CN57
GND DUPLEX 4 5 4 1 4 nPHY1

10 2 2 2 1 18 18
S/H FSH
nDUPSEN 1 SENSOR 1 3 6 3 19 19
9 1
CN728
LDPED GND +5V

RLB
2
CN1
2 7
LSU
8 8 3 20 20
Dehumidifier Heater (Option)
GND
BYPASS FEED L5V
CN171 7 2 NO PAPER 1 8 1
7
CN712
nPEDSEN
2
1
6 6 1 SENSOR CN2
nA5SEN 3
5 5 5
nB4SEN 2
AC(L)
4 4
AC(N)
4
GND 1
3 3 3
CN727
nA3SEN
SSN
CN42
UNIT
2 2 2
SPC
LDSSN 1 14
1 1
LIFT1 13
PROCESS
LDRRSEN
CN53
2 12
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+24VM 3
22
21
20
19
16
17
18
15
14
13
12
11
10
REGISTRATION
M
1 GND
TRANSFER T
D
C
11 2
G
CN706
1st TRAY
ROLLER
COIL
COIL
RSEN
*2
10 1 SENSOR
LIFT MOTOR
LDCSTSEN
CH35TA
CH48TA
GND
GND
GND
nATT
9
pBDA
3 1st TRAY
IICSCL
nSACK
nPACK
IICSDA
nVRDY
nPRDY
nSREQ
pVREQ
GND
SPCTXD
8
SPCRXD
nDUREQ
2
pSENTIM
DETECTION
pSPCRST
nPVSYNC
nDUPACK
CASET
nSCNWUP
nMMRDY
nPRGDWN
10 10 7 1 SENSOR
F/R LDUPLSEN
9 9 6
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN709
3
22
21
20
19
16
17
18
15
14
13
12
11
10
MGND nMMCK GND

UPPER
3 3 12 8 8 5 2 LIMIT
nFNRDTP nMMON UPLIMIT CN717
PS/LSU 2 2 11 7 7 4 1 SENSOR
FAN +24V +5V
1 1 10 6 6 3 LDPSEN
GND
3
GND
M
5 5 2 2 NO PAPER
CN723
MGND PCHK1 SENSOR

4 4 1
5
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
T401 MGND
MAIN MOTOR
3 3
CN6 CN4 CN504 CN502 CN501 CN2 +24VM
2 2
MGND +24VM
9 9 1 1 8
CCRMT CN720 VOUTX
14 7
CN1 CN3 CN5 8 8 VINX
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TC
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
13 6
2
1
4
2
3
1
1
2
7 7 GND
TPWM nDUXSOL 12 5
6 6 2 DUPLEX
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
DDCPWM
GND
GND
+24VM 11 4
LDTF
+24VM
SENSOR 2
+24VM
+24VM
5 5
TDREF
1
TDSEN
SOLENOID
AC(L)
AC(L)
LEDZ
nCTCNT
LDWTB
AC(L)
AC(L)
AC(N)
AC(N)
AC(N)
AC(N)
ELPCNT
N.C.
nTFSEN
HUMISN
10 3
TEMPSN
CN719
4 4
CN500
nWTBSEN
LEDY
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GPWM
1
2
9 2
ORIGINAL SIZE
3 3 LEDX
1
2
CPWM 8 1
2
1
2
1
2 2
3
2
1
*1
CN702
4
3
2
1
+24VM CCNT 8
1 1 6
+5V VOUTA
4
3
2
1
N
E
L
INLET
5 7 7
+24VD1 KCDET VINA
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
CN710
10 22 +5V 6
To SPC
4 6
(CN721)
ACSW KEY 40 40 GND

9 21 GND +5V
3 39 39 5 5
SSR KCNT COUNTER +5V
2
1
4
3
1
2
CN726
8 20 MGND
E
2 WTS 38 38 4 4
White
Black
ZCRS
SENSOR 1
+24VM
THERMISTOR
7 19 +24V LEDC
1 TONER 37 37 3 3
GND LEDB
6 18 DENSITY nDADFON 2
SENSOR
36 2
TOTAL
36
ORIGINAL SIZE
GND
HUMIDITY
5 17 nSADFON LEDA
CN12
SENSOR 1 1
PCL
GND 35 35
AC SW
PS
COUNTER
4 16 MGND
FUSER LAMP
34 34
TONER
WASTE
+5V
FUSER UNIT
3 15 MGND
SENSOR
+5V 1 33 33
2 14 +24VD1
THERMAL FUSE THERMOSTAT
+5VP 2 32 DAA1 32
1 13 3 GND
POWER CORD
ILS 31 31
HDD (Option) 2 +24V
+24V +24V 30 30
4 4 1 1 GND
CN708
+24V 29 29
3 3 +24V
LAMP
4 MGND 28 28
2 2 pADATA1B
CN10
MGND 27 27
SOLENOID
CN703
3 DC12 1 1
26 pADATA1A 26
SCANNING
F 2 CN11
SOLENOID
CN59
CN143
HDD 40P
CNHD1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25 nASTROAD1 25
CNSHD1
15
14
13
12
11
10
1 CN141 CN142
STAMP
nACLOCKAD1
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
24 24
SENSOR
SWITCH LED nACLH3

RELEASE LEVER
SNS
DUPLEX 2 GUIDE
SOLENOID
LENGTH
23
PLATE SOLENOID
23
LENGTH
+5V
REVERSING GUIDE 1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+24V
+5VP
ADF COVER
+5VD
+3.3V
+3.3V
SENSOR
HVAC2
HVAC1
HDD CN41 22 nACLH2 22

nVCNT
nLPOW2
nLPOW1
nACLH1
SENSOR 2 1
2
ORIGINAL 3
SENSOR 1 1
2
ORIGINAL 3
1
2
3
4
PNL3-3 PNL3-4 21 21 MGND

5
1
READ POINT
nSTAMP 5 5
ADF
20
1
2
3
1
2
20
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
2
1
3
1
2
MGND
15
14
13
12
11
10
nAPICR 4 4 CN2
1
OPEN DETECTION 2
3
1
2
3
CN254 CN256 19 19 nFLON

CN145 CN51 nAPACHG 3 3
CN650
CN1
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
18 18 +24V
INV
CN656
2 2
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
nAKEEP2
GND
GND
GND
GND
17
nAPICR
CN52 17 +24V
1 1
+24VOPF
nAKEEP1
nAKEEP2
CSB1
+24VOPC
+24VOPC
nAOAC
nAPACHG
+24VOPF
nAADL1
nAADL2
nAB4S
nAA3S
nAB1SN
16 nAKEEP1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
nASTAMP
16
GND
+5v
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
RESETB nAOAC
2 15
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
6
7
3
4
5
1
2
15
10
RS nAREV
CN21
3 14 14
RW_WRB CN29 CN28 CN25 CN26 6 nOUTB 6
4 nAEJC
13
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
E_RDB
1 13 +24V
5 5
G6
5 nAB1SN
DB0 CN22 CN30 CN24 12 12 4 OUTB
4
6 CN254 CN256 nAB2SN
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11 11
10
DB1 PNL3 3 nOUTA 3

M
+5V
MOTOR
7
GND
GND
GND
10 nAADL2
+24V
10 +24V
+5VP
DB2 CN253 CN252

CN655
2 2
nVCNT
8
nWAKE
nSLPKY
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SCANNING
9 nAADL1
PNLTXD
9
+5v
+5v
+5v
nLPOW1
nLPOW2
PNLRXD
DB3 OUTA
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
nPNLRST
1 1
GND
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
9 nAA3SN
OUTB
OUTA
IOUTB
IOUTA
nAEJC
nAREV
DB4 8 8
nCCLH1
nCCLH2
nAB2SN
nCCLH3
10
+24VOPF
+24VOPF
+24VOPF
nAB4SN
DB5 7 7
N.C.
KIN6
KIN5
KIN4
11
LED7
LED8
LED9
N.C.
+ACT
+DAT
+ALM
N.C.
KIN0
KIN1
KIN7
KIN2
KIN3
DB6 6
SCN6
SCN3
SCN5
SCN4
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
4
1
4
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
4
1
3
2
1
12
LEDCT1
LEDCT2
LEDCT3
LEDCT4
LEDCT0
G5
nAAPNT
nLEDDAT
nLEDACT
nLEDALM
DB7 5 5
13
VDD +24V
4 4
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
14
VCL GND
15 3 3
EJECT
CN220 CN233 CN232 LDORI

M
VSS MGND 3
ROLLER
7
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
16 2 2 HOME
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
VOUT +5VP GND

17 2 1 1 6 2 POSITION
INVERTING
C4+
CN27 nORI
5 1 SENSOR
ADF ROLLER
3
2
1
18 1
CN223
LCD
1
C3+
PNL1 nBDOOR
4
DUPLEX EJECT
4
CN221
19
FEED 2 ROLLER
ADF
C1- GND
ADF EXIT COVER
CN657
20 CN235 3 3
+5v
CN230 CN231 CN234

GND
C1+ nANG SNS

2
MOTOR
21 2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
12
11
10
14
13
12
11
10
nAAPNT
C2+ +5VP
22 1 1
C2-
23
3
2
1
BZ-
V1
BZ+
KIN2
KIN3
KIN4
KIN5
KIN6
KIN7
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
LED0
BAT+
KIN1
KIN0
GND
SCN1
SCN0
24
+SLP
LED6
GND
GND
KIN0
KIN1
KIN7
KIN2
KIN6
KIN3
KIN5
KIN4
SCN2
nOPT
SCN9
SCN8
V2
LEDCT4
LEDCT3
LEDCT2
SCN10
SCN11
nSLPKY
25
LEDCT1
LEDCT0
pSPENB
nLEDSLP
pBZCLK5
V3
*1
26
nBZH1GH5
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
V4
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
12
11
10
14
13
12
11
10
27
V0
SENSOR
28 CN250 CN251 CN280

ORIGINAL
PS
29
to FXB Keyboard
DETECTION
HPMB
30 BA PNL4 (Option)
PNL2
JUN 2004
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
DP-1520P/1820P/1820E
memo
Ver. 1.0 464 JUN 2004

Panasonic
88
Software
Network Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3
DZSD001829-7
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)
Table of Contents
1. General 3
1.1 Supporting OS .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3
2. Installation 4
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 4
2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool ........................................................................................ 4
2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool...................................................................................... 5
3. Preparing the Firmware Update 6

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 6
3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher) 6
3.1.2 For other models 6
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 6
4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool 7
1st Edition : 2002 March 20

2nd Edition : 2002 August 1
3rd Edition : 2002 December 5
4th Edition : 2003 April 10
6th Edition : 2003 December 18
Windows, Windows NT, Windows 2000 and Windows XP are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 2002-2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
The contents of these Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.
Page 2
1. General
The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine connected via LAN (TCP/IP) to
program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the
Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
• Windows 98 / Me
• Windows NT 4.0
• Windows 2000
• Windows XP
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

A list of the compatible Panasonic Fax/Copy machines are shown below:
• DP-180 / 190
• DP-2310 / 3010
• DP-1520 / 1820
• DP-3510 / 4510 / 6010
• DP-3520 / 4520 / 6020
• DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)
• UF-9000
Note:
1. Depending on the destination, some Panasonic models may not be available.
2. The DX-800 works only when it's firmware is Version 1.31 or higher.
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool
Start Microsoft Windows.
1.
For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or
change configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Run \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the setup disk or folder.

2.
Enter the installation password.
3. Please ask your Sales Company to obtain the password.
Follow the instruction on your screen to install the program.

4.
The completion message is displayed when install is completed.
5. Check “Yes, I want to …” and click [Finish] to restart your PC.
2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool

Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Network
1. Firmware Update then click Network Firmware Update Configuration.
The Configuration dialog box appears.

2.
General Tab
Please change the settings if necessary.
File Selection Tab

Auto-Select Update Mode
When you select this mode, the tool acquires
the type of firmware and version from the
device(s) of the specified address, and
updates the device to the latest version from
the “Local Firmware Folder”.
However, this mode cannot change the type of
firmware, so you must use the manual mode
when changing from the standard firmware to
the option firmware.
Click [OK] to finish the setup.

3.
Page 4
2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool

The Network Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.
Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry
setting problems.

1.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
2. Update then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool.
Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

3.
The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.
4.
Page 5
3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code
3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)
1. If the device password is changed (Remote Password) from the default value (blank = 0000), it is
not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the
Default Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication.
2. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.
3.1.2 For other models

1. If the device password is changed (Key Operator Password) from the default value (0000 or 000),
it is not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the
Default Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication.
As for three-digit Key Operator Password device, only “000” of the default value is judged “0000” in
the value.
2. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data
Note:
The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.
(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)
Page 6
4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool
1. Please close the all applications that are currently running.

Note:
About Windows 2000/XP, using Network Firmware Update Tool, the authority more than a Power
User is required.
2. From the Windows Desktop, double-click on

the Network Firmware Update shortcut icon
to start the Network Firmware Update Tool.
Click [Next>].
Note:
1) Make sure the Key Operator Password on the remote unit and FTP Password on this application
are set correctly.
2) Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition (Copying or Printing etc...).
3) Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote
unit, or a communication error may occur.
4) Do not operate or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code, or the
firmware update isn’t done properly and the device will not boot up again.
5) If the Network Firmware Update fails and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than 20
minutes, you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel/USB port using the
Local Firmware Update Tool or with the FROM card.
3. Click [Device Address List].
Page 7
4. Enter the destination device(s) by using

Manual Input or Device Address List.
Click [OK].
5. Confirm the destination device(s).
Click [Next>].
Page 8
Specify the Firmware Code File using the

6 following methods.
Select an Archive File (Complete Set)
--> Step 6a1
You can select the Firmware Code Archive
File directly here.
The selected archive file will be extracted
into the local \Data folder automatically and
it is chosen as a set when the update of
multiple firmware code files are necessary.
Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
--> Step 6b1
If the archive file is already extracted into
the local \Data folder, you can select the
Parent File Folder directly here.
It is chosen as a set when the update of
Select Independent File Folders
--> Step 6c1
the local \Data folder, you can select
independent file folders here.
Note:
1. Always update PNL, SC and SPC firmware as a set.
2. Files are chosen automatically in the automatic mode, so the screen of step 6 isn’t indicated.
3. The FAX field is not used for DX-600/800/DP-3510/4510/6010.
The DX-600/800 uses only the SC field.
6a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete
Set)" and click [Browse...] button.
6a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].
ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030228.exe
Page 9
6a3 Extracting...
6a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
6a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
6b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete

Page 10
6b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].
ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030228
6b3 Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
6b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 11
6c1 Select Independent File Folders

Select "Select Independent File Folders" and
click [Browse...] button.
6c2 Select the Firmware Code File Folder and

click [OK].
ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN
6c3 Select the other Firmware Code File Folder

and click [OK].
Page 12
6c4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
7. The version check for the specified devices

starts.
Click [Next>].
8. Verify that the information you want to update

is correct.
Then click [Next>].
Note: The firmware of PNL, SC and SPC are

transmitted separately and each time
the unit erases, writes and reboots in
the normal mode.
If you check "Send at once", all
firmware will be sent at once and then
erase, write and reboot. This "Send at
once", function cannot be used if the
firmware type is PCL or PS and the unit
SC version is V1.xxxx
(DP-3510/4510/6010).
Page 13
9. Confirm the destination device(s) again.

Set timer communication if necessary.
Then click [Next>].
10. Data is transferred to the Spooler and the

update is started.
The Spooler window appears automatically
showing the progress of the data transfer.
The spooler will take time to open depending
on the number of addresses to update.
11. When the transfers are completed, all jobs in

the spooler disappear and the communication
log is displayed.
Click [Finish] to close the tool.
After each firmware code is successfully

programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory in
the unit, the unit reboots and restarts again
automatically.
Page 14
Panasonic ®
Software
Local Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3
DZSD000965-12
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)
Table of Contents
1. General 3
1.1 Supporting OS .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3
2. Installation 4
2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine ................................................................ 4
2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool............................................................................................... 4
2.3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only) ................................................. 5
2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 6
3. Preparing the Firmware Update 7

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 7
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 7
4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool 8
1st Edition : 1999 February 10

2nd Edition : 1999 September 30
3rd Edition : 2000 September 8
4th Edition : 2000 November 28
5th Edition : 2001 June 20
6th Edition : 2001 September 7
9th Edition : 2003 December 18
10th Edition : 2004 January 19
11th Edition : 2004 February 10
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Copyright © 1999 - 2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.
Page 2
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)
1. General
The Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB) allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine to emulate a Flash
Memory Card Writer and create a Master Firmware Card, or to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit
directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of
the Unit through the Parallel/USB Port on the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine. The installation and operation are
very similar to the Printer Interface.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
• Windows 98 / Me
• Windows NT 4.0 (Parallel Port only)
• Windows 2000 / XP
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

A list of the compatible Panasonic Fax/Copy machines are shown below:
Parallel Port Models
Programming a Flash Memory Card
• DP-130/135/150
• DP-1510/1810/2010
• DP-2000/2500/3000
• DP-3510/4510/6010, DP-3520/4520/6020
• DX-2000
• UF-585/595/590/790/885/895/890/990
Direct Firmware Update
• DP-1510/1810/2010
• DP-3510/4510/6010, DP-3520/4520/6020
• UF-E1
• UF-490/525/UF-590/790
USB Port Models

Programming a Flash Memory Card
• DP-180/190, UF-9000
• DP-1520/1820
• DP-2310/3010
Direct Firmware Update
• DP-180/190, UF-9000
• DP-1520/1820
• DP-2310 / 3010
Note:
1. Depending on the destination, some Panasonic models may not be available.
2. Some UF-E1 models with the earlier versions of firmware will not support Parallel Firmware Update. Please
confirm whether your machine’s firmware version supports Parallel Firmware Update with your service provider.
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine
Depending on the model, a Parallel Port or USB Port is installed.
1 Please install the Parallel Port/USB Port Assembly into one of the supporting Panasonic
Fax/Copier models by following the appropriate option installation instructions for that model.
Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine and
2 your PC.
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool

1
For Windows NT4.0 / 2000 / XP, log onto the computer/network with an account that can add or
change printer configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
Run \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the install disk.
2
Installation Destination Folder
3
Click [Next] button.
Program Folder
4
Click [Next] button.
Page 4
Copying...
5
The installation is completed.

6
Check “Yes, I want to …” and click [Finish] to
restart your PC.
2.3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only)
After installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool, if you need to install the USB Firmware
1 Update Driver, please set the unit to "Update from USB/* IN PROGRESS *" in the Service
Mode first, and then connect the USB Cable. The required Driver will then be installed
automatically.
Note:
For instructions of how to get into the Service Mode, refer to your machine's Service Manual.
Searching...
2
Installing driver...
When the install screen disappears, the

3 installation of the Firmware Update (USB)
Driver is completed.
Note:
1. The installation screens will vary, and are dependant on the OS.
2. For Windows 2000 or XP, through the "Digital Signature Not Found" or "Software Installation" window will be
displayed during the installation and indicate "Unknown software package" or "not passed Windows Logo testing", please
click [YES] or [Continue Anyway] button to continue the installation
3. If you are asked for the Inf file location, please specify the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\UsbDrv1
4. After the USB Firmware Update Driver is installed, and you are not updating the machine's firmware at this time, turn the
Power Switch OFF and ON again to return your machine to the Standby mode.
Page 5
2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool

The Local Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.
Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry
setting problems.

1.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
2. Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool.
Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

3.
The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.
4.
Note: The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller. Please delete it from the Control
Panel\Printers folder by manually. When you delete USB Firmware Update Driver, please delete it
after you connect the PC to the unit with the USB cable and driver enabled, or it cannot be
deleted properly.
Page 6
3. Preparing the Firmware Update
3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code

Please refer to the Service Manual to set the unit to Firmware Update Mode (Service Mode).
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data
Note:
The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.
(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)
Page 7
4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool
Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel
1 cable or USB cable.
Note: For the USB Port Models, the Plug & Play of the Printer mode is activated when the
USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode. If
this happens, please click the [Cancel] button for the Plug and Play Driver
installation.
Please close the all applications that are
2 currently running. Status Monitor Port Controller
Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or
Port Controller are closed. If they are
running, right click on the icons in the system
tray and select Exit/End.
Note:
About Windows 2000/XP, using Network
Firmware Update Tool, the authority more
than a Power User is required.
From the Windows Desktop, double-click on
3 the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut
icon to start the Panasonic Firmware
Programming Wizard.
Click [Next>].
Note: Please close all applications that are

currently running.
Also ensure that the Status Monitor
and/or Port Controller are closed. If
they are running, right click on the icons
in the system tray and select Exit/End.
Select the Firmware Update Driver USB or

4 Parallel.
Click [Next>].
Note: The “Firmware Update Driver (USB)” is

only displayed if you installed it with the
unit Plug and Play.
Page 8
Specify the Firmware Code File by the

5 following methods.
Select an Archive File (Complete Set)
--> Step 5a1
You can select the Firmware Code Archive
File directly here.
The selected archive file will be extracted
into the local \Data folder automatically and
it is chosen as a set when the update of
Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
--> Step 5b1
the local \Data folder, you can select the
Parent File Folder directly here.
It is chosen as a set when the update of
Select an Independent File
--> Step 5c1
the local \Data folder, you can select an
independent file here.
When updating multiple firmware files, you
must repeat the file selection operation.
5a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete
5a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].
ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030227.exe
5a3 Extracting...
Page 9
5a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
5a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 10
5b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete

5b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].
ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030327
5b3 Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
Page 11
5b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 12
5c1 Select an Independent File

Select "Select an Independent File" and click
[Browse...] button.
5c2 Select the Firmware Code File and click

[Open].
ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN
5c3 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 13
The selected Firmware Code File(s) are

6 indicated. Uncheck the box if you do not need
to transfer a file.
On the unit side:

Set the unit to the Firmware Update Mode.
Click [Next>].
The Firmware Code File starts transferring.

7
When there is more than one file to be
updated, the operation will be the following;
For USB connected unit:

they are transferred in turn automatically if the
unit is ready to receive the next firmware code
file.
Note: If you are updating the
DP-2310/3010, the sending of sequential
multiple files to the unit isn't done
automatically. The "Waiting..." display on
the PC will not advance to "Executing..."
until you set the unit back to USB Firmware
Update on the machine to start receiving the
next file. See Unit information of the
Firmware Update Mode on the next page.
For Parallel connected unit:
the confirmation screen is displayed when the
current firmware code file transfer is finished
and there are remaining firmware code files.
Click [OK] when the machine is ready to
receive the next file.
Page 14
Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode:

For USB Connected Unit (DP-2310/3010):
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and
rewrite of the firmware code and will return to Service Mode again. Set the unit back to
USB Firmware Update after the machine returns to Service Mode and continue the
firmware update.
When the last firmware code file (PNL) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return
to standby. The unit doesn't re-boot automatically when you select an independent file and the
PNL firmware wasn't transferred. Cycle the power Off-On and reset the unit if the firmware code
file transfer is finished and the unit has returned to the Service Mode.
For USB Connected Unit (Other models):
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and
rewrite of the firmware code and will return to USB Firmware Update and continue the
firmware update automatically.
When the last firmware code file (AutoBoot) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and
return to standby. The unit doesn't boot automatically when you select an independent file. (The
display returns to “Update in Progress”) Cycle the power Off-On to reset the unit if the firmware
code file transfer is finished and the display shows Completed.
For Parallel Connected Unit:
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite
of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service
Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update.
When the transfers of all the firmware files are

8 finished, click [Finish] to close the tool.
Note:
For USB Connected Unit only When the unit
returns to standby, Plug and Play of the printer
will popup. Click [Cancel] to close the Printer
Plug and Play window.
Page 15
DZZSM00257

SM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SM PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Order Number: MGCS031201C0

Digital Imaging Systems

© 2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

Distinction of PbF PCB:

Installation and Relocation Cautions

Power and Ground Connection Cautions

8.16. Installing the Platen Cover

General Network Information ............. 418

Schematic Diagram ............................. 463

Network Scanner Function

Internet Fax Function

Inverting ADF (DP-1820E only)

Scanner Unit Document Sensor

Expansion Flash Image Memory

2nd Paper Tray (CST2 PC Board)

3rd Paper Tray (CST3 PC Board)

(For USA Only)

21.97 in (558 mm) 21.54 in (547 mm)

Left View Front View Right View Rear View

For USA, Canada and Europe For Other Destinations

45.91 in (1166 mm)

21.97 in (558 mm) 24.76 in (629 mm)

Left View Front View Right View Rear View

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

16.14 in (410 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

40.67 in (1033 mm)

Main Unit + ADF

3.94 in (100 mm)

16.14 in (410 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

40.67 in (1033 mm)

Main Unit + i-ADF

3.94 in (100 mm)

16.14 in (410 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

40.67 in (1033 mm)

Sequential Production Number

00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units

Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit)

OPTIONS (DP-1820P/1820E only)

Included with Fax,

OPTIONS (DP-1820P/1820E only)

Included with Fax,

ADF Sensor 3 (131)

Sheet Bypass Sensor 1 (131) Fuser Unit Sensor (131)

1.8. Fans and Motors

Rear Fan (815)

Drive Motor (1511) PS Fan (816)

Lift DC Motor (3132)

Interlock Switch (227)

Paper Feed Roller

CCD Unit (427)

PNL4 PCB (2907)

WTS PCB (2806)

2 Disassembling, Cleaning and Replacement

2.2. Disassembly Instructions

(3) Lift the ADF Input Tray (2201).